JP2023107915A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing a third member from being forgotten to be returned to a prescribed position.SOLUTION: By an operation of a lock member 560 from a first position to a second position, an interposing plate 540 becomes possible to be removed from a prescribed position. But, in a state where the lock member 560 is operated to the second position, a front door 5 is regulated to be closed to an inner frame 4. In order to close the front door 5 to the inner frame 4, it is necessary to operate the lock member 560 from the second position to the first position, and for this purpose, it is necessary to dispose the interposing plate 540 at the prescribed position. In this way, unless the interposing plate 540 is returned to the prescribed position, the front door 5 cannot be closed to the inner frame 4, and therefore it is possible to prevent the interposing plate 540 from being forgotten to be returned to the prescribed position.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine comprising a first frame, a second frame attached to the first frame so as to be openable and closable, and a third member disposed on either the first frame or the second frame. , there is a gaming machine in which the third member is at least displaceable from a predetermined position (Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-100994 A

However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that the third member is forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing the third member from forgetting to return to a predetermined position.

In order to achieve this object, a game machine according to claim 1 comprises a first frame member, a second frame member attached to the first frame member so as to be openable and closable, and a third member disposed at a predetermined position on one of the members, the third member being formed to be at least displaceable from the predetermined position, and the second frame relative to the first frame member; An operation member is provided that is operable in at least a first position or a second position when the member is opened, and the third member is operated by operating the operation member from the first position to the second position. is allowed to displace at least from the predetermined position, and the third member is arranged at the predetermined position, so that the operation member can be operated from the second position to the first position, and the operation Closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is restricted at least in a state where the member is not operated to the first position.

A gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein when the operating member is operated to the second position, the operating member is positioned between the first frame member and the second frame member. By being interposed, closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is restricted.

A game machine according to claim 3 is a game machine according to claim 2, wherein a displacement member is displaceably disposed on one of the first frame member and the second frame member, and a biasing force is applied to the displacement member. and a biasing member, wherein when the operating member is operated from the first position to the second position, the displacement member moves to a position that restricts movement of the operating member from the second position to the first position. is displaced by the biasing force of the biasing member.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, it is possible to prevent forgetting to return the third member to the predetermined position.

According to the game machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the game machine of claim 1, it is possible to reduce the product cost.

According to the game machine of claim 3, in addition to the effect of the game machine of claim 2, it is possible to reliably suppress the operation member from moving from the second position to the first position.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine; FIG. Fig. 4 is a front perspective view of the upper portion of the front door; Fig. 3 is a rear perspective view of the upper portion of the front door; Fig. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper portion of the front door; Fig. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper portion of the front door; It is an exploded front perspective view of a locking member. 11(a) is a front view of the rear member as viewed in the direction of arrow XI in FIG. 8, and FIG. 11(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear member taken along line XIb-XIb in FIG. 11(a). 12(a) is a front view of the rear member viewed in the direction of arrow XI in FIG. 8, and (b) is a sectional view of the rear member taken along line XIIb-XIIb in FIG. 12(a). 13(a) is a front view of the rear member viewed in the direction of arrow XI in FIG. 8, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear member taken along line XIIIb-XIIIb in FIG. 13(a). 14(a) is a front view of the rear member viewed in the direction of arrow XI in FIG. 8, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear member taken along line XIVb-XIVb in FIG. 14(a). Fig. 3 is a rear perspective view of the upper portion of the front door; Fig. 3 is a rear perspective view of the upper portion of the front door; It is a top surface schematic diagram of the game machine main part. (a) is a top view of a locking member in a second embodiment, (b) is a side view of the locking member as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18 (a), and (c) is a 18(b) is a front view of the lock member as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIc, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the lock member taken along line XVIIId-XVIIId of FIG. 18(a). 19(a) is a front view of the rear member viewed in the direction of arrow XI in FIG. 8, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear member taken along line XIXb-XIXb in FIG. 19(a). (a) is a front view of the back member as viewed in the direction of arrow XI in FIG. 8, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back member taken along line XXb-XXb in FIG. 20(a). 21(a) is a front view of the rear member viewed in the direction of arrow XI in FIG. 8, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear member taken along line XXIb-XXIb in FIG. 21(a). 22(a) is a front view of the rear member viewed in the direction of arrow XI in FIG. 8, and (b) is a sectional view of the rear member taken along line XXIIb-XXIIb in FIG. 22(a). It is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the inner frame and the front door. (a) to (c) are top views of the inner frame and the front door for explaining state transitions when the front door is closed with respect to the inner frame. 24(a) to 24(c) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame and the front door along lines XXVa-XXVa to XXVc-XXVc of FIGS. 24(a) to 24(c). It is a top view of the game machine main part in 3rd Embodiment. (a) is a partial cross-sectional top view of the one-way clutch and the connecting member when the lock member is slid to the initial position; (b) is a one-way clutch and the connecting member when the lock member is slid to the release position; It is a partial cross-sectional top view of a connection member. (a) is a top view of the interposition plate, (b) is a side view of the interposition plate as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIIIb in FIG. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the interposed plate along line XXVIIIc-XXVIIIc; It is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front door. It is a partially enlarged top view of the front door. It is a top view of the game machine main part. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front door in a 4th embodiment. 33(a) is a rear view of the top plate as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIII in FIG. 32, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the top plate taken along line XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb in FIG. 33(a). (a) is a rear view of the top plate and the panel member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIII in FIG. 32, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the top plate and the panel member taken along line XXXIVb-XXXIVb of FIG. 34(a). 34(c) is a cross-sectional view of the top plate and the panel member taken along line XXXIVc-XXXIVc of FIG. 34(a). 35(a) is a front view of the back member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXV in FIG. 32, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back member taken along line XXXVb-XXXVb in FIG. 35(a). 36(a) is a front view of the rear member viewed in the direction of arrow XXXV in FIG. 32, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear member taken along line XXXVIb-XXXVIb in FIG. 36(a). 37(a) is a front view of the back member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXV in FIG. 32, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back member taken along line XXXVIIb-XXXVIIb in FIG. 37(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper part of the front door in 5th Embodiment. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the main part of the game machine in a state where the lock member is slid to the first position. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the gaming machine in a state where the lock member is slid to the first position; FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the gaming machine in a state where the lock member is slid to the first position; (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the main part of the game machine in a state where the lock member is slid to the second position. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the game machine in a state where the lock member is slid to the second position; FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the game machine in a state where the lock member is slid to the second position; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper part of the front door in 6th Embodiment. (a) is a top view of the slide plate, (b) is a side view of the slide plate viewed in the direction of the arrow XLVIb in FIG. 46(a), and (c) is a XLVIc- 46(d) is a cross-sectional view of the slide plate taken along line XLVIc, and FIG. 46(d) is a cross-sectional view of the slide plate taken along line XLVId-XLVId in FIG. 46(b). (a) is a top view of the front door in which the slide plate and the lock member are slid to the shielding position and the first position, respectively, and (b) is the slide plate and the lock member to the open position and the second position, respectively; Fig. 10 is a top view of the front door in a state of being slid to the right; Fig. 47(a) is a cross-sectional view of the front door taken along line XLVIII-XLVIII of Fig. 47(a); FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the front door in a state where the locking member has been slid to the second position from the state shown in FIG. 48; Fig. 47(b) is a cross-sectional view of the front door taken along line LI-LI of Fig. 47(b); It is a partial expanded sectional view of an inner frame and a front door in a 7th embodiment. FIG. 22 is an exploded front perspective view of the main part of the game machine in the eighth embodiment; (a) is a front view of the inner frame, and (b) is a sectional view of the inner frame taken along line LIIIb-LIIIb of FIG. 53(a). (a) is a front perspective exploded view of a lock member, (b) is a side view of the lock member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the lock member taken along line LIVc-LIVc in FIG. 54(b). be. (a) is a front perspective view of the outer frame, (b) is a front view of the outer frame, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the folding member taken along line LVc-LVc in FIG. 55(b). . (a) to (d) are top views of the pachinko machine in each state of the action of closing the main part of the gaming machine opened from the outer frame. (a) and (b) are sectional views of an inner frame. (a) is a front view of the main part of the gaming machine, and (b) is a sectional view of the main part of the gaming machine taken along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb of FIG. 58(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of the main part of the game machine in the ninth embodiment. (a) is a rear view of the main part of the gaming machine, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the gaming machine taken along line LXb-LXb of FIG. 60(a). (a) to (d) are top views of the main part of the game machine in each state of the operation of closing the front door opened from the inner frame. 61(a) is a rear view of the front door viewed in the direction of arrow VXIa in FIG. 61(b), and FIG. 61(b) is a rear view of the front door viewed in the direction of arrow VXIIb in FIG. 61(d). 62(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front door along line LXIIa-LXIIa in FIG. 62(a), and FIG. 62(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front door along line LXIIIb-LXIIIb in FIG. 62(b). (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the handle before the protruding member protrudes, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the handle after the protruding member protrudes. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the main part of the gaming machine in the tenth embodiment; (a) is a top view of the main part of the gaming machine, and (b) is a schematic side view of the main part of the gaming machine. FIG. 66(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view taken along line LXVII-LXVII of FIG. 66(a). (a) is a top view of the decorative member, (b) is a rear view of the decorative member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the decorative member taken along LXVIIIc-LXVIIIc in FIG. 68(b). (a) to (d) are top views of the main part of the game machine in each state of the operation of closing the front door opened from the inner frame. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the gaming machine along line LXXa-LXXa in FIG. 69(b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the gaming machine along line LXXb-LXXb in FIG. 69(d). be. It is a front view of the upper part of the front door in 11th Embodiment. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the upper portion of the front door; It is a top view of the game machine main part. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic views of the main part of the game machine taken along line LXXIVa-LXXIVa in FIG. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the main part of the gaming machine. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the main part of the gaming machine along line LXXVIa-LXXVIa in FIG. 75(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the main part of the gaming machine along line LXXVIb-LXXVIb in FIG. 75(b). It is a diagram. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the main part of the gaming machine. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the main part of the gaming machine in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 78(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the main part of the game machine taken along line LXXIX-LXXIX of FIG. 78(b). FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the upper portion of the front door in the thirteenth embodiment; It is a top view of the game machine main part. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the main part of the gaming machine along line LXXXIIa-LXXXIIa in FIG. 81, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the main part of the gaming machine along line LXXXIIb-LXXXIIb in FIG. 82(a). , (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the main part of the gaming machine taken along line LXXXIIc-LXXXIIc in FIG. 82(b). (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the main part of the gaming machine. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the main part of the gaming machine. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the main part of the gaming machine. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the upper portion of the front door in the fourteenth embodiment; (a) is a top view of the main part of the gaming machine, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the main part of the gaming machine taken along line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87(a). (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the main part of the gaming machine.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 70, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 1 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. and an inner frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided serves as an opening and closing axis. A frame 4 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 5 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported toward the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 8 is arranged on the back side of the front door 5, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16. - 特許庁

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front door 5 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front door 5 (for example, at corners). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 1, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The indicator lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of indicating whether prize balls are being dispensed and when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right side electric decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 5c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball is released in accordance with the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball into the front surface of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and a general winning prize. A mouth 63, a first winning mouth 64, a second winning mouth 640, a third winning mouth 82, a variable winning device 65, a first through gate 66, a second through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. The peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood by pasting together thin plate materials, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the third winning opening 82, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is placed inside the outer rail 77. An arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82. It is configured. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while the ball enters the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82. In this case, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the process of changing probability, shortening the working hours, or normal, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the process of changing by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, or blue), and by combining the emitted colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. can.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when any one of the first prize winning port 64, the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82 wins. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the type of the big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased, and the balls are likely to enter the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 and a game state in which the ball is likely to enter the third winning hole 82. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in normal mode, it means that the game is in a state where the probability is not variable or the time is short (the jackpot probability and the second symbol winning probability are not increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. The amount of time that the When the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are in an open state (open state), the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are closed (closed state). A ball is more likely to enter the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82 than in the case of . Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the balls are likely to enter the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or during the time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, or the opening In addition to changing the time, a change may be made to increase the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened per hit. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. At least one of the opening time and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened per time may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time when the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened, The number of times the electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82 are released may not be changed, and only the probability of winning the second symbol may be changed to be higher than in the normal state.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displayed with variable display triggered by winning (starting winning) of any one of the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the third winning port 82. A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display of the third pattern while synchronizing, and the spheres of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided, which is composed of an LED that variably displays the second pattern with passage as a trigger.

A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be constructed using a reel or the like.

Each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, the second symbol display device displays a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)). and are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time to perform a variable display. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the second symbol attached to the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82 The first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are configured to be in an operating state (released) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, the player is given more opportunities to open the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a of the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82.例文帳に追加be able to. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a for one hit, etc. When the state is such that the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole during time saving, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the first electric role product 640a and the second electric role product 82a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The first thru gate 66 is attached to the game board in the area on the left side of the variable display unit 80 , and the second thru gate 67 is attached to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80 . The first thru gate 66 and the second thru gate 67 are configured so that a part of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls launched to the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is held up to four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B and the second pattern is displayed. A holding lamp (not shown) is also illuminated. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). can be set to Also, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Also, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When the ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 640 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. A third prize winning port 82 is arranged on the right side of the first prize winning port 64 when viewed from the front. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second winning hole switch is turned on. As a result, the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) draws a lottery for a big win, and the first symbol display device 37B displays the result of the lottery.

Also, the first prize winning port 64, the second prize winning port 640, and the third prize winning port 82 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82 are the same, but the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82 are changed. A different number, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 is 3, and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82. may be configured as five.

A first electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning hole 640. - 特許庁The first electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. there is On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the first electric accessory 640a is displayed. It will be in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball will easily enter the second winning port 640 .

In addition, the third prize winning port 82 is accompanied by a second electric accessory 82a. The second electric accessory 82a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the second electric accessory 82a is in a closed state (reduced state), which makes it difficult for the ball to enter the third winning opening 82. ing. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the second through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the second electric accessory 82a is displayed. It will be in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball will easily enter the third prize winning port 82 .

As described above, during the probability variation and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short, so in the variation display of the second symbol "○ , and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened becomes longer than during the normal time during the variable probability or the time saving. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the balls are more likely to enter the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 during the variable probability or the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 and when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82, the probability of winning the jackpot is high even in a low probability state. state is the same. However, the probability of winning the 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82, and the ball enters the first prize winning port 64. It is set higher than if you win a prize. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a like the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82, and the ball can always win a prize. state.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessories associated with the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82 are often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82. A ball is shot toward the first prize winning port 64 with no electric accessory so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called “left hitting”), and by winning the first prize winning port 64 It is advantageous for the player to get many chances of the big win lottery and to aim for the big win.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the second through gate 67, the second electric accessory 82a attached to the third winning port 82 is likely to be in an open state, and the third winning port 82 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is shot toward the third winning hole 82 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right hitting”), and is passed through the second through gate 67. It is advantageous for the player to set the second electric accessory 82a in an open state and to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the third prize winning opening 82.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

It should be noted that any of the first thru gate 66 and the second thru gate 67 may draw a winning lottery for a symbol other than the second symbol when the ball passes through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67. , the second electric accessory 82a associated with the third winning opening 82 or the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 may be displaced to the open state. In this case, since the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, the symbols to be drawn are different, so the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. will be selected one by one.

As a result, for example, when the second symbol is selected to win, the second electric accessory 82a is opened. When a win is selected in the lottery of two symbols, the second electric accessory 82a is opened, and when the ball is hit to the left and passed through the first through gate 66, a symbol different from the second symbol is drawn and the second symbol is selected. A game state in which the first electric accessory 640a is opened when winning is selected in a pattern different from the pattern can be set.

Therefore, if the game state is such that it is easy to win the lottery of the second symbol during the variable probability, and the game state is such that the symbol different from the second symbol is easy to win during the time saving, during the variable probability, the second through gate 67 is hit to the right. A game state in which the second electric accessory 82a is passed to open the second electric accessory 82a to easily win the ball, and during the time saving, the first electric accessory is released to open the first electric accessory to pass the first through gate 66 and win the ball. It is possible to make a game state that is easy to play. Therefore, since the game states during normal, during shortening of time, and during variable probability can be set to different game states, the player can enjoy each game state.

In addition, if the second electric accessory 82a is opened when a hit is selected for the second symbol, hitting the ball to the right to pass through the second through gate 67 will result in a different result from the second symbol. A pattern is drawn, and when a win is selected in the drawing of a pattern different from the second pattern, the first electric accessory 640a is opened, and when the ball is struck left and passed through the first through gate 66, the second pattern is obtained. is drawn and a game state in which the second electric accessory 82a is opened when a win is selected in the second symbol can be made.

In this case, when the ball passes through the second through gate 67 by striking to the right, the first electric accessory is opened and the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640 regardless of whether the probability is variable or the time is shortened. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 by striking to the left, the second electric accessory 82a is opened to make the game state in which the ball easily enters the third prize winning port 82.例文帳に追加Therefore, the player needs to change the way of hitting from right to left or from left to right. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because the way of hitting can be changed at any time.

A variable prize winning device 65 is provided on the right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of any one of the first prize winning port 64, the second prize winning port 64, and the third prize winning port 82 becomes a big win, a predetermined time (fluctuation time) is set. After the lapse of time, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is lit so as to become the stop symbol of the big win, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, thereby winning the big win. Occurrence is indicated. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the balls are likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of the specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged. , the left side of the variable display device unit 80 .

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out hole 71. be. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

Main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, display controller 114, payout controller 111, launch controller 112, power supply 115, and card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100-104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover unopenably by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132, which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In main controller 110, MPU 201 performs main processing of pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display in first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display result in second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like.

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, changes the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 1, showing a state in which the inner frame 4 and the front door 5 are opened with respect to the outer frame 2 (rotated forward). 5, the configuration inside the game area PE of the pachinko machine 1 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 5, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 (frame member) forming the outer shell of the pachinko machine 1 and a main part of the game machine attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be rotatable forward. 3. The outer frame 2 is formed by connecting wooden plates on four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. A pachinko machine 1 is installed in a game facility by fixing an outer frame 2 to an island facility.

The game machine main part 3 includes an inner frame 4 (back unit) as a base body, a front door 5 arranged in front of the inner frame 4, and a back pack unit 6 arranged behind the inner frame 4. I have. The inner frame 4 of the game machine main portion 3 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2 . Specifically, in a front view of the pachinko machine 1, the left side is the rotation base end side, the right side is the rotation tip side, and the inner frame 4 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 with the vertical direction of the rotation base end side as the rotation axis. It is rotatable forward.

A front door 5 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 4 . Specifically, the front door 5 rotates forward with respect to the inner frame 4 with the vertical direction of the rotation base end as a rotation axis, with the left side as the base end side of rotation and the right side as the front end side of rotation as viewed from the front. It is possible. A back pack unit 6 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 4, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

The front door 5 is provided so as to cover substantially the entire front side of the inner frame 4 . The front door 5 is formed with a window portion 5c through which substantially the entire game area PE, which will be described later, can be viewed from the front. The window portion 5c has a circular shape when viewed from the front, and is fitted with glass 8 having transparency.

More specifically, the front door 5 has a glass holder 9 provided so as to surround the window portion 5c. The glass holder 9 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the front door 5, and includes vertical holder portions 9a and 9b extending vertically along the left and right edges of the window portion 5c, and the lower ends of the vertical holder portions 9a and 9b. It has a horizontal holder portion 9c that connects and extends left and right. Each of the holders 9a to 9c is formed with two grooves arranged in parallel in the front and rear direction. The grooves of the vertical holder portions 9a and 9b are open upward and on the sides facing each other (that is, the central side of the window portion 5c), and the groove portion of the horizontal holder portion 9c is open upward, and both vertical holder portions 9a are open. , 9b, and the glass 8 is fitted into each of the grooves, so that the game area PE is covered with the inside and the outside in two layers.

A passage forming unit 160 is attached to the rear surface of the front door 5 . The passage forming unit 160 is molded of synthetic resin, and is formed with a front door side upper tray passage 161 leading to the upper tray 17 and a front door side lower tray passage 162 leading to the lower tray 50 . In the passage forming unit 160, a receptacle portion 163 that protrudes rearward and opens upward is formed at an upper corner portion thereof. A passage 161 and an entrance portion of a front door side lower tray passage 162 are formed. The upstream side of the front door side upper tray passage 161 and the front door side lower tray passage 162 communicates with a game ball distribution section (not shown), and the game balls entering the front door side upper tray passage 161 are guided to the upper tray 17. Then, the game ball entering the front door side lower tray passage 162 is guided to the lower tray 50. - 特許庁

A plurality of rearwardly extending hook members 166 (166a to 166c) are vertically arranged side by side on the front end of the rotation on the rear surface of the front door 5 (left side in FIG. 5). These hook members 166 are engaged with hook receiving members (not shown) provided on the inner frame 4 to constitute a locking mechanism for the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 . Hook receiving members 2a and 2b are provided on the upper and lower portions of the outer frame 2, respectively, on the right side of the outer frame 2, which faces the rotating tip side of the inner frame 4 (the right side in FIG. 5). These hook receiving members 2a and 2b constitute a locking mechanism of the inner frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. As shown in FIG.

The inner frame 4 is mainly composed of a resin base 140 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 2 . A game board accommodating portion 141 for accommodating the game board 13 is formed in substantially the central portion of the front surface of the resin base 140 . The game board housing portion 141 is recessed on the back side (rear) of the resin base 140 to define a housing space for housing the game board 13, and the game board 13 attached to the front door 5 is housed in the space. state. The game board 13 has a wooden plywood and a sheet member covering the front side of the plywood, and the front surface thereof is exposed to the front side of the resin base 140 . A game area PE in which game balls flow down is formed on the exposed portion, that is, the front surface of the game board 13 .

The game board 13 is router-processed to form a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in its own thickness direction (front-rear direction). Each opening is provided with a general winning opening, a variable winning device, an operating opening, a through gate, a variable display unit, and the like. When game balls enter the general winning opening, the variable winning device and the operating opening, the game balls are detected by a detection switch, and a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out based on the detection result. In addition, a first out port 71 is provided at the bottom of the game board 13, and game balls that do not enter various prize winning ports are discharged from the game area PE through the first out port 71.例文帳に追加

The game board 13 is also provided with a large number of nails for properly distributing and adjusting the flow paths of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills. Various configurations (not shown) such as these nails and windmills divide the flow path of the game ball, and are adjusted so that the above-described general prize winning openings and the like occur with an appropriate probability.

Here, a game ball shooting mechanism 142 for shooting a game ball to the game area PE based on the operation of the operation handle 51 is provided below the game board accommodating portion 141 in the resin base 140 . More specifically, a game ball shooting mechanism 143 for installing a game ball shooting mechanism 142 is formed below the game board accommodating portion 141 in the resin base 140 .

The game ball shooting mechanism 142 installed in the game ball shooting mechanism 143 is located near the tip of the inner frame 4 when rotating. The game ball launching mechanism 142 includes a solenoid for launching a game ball placed at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail for defining the launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid, and a game ball supplied to the launch standby position. and a base plate on which these various components are mounted. there is

A game ball launching mechanism 142 (specifically a solenoid) is electrically connected to a power supply and launch control device (not shown). Based on the output of electrical signals from the power supply and the launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid moves in the direction of expansion and contraction, that is, in the rail direction of the launch rail, and the game ball placed in the launch standby position is placed in the game area PE, in detail. is launched toward the guide rail 75 attached to the game board 13 .

The guide rail 75 is a member for guiding the game ball and partitioning the game area PE. The guide rail 75 forms a guide passage 75a for the game ball by an area sandwiched between two rails (an outer rail 77 and an inner rail 76) arranged to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. It is The guide passage 75a has an entrance portion 75b opened to the tip side of the launch rail (the lower end side of the game board 13) and an exit portion 75c located above the game area PE. The game ball fired from the game ball shooting mechanism 142 based on the operation of the solenoid moves in the order of the shooting rail (inner frame 4)→guide passage 75a (entrance portion 75b→outlet portion 75c), and is guided by the guide rail 75. It is guided to the game area PE of the game board 13 which is partitioned.

The launching rail (game ball launching mechanism 142) and the guide rail 75 arranged on the inner frame 4 are diagonally opposed to each other with the lower edge of the game board 13 sandwiched between the entrance portion 75b of the guide rail 75 and the leading end portion of the launching rail. are arranged to In other words, both rails are arranged such that the entrance portion 75b (specifically, the specific portion) of the guide rail 75 and the tip portion of the launch rail are laterally displaced near the lower edge of the game board 13 . As a result, both rails are brought closer to the lower edge of the game board 13, and a gap of a predetermined distance is formed between the entrance portion 75b of the guide rail 75 and the launch rail.

A foul ball passage 165 (see FIG. 2) is arranged below the gap thus formed. The foul ball passage 165 is formed integrally with the passage forming unit 160 of the front door 5 . If a game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 142 does not reach the game area PE and goes back in the guide passage 75a as a foul ball, the foul ball enters the foul ball passage 165 through the gap. becomes. The foul ball passage 165 communicates with the front door side lower tray passage 162, and the game ball entering the foul ball passage 165 is discharged to the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 1). This suppresses interference between the foul ball and the game ball to be launched next.

A passage forming portion 144 is provided on the left side of the firing rail in the resin base 140 so as to pass through the resin base 140 in the front-rear direction. The passage forming section 144 has a main body side upper tray passage and a main body side lower tray passage, and the upstream side of the main body side upper tray passage and the main body side lower tray passage communicates with the game ball distribution section. Further, a socket portion 163 of a passage forming unit 160 attached to the front door 5 is inserted below the passage forming portion 144, and a front door side upper tray passage 161 is arranged below the body side upper tray passage. A front door side lower tray passage 162 is arranged below the main body side lower tray passage.

On the inner frame 4 and the back surface of the game board 13, various control boards are arranged so as to be arranged vertically and horizontally or overlapped in the front and back, and a game ball supply device for supplying game balls. , a protective cover 35 made of synthetic resin, and the like are attached. That is, a tank 130 opened upward is provided at the top of the protective cover 150, and the tank 130 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island facility of the game facility. Then, the required number of game balls are appropriately paid out by a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor (not shown). Game balls paid out from the payout device are supplied to an upper tray 17 (see FIG. 1) through a payout passage or the like.

Hinge 18 is attached to the upper end and the lower end of the inner frame 4 on the front side of the rotation proximal end (left side in FIG. 2). The hinge 18 is provided with a pin 18d. On the other hand, on the front face of the outer frame 2 , a receiving metal fitting 25 is attached at a position facing the hinge 18 on the rotation proximal end side (left side in FIG. 2 ). A shaft hole 25c is formed in the bracket 25, and a pin 18d of the hinge 18 is inserted into the shaft hole 25c. (not shown). As a result, the inner frame 4 and the front door 5 are supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be able to be opened and closed, respectively, using the pin 18d as a pivot shaft.

Next, referring to FIGS. 6 to 17, a mechanism (hereinafter referred to as "suppression mechanism") for suppressing failure to return (forget to attach) the intervening plate 540 to the predetermined position (receiving portion 511) of the front door 5. ) will be explained.

First, the overall configuration of the suppression mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9. FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the upper portion of the front door 5, and FIG. 7 is a rear perspective view of the upper portion of the front door 5. FIG. 8 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper portion of the front door 5, and FIG. 9 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper portion of the front door 5. As shown in FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 6 to 9, the upper portion of the front door 5 includes a main body member 510 arranged on the front side, a panel member 520 accommodated in the main body member 510, and a panel member 520 arranged on the upper surface of the main body member 510. It mainly includes a top plate 530 and an intervening plate 540 provided, a back member 550 fixed to the back side of the main body member 510, and a lock member 560 and a lever member 570 arranged on the back member 550.

The main body member 510 is a member made of a light-transmitting material for constituting an electric decoration part on the front upper part of the pachinko machine 1, and a light emitting means such as an LED provided inside emits light at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. Lights up or blinks in response to changes in the game state in the game, and plays a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. On the front side of the main body member 510, at least a region corresponding to a panel member 520, which will be described later, is formed of a transparent material, and model information and the like displayed on the panel member 520 can be visually recognized through the transparent material portion. be done.

A housing portion 511 for disposing the top plate 530 and the interposition plate 540 is recessed in the upper surface of the main body member 510 . The recess depth of the accommodation portion 511 from the upper surface of the main body member 510 is the same as the upper surface of the main body member 510, the top plate 530, and the interposition plate when the top plate 530 and the interposition plate 540 are arranged in the accommodation portion 511. The depth is set so that the upper surface of 540 is flush with it.

In this case, slide grooves 511a are formed on left and right inner wall surfaces facing each other of the inner peripheral edge (inner wall surface) of the housing portion 511 . The slide groove 511a is a concave groove having a U-shaped cross section extending in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, and is engaged with the plate-like projecting pieces 531 projecting from the left and right edges of the top plate 530. As shown in FIG. As a result, the top plate 530 can be slid in the front-rear direction with respect to the body member 510, and the top plate 530 cannot be removed from the body member 510 when the back member 550 is disposed on the body member 510. Impossible.

The slide groove 511 a is also formed on the front inner wall surface of the inner peripheral edge (inner wall surface) of the accommodating portion 511 . That is, a slide groove 511a is also formed at a position extending in the left and right direction connecting the front end portions of the left and right slide grooves 511a in the inner peripheral edge of the housing portion 511. A plate-like protrusion 531 protruding from the front edge of 530 is engaged. Therefore, due to the engagement between the front slide groove 511a and the left and right slide grooves 511a and the projecting piece 531 of the top plate 530, a foreign object can be inserted through the gap between the main body member 510 and the top plate 530 to prevent fraud. can be suppressed.

A recessed portion 511c is formed in the housing portion 511 so as to be recessed downward from the bottom surface thereof. The concave portion 511c is a space for accommodating a plate-shaped panel member 520 on which information such as model information of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. It is formed. Therefore, when the panel member 520 is replaced or its position is adjusted, the top plate 530 needs to be slid rearward as described later.

Further, in the accommodating portion 511, an escape portion 511d is formed downwardly from the bottom surface thereof, and a holding portion 511e is formed on the front side of the escape portion 511d. The relief portion 511d is a concave portion for receiving the insertion tube portion 541 of the interposed plate 540 (see FIG. 12). The holding portion 511e is formed as a recess that is open on the side facing the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550, and the inner wall surface and the bottom surface of the recess hold the proximal end of the lock member 560 (base member 562) ( See Figure 11).

As described above, the top plate 530 is provided with plate-like projecting pieces 531 projecting from the edge thereof, and the left and right projecting pieces 531 are engaged with the slide grooves 511a of the main body member 510, whereby the pachinko machine can be played. A top plate 530 can be slidably displaced along the longitudinal direction of the machine 1 . In this case, the back member 550 arranged on the back surface of the main body member 510 is formed to have a height that allows interference (abutment) with the edge of the top plate 530 . As a result, when the top plate 530 is slid rearward, the top plate 530 interferes with the back member 550, and the top plate 530 cannot be removed.

The interposed plate 540 is a plate-like member interposed between the top plate 530 and the back member 550 , and is detachably arranged in the housing portion 511 of the main body member 510 . When the intervening plate 540 is removed, a space is formed between the top plate 530 and the back member 550, and the top plate 530 can be slid rearward (toward the back member 550) by the space. (See Figures 13, 14 and 16).

The intervening plate 540 is formed in a horizontally long plate shape, and an insertion tube portion 541 is formed on the bottom surface on one longitudinal end side thereof. The insertion tubular portion 541 is a portion into which the lock member 560 is inserted and removed, and is formed in a tubular shape with both ends opened. As will be described later, by inserting the lock member 560 into the insertion tube portion 541 , the interposition plate 540 can be in a state in which it cannot be removed from the main body member 510 , while the lock member 560 can be removed from the insertion tube portion 541 . Thus, a state in which the interposition plate 540 can be removed from the main body member 510 can be formed.

A plate-like protruding piece 542 protrudes from the edge portion of the interposition plate 540 on the other longitudinal end side (opposite side to the insertion tube portion 541 ). The portion 511 is engaged with the slide groove 511a. In the present embodiment, the plate thickness dimension of the projecting piece portion 542 is set to be smaller (thinner) than the plate thickness dimension of the projecting piece portion 531 of the top plate 530 . Therefore, not only is it possible to prevent a foreign object from being inserted through the gap between the main body member 510 and the interposition plate 540, and the interposition plate 540 is flipped up by the lever member 570, as will be described later. When forming a posture in which one end in the longitudinal direction is lifted (see FIGS. 12 and 15B), the projecting piece 542 can be used as a fulcrum. This stabilizes the posture of the intervening plate 540 when it is flipped up by the lever member 570 (prevents it from jumping out of the main body member 510 and falling off).

An insertion hole 551 is formed in the back member 550 at a position corresponding to the insertion tube portion 541 of the interposed plate 540, and a support shaft 552 is provided to protrude from the front side of the insertion hole 551. As shown in FIG. The insertion hole 551 is formed as a rectangular opening when viewed from the front, and the lock member 560 is inserted therethrough. A lever member 570 is rotatably supported on the support shaft 552 .

The opening dimensions (width and height dimensions) of insertion hole 551 are set smaller than the external dimensions (width and height dimensions) of projecting portion 562 a of lock member 560 . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the lock member 560 from being pulled out from the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550 to the back side.

A plate-like protruding piece 553 extending in the left-right direction is provided on the back member 550 so as to protrude from the front. The protruding piece 531 faces the bottom surface of the interposition plate 540 attached to the main body member 510, thereby preventing foreign matter from being inserted through the gap between the interposition plate 540 and the back member 550, thereby preventing tampering. can be suppressed.

The projecting piece 553 is formed at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 551 with a holding plate portion 553 a having a larger projecting dimension from the front surface of the back member 550 than other portions. The pressing plate portion 553a abuts on the upper surface of the locking member 560 when the locking member 560 is pushed to a first position, which will be described later, and protrudes to a position beyond the axis of the shaft portion 562b. Thereby, as will be described later, it is possible to prevent the locking member 560 from being bent at the first position (see FIG. 11(b)).

The locking member 560 is a rod-shaped member formed to be able to be inserted into the insertion tube portion 541 of the interposition plate 540 and the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550, and is formed to be bendable. Here, a detailed configuration of the lock member 560 will be described with reference to FIG. 10 .

10 is an exploded front perspective view of locking member 560. FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, the locking member 560 mainly includes a tip member 561 and a base member 562 connected to the base end of the tip member 561. The base member 562 has a plurality of ( In this embodiment, three projecting portions 562a are formed projecting from the outer surface.

The distal end member 561 has a reduced width on the base end side, and a shaft support hole 561a is formed in the reduced width portion. On the other hand, the base member 562 is divided into two parts in the width direction, and a shaft part 562b is protrudingly provided on the tip end side of one of the divided parts. The base member 562 is rotatably connected to the base end side of the distal end member 561 by fastening and fixing the two divided bodies with bolts BT in a state in which the shaft portion 562b is inserted into the shaft support hole 561a. . That is, the locking member 560 is formed bendable.

The protruding portions 562a are protrusions for making it impossible to pass through the insertion holes 551 of the back member 550, and are formed to protrude from the left and right side surfaces and bottom surface of the base member 562 on the base end side. That is, when the lock member 560 (tip member 561) is pulled out from the back side of the back member 550 by the operator, the projecting portion 562a is engaged with the front side of the back member 550 (see FIG. 12). (see FIG. 14), and removal of the lock member 560 can be restricted.

In a state in which the projecting portion 562a is engaged with the front surface of the back surface member 550, the lock member 560 (base member 562) is completely pulled out from the insertion tube portion 541 of the interposition plate 540, and the interposition plate 540 is detachable, and the shaft portion 562b is positioned outside the back surface of the back member 550, allowing the tip member 561 to be bent with respect to the base member 562.

In this case, the lock member 560 is disposed in a posture in which the axial direction of the shaft portion 562b and the axial support hole 561a is parallel to the horizontal direction (the direction orthogonal to the vertical direction) and the lateral direction of the front door 5. be. Therefore, when the locking member 560 (tip member 561) is pulled out from the back side of the back member 550 by an operator, the tip member 561 can be tilted downward by its own weight. That is, even if the operator does not bend the lock member 560, the lock member 560 can be bent by the action of gravity. Thereby, as will be described later, damage to the lever member 570 can be suppressed (see FIG. 17).

Returning to FIG. 6 to FIG. 9, description will be made. The lever member 570 has a shaft support hole 571 formed on its base end side, and this shaft support hole 571 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 552 of the back member 550 . It is arranged on the front side of the back member 550 in a posture facing the 551 side.

A metal torsion spring SP1 is interposed between the lever member 570 and the back member 550 in an elastically torsionally deformed state. It is always biased in the direction of rotation to lift upwards.

In this case, the lever member 570 protrudes from the bottom surface of the interposition plate 540 when the interposition plate 540 is accommodated in the accommodation portion 511 of the main body member 510 (the lock member 560 is inserted into the insertion tube portion 541). 12(b)) and is pushed downward (see FIG. 11). The tip side of the lever member 570 is flipped upward by the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP1. As a result, the interposition plate 540 can be pushed upward (see FIG. 12).

When the tip side of the lever member 570 is flipped upward, the tip side of the lever member 570 is arranged at a position facing the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550 (see FIGS. 12 to 14). As a result, the lever member 570 can restrict the movement of the lock member 560 in the pushing direction (the direction from the back side to the front side of the back member 550).

Next, the operation method of the suppression mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 11 to 14 are diagrams for explaining state transitions of the suppressing mechanism, and FIGS. 11(a) to 14(a) are front views of the back member 550 as viewed in the direction of arrow XI in FIG. 11(b) to 14(b) are cross-sectional views of the backing member 550 taken along lines XIb-XIb to XIVb-XIVb of FIGS. 11(a) to 14(a). 11(b) to 14(b), the lock member 560 is not shown in cross section, and the overall structure of the upper portion of the front door 5 is shown.

15 and 16 are rear perspective views of the upper portion of the front door 5. FIG. 15(a) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 11, the state shown in FIG. 15(b) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 12, the state shown in FIG. 16(a) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. The state shown in FIG. 16(b) corresponds to the state shown in FIG.

When replacing the panel member 520, the game machine main section 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, and the front door 5 is opened from the inner frame 4 of the game machine main section 3 (see FIG. 5). With the front door 5 opened, the lock member 560 is slid (pushed in or pulled out).

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 15(a), when the lock member 560 is pushed into the first position, the lock member 560 is inserted through the tubular insertion portion 541 of the interposed plate 540, and the tubular insertion portion 541 is inserted. The proximal end of the locking member 560 (base member 562) protruding from one end side is held in the holding portion 511e of the main body member 510, and the locking member 560 (tip member 561) protruding from the other end side of the insertion tube portion 541. is held in the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550 . Therefore, the intervening plate 540 cannot be removed from the housing portion 511 of the main body member 510 .

In this case, the upper surface and projecting portion 562a of the base member 562 of the lock member 560 are brought into contact with the inner wall surface of the holding portion 511e, thereby moving the lock member 560 vertically (vertical direction in FIG. 11) and laterally (FIG. 11). The movement of the lock member 560 in the pushing direction is restricted by the base end of the base member 562 of the lock member 560 coming into contact with the bottom surface of the holding portion 511e. . Further, the pressing plate portion 553a faces the upper surface of the lock member 560 and protrudes to a position beyond the axis of the shaft portion 562b of the lock member 560. As shown in FIG. As a result, even if the interposing plate 540 is forcibly lifted upward (upper side in FIG. 11(b)), it is possible to prevent the locking member 560 from being bent around the shaft portion 562b. That is, it is possible to prevent the intervening plate 540 from being illegally removed.

In addition, the lock member 560 is pulled out in the pull-out direction (the right side in FIG. 11(b)) until the front end (tip member 561) contacts the front surface of the inner frame 4 when the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4. so that the base end (base member 562) is held in the holding portion 511e when it is slid to the left, the length dimension thereof (the length dimension in the posture in which the tip member 561 and the base member 562 are on a straight line, Fig. 11(b) left-right dimension) is set. As a result, even when the lock member 560 is displaced in the direction of the slide operation, removal of the interposition plate 540 can be reliably restricted.

11 and 15, the locking member 560 is pulled out toward the back side of the back member 550, and when the projecting portion 562a reaches the second position where it is engaged with the front side of the back member 550, the locking member 560 is moved. is disabled from further withdrawal operations.

By this pull-out operation, the lock member 560 (base member 562) is pulled out from the insertion tube portion 541 of the interposition plate 540, and the end surface of the proximal end of the lock member 560 (base member 562) retreats to a position beyond the lever member 570. be done. That is, a space is formed above the lever member 570 .

As a result, the lever member 570 is rotated by the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP1, and the tip side thereof is flipped upward. In this case, since the contacted portion 543 of the interposing plate 540 is in contact with the upper surface of the tip side of the lever member 570, the contacted portion 543 is pushed upward by the lever member 570, thereby 12 and FIG. 15(b), one longitudinal end of the interposed plate 540 is lifted upward.

Here, when the lock member 560 is pushed into the first position, the upper surface of the interposition plate 540 is substantially flush with the upper surface of the main body member 510. On the other hand, when a worker removes the interposed plate 540 for exchanging the panel member 520, workability is deteriorated. Further, if a handle that can be gripped by the operator is provided on the upper surface of the interposed plate 540, the workability of the operator is improved, but it becomes possible to engage a jig or the like with the handle. Using the principle of leverage, the intervening plate 540 is lifted upward to facilitate the formation of a gap for fraud. Furthermore, the height of the handle reduces the space for arranging other devices (for example, a game data display device) above the main body member 510 .

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the lock member 560 is pushed into the first position, the upper surface of the intervening plate 540 is substantially flush with the upper surface of the main body member 510, thereby suppressing fraud. On the other hand, when the lock member 560 is pulled out to the second position, the one longitudinal end side of the interposition plate 540 can be lifted upward using the flip-up operation of the lever member 570 . That is, since the portion lifted upward can be grasped, the workability of removing the interposition plate 540 from the main body member 510 can be improved.

Further, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, in order to form a state in which the panel member 520 can be replaced, a plurality of operation steps (pulling out the lock member 560, removing the intervening plate 540, removing the top plate 530, and When the locking member 560 is pulled out, one longitudinal end of the interposition plate 540 is lifted, and the next operation step is to remove the interposition plate 540. can be recognized by the operator.

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 16(a), by removing the intervening plate 540 from the main body member 510, a space is created behind the top plate 530 (back side, between the top plate 530 and the back member 550). Since it is formed, the top plate 530 can be slid backward (retracted) by using this space. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 16(b), the front side (front side) of the top plate 530 is opened, and the panel member 520 can be replaced.

In the state shown in FIGS. 14 and 16(b), after the panel member 520 is replaced, the top plate 530, which has been slid backward (back side), is slid forward (front side). ). As a result, as shown in FIGS. 13 and 16A, a space is formed behind the top plate 530 (back side, between the top plate 530 and the back member 550). Install 540.

That is, the projecting piece 542 formed on the other longitudinal end of the interposition plate 540 is engaged (inserted) into the slide groove 511 a of the main body member 510 . As a result, the contacted portion 543 of the interposed plate 540 is brought into contact with (placed on) the upper surface of the lever member 570, so that the interposed plate 540 is It is disposed in the housing portion 511 of the main body member 510 in a posture in which one end in the longitudinal direction is lifted upward.

From this state (the state shown in FIGS. 12 and 15(b)), when one longitudinal end of the interposition plate 540 is pushed downward, the lever member 570 is pushed against the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP1. It is pushed downward by the contact portion 543 . When the upper surface of the interposition plate 540 is pushed down to a position where it is substantially flush with the upper surfaces of the main body member 510 and the top plate 530, the tip side of the lever member 570 is arranged below the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550. , the position where the insertion tube portion 541 of the interposition plate 540 is aligned with the holding portion 511e of the main body member 510 and the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550 (that is, the openings at both ends of the insertion tube portion 541 are aligned with the holding portion 511e and the insertion hole 551). ) are placed facing each other).

Therefore, by pushing the lock member 560 at the second position toward the first position, the base end side (base member 562) of the lock member 560 is moved to the insertion tube portion 541 of the interposed plate 540 and the main body member. The holding portions 511e of 510 are sequentially inserted to form the state shown in FIGS. 11 and 15(a). That is, a state in which the interposition plate 540 (and the top plate 530) cannot be removed from the main body member 510 is created.

When the lock member 560 is pushed to the first position, the front end face (the right face in FIG. 11(b)) is positioned closer to the front side (the left side in FIG. 11(b)) than the rear face of the back member 550. be located. Therefore, when the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 , the lock member 560 is accommodated inside the main body member 510 and the back member 550 , and the back side of the back member 550 is opened by the inner frame 4 . Since it is closed, it is impossible to operate the lock member 560 from the outside.

Next, a description will be given of the operation of suppressing the failure to return (forget to attach) the interposition plate 540 to the predetermined position (accommodating portion 511) by the suppression mechanism. In this case, reference is made to FIG. 17 in addition to FIGS. FIG. 17 is a schematic top view of the main part 3 of the game machine, in which the inner frame 4 is schematically illustrated.

Here, according to the present embodiment, the panel member 520 can be replaced by removing the intervening plate 540 and sliding the top plate 530 rearward. In this case, if the interposition plate 540 is forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position, the upper surface (accommodating portion 511) of the main body member 510 is partially opened, and there is a risk that the opened portion may be used to commit fraud.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the interposition plate 540 is removed, the lock member 560 is placed at the second position by the pullout operation, and when the lock member 560 is placed at the second position, , the locking member 560 (tip member 561 ) protrudes from the rear surface of the rear surface member 550 . Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 17( a ) and 17 ( b ), a lock member 560 is interposed between the front surface of the inner frame 4 and the back surface of the front door 5 to prevent the inner frame 4 from moving forward. Door 5 cannot be closed. This makes it possible for the operator to recognize that he/she has forgotten to return the interposition plate 540 .

In this state (a state in which the interposing plate 540 is forgotten to be returned), the tip end of the lever member 570 bounces upward to a position facing the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550 due to the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP1. The lock member 560 is raised, and the operation of pushing the lock member 560 to the first position is restricted. In order to push the lock member 560 to the first position (that is, to create a state in which the front door 5 can be closed with respect to the inner frame 4), the intervening plate 540 must be moved to a predetermined position (accommodating portion 511). (behind the top plate 530 in )), and push down the tip side of the lever member 570 below the insertion hole 551 . That is, unless the interposition plate 540 is returned to the predetermined position, the lock member 560 cannot be pushed into the first position (close the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4). Forgetfulness can be suppressed.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to form a state in which one end side in the longitudinal direction of the interposition plate 540 is lifted (see FIG. 12). Improvements are being made. On the other hand, in such a state where one end in the longitudinal direction is only lifted, the operator may misunderstand that the interposition plate 540 has been properly returned to the predetermined position.

For example, in order to remove the interposition plate 540, the locking member 560 is pulled out from the state shown in FIG. 12 is formed by engaging (inserting) the projecting piece 542 with the slide groove 511a of the main body member 510, and if the worker leaves the site for some reason, another worker , the front door 5 may be closed with respect to the inner frame 4 by erroneously recognizing that the interposition plate 540 has been properly returned to the predetermined position. In such a configuration, the interposer plate 540 becomes removable, and there is a risk of tampering.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even when one longitudinal end of the interposed plate 540 is lifted, the tip of the lever member 570 can be lifted as shown in FIGS. It is possible to restrict the operation of pushing the lock member 560 to the first position by flipping it up to a position facing the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550 . That is, even when the interposing plate 540 is not completely removed from the predetermined position (it is arranged in the accommodating portion 511 with one end side in the longitudinal direction being lifted), the locking member 560 is pushed into the first position. Operation can be restricted. Therefore, for example, even if another operator erroneously recognizes that the interposed plate 540 has been properly returned to the predetermined position, the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4. can be avoided.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by pulling out the locking member 560 from the first position to the second position (see FIGS. 11 and 12), removal of the interposition plate 540 is permitted. When the lock member 560 is positioned at the second position (see FIGS. 12 to 14), closing the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 is restricted (see FIG. 17), and the lock member 560 is moved to the second position. In order to push from the position to the first position, it is necessary to place the interposed plate 540 at a predetermined position (receiving portion 511) (see FIG. 11). It is possible to suppress forgetting to return.

That is, in order to remove the interposing plate 540 from the predetermined position (accommodating portion 511), it is necessary to pull out the locking member 560 from the first position to the second position. When the lock member 560 is pulled out from the second position to the first position, the lock member 560 protrudes from the back surface of the back member 550 and restricts the closing of the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 . It is possible to make the operator always perform the operation of pushing into the position as an essential work. For this essential operation (the operation of pushing the lock member 560 from the second position to the first position), it is necessary to push the lever member 570 downward. Therefore, forgetting to return the interposed plate 540 to the predetermined position can be reliably suppressed.

According to the present embodiment, the lock member 560 is interposed between the inner frame 4 and the front door 5 to restrict the closing of the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4, thereby reducing the product cost. be able to. That is, since the locking member 560 has a role of switching between regulation and permission of removal of the interposition plate 540 from the main body member 510 and a role of regulating the closing of the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4, the latter It is possible to eliminate the need to separately provide a member for the role of Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the lock member 560 is formed to be bendable (the tip member 561 is rotatable with respect to the base member 562), and when pulled out to the second position, the bent tip end side (tip member 561) is sandwiched between the inner frame 4 and the front door 5, so when the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4, the lock member 560 is in the first position (the lever member 570 You can avoid being pushed toward the back). As a result, damage to the lever member 570 and the portion interfering with it can be suppressed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the locking member 560 is pulled out to the second position, the bottom surface of the bent distal end side (tip member 561) is in surface contact with the rear surface of the front door 5. The axial position of the portion 562b and the thickness dimension of the tip member 561 are set (see FIG. 12(b)). As a result, the surface pressure when sandwiched between the inner frame 4 and the front door 5 can be reduced, and damage can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lock member 560 is disposed in a posture in which the axial direction of the shaft portion 562b and the shaft support hole 561a is aligned with the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the tip member 561 can be tilted downward by its own weight (see FIG. 12(b)). That is, even if the operator does not bend the lock member 560, the lock member 560 can be bent by the action of gravity. As a result, when the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4, it is possible to prevent the lock member 560 from being pushed toward the first position (the rear surface of the lever member 570), thereby avoiding interference with the lever member 570 or this. It is possible to suppress the damage of the part to be covered.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 25. FIG. In the first embodiment, the lock member 560 is bendable, but the lock member 2560 of the second embodiment is stretchable. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

18(a) is a top view of the locking member 2560 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 18(b) is a side view of the locking member 2560 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18(a). 18(c) is a front view of the lock member 2560 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIc in FIG. 18(b), and FIG. 18(d) is a cross-sectional view of the lock member 2560 taken along line XVIIId-XVIIId in FIG. 18(a). be.

As shown in FIG. 18, the lock member 2560 in the second embodiment includes a tip member 2561, a base member 2562 that holds the tip member 2561 so as to be retractable, and a compression spring SP2 housed inside the base member 2562. and

The distal end member 2561 includes a rod-shaped portion 2561a formed as a rod-shaped body having a circular cross section, and a disk-shaped piston portion 2561b formed to protrude radially outward from the proximal end portion of the rod-shaped portion 2561a.

Inside the base member 2562, a slide guide portion 2562b having a circular cross-section is formed for slidably holding the piston portion 2561b of the tip member 2561 in the axial direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 18(d)).

The outer shape (width dimension and height dimension) of the base member 2562 is set to substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the base member 562 in the first embodiment. An opening through which the rod-shaped portion 2561a of the tip member 2561 is slidably inserted is formed in the end face of the sliding guide portion 2562b on the distal end side, and the opening on the proximal end side is sealed.

The compression spring SP2 is a coil spring made of metal, and is accommodated in the sliding guide portion 2562b of the base member 2562 in an elastically compressed and deformed state. Therefore, in the lock member 2560, the elastic recovery force of the compression spring SP2 urges the tip member 2561 in the protruding direction, and due to this urging, the lock member 2560 is maintained in the maximum extended state with the maximum length in the unloaded state. As the tip member 2561 is pushed axially, the overall length is shortened.

Next, a method of operating the suppression mechanism in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22. FIG. FIGS. 19 to 22 are diagrams for explaining state transitions of the suppressing mechanism, and FIGS. 19(a) to 22(a) correspond to front views of the rear member 550 as viewed in the direction of arrow XIa in FIG. 19(b) to 22(b) are cross-sectional views of the rear member 550 taken along line XIXb-XIXb to XXIIb-XXIIb of FIGS. 19(a) to 22(a). 19(b) to 22(b) show the overall structure of the upper portion of the front door 5. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 19, when the lock member 2560 is pushed into the first position, the lock member 2560 (base member 2562) is inserted through the tubular insertion portion 541 of the interposition plate 540, and one end of the tubular insertion portion 541 is pushed. The proximal end of the base member 2562 protruding from the side is held in the holding portion 511 e of the main body member 510 , and the distal end of the base member 2562 protruding from the other end side of the insertion tube portion 541 is inserted into the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550 . retained. Therefore, the intervening plate 540 cannot be removed from the housing portion 511 of the main body member 510 .

In this case, the distal end member 2561 (bar-shaped portion 2561a) protrudes from the rear surface of the rear surface member 550 toward the rear surface by the dimension L1. Therefore, when the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4, the bar-shaped portion 2561a in contact with the front surface of the inner frame 4 is pushed in the direction of compressing and deforming the compression spring SP2. Therefore, since the rod-shaped portion 2561a is urged in the protruding direction by the elastic recovery force of the compression spring SP2, when the front door 5 is opened from the inner frame 4, as will be described later, the rod-shaped portion 2561a is pushed inside. The frame 4 can be pushed out to assist the force required for the opening action.

The lock member 2560 is slidably displaced in the pull-out direction to a position where the front end of the base member 2562 contacts the front surface of the inner frame 4 when the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 23). The length dimension (horizontal direction dimension in FIG. 19(b)) is set so that the base end of the base member 2562 is held in the holding portion 511e when the base member 2562 is held. Accordingly, even when the lock member 2560 is displaced in the direction of the slide operation, removal of the interposition plate 540 can be reliably restricted.

From the state shown in FIG. 19, the lock member 2560 is pulled out toward the back side of the back member 550 and reaches the second position where the projecting portion 562a is engaged with the front side of the back member 550. is disabled. As a result, as in the case of the first embodiment, the lever member 570 is rotated by the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP1, and the distal end side thereof is flipped upward, so that the intervening plate 540 as shown in FIG. One longitudinal end side of the is lifted upward.

As shown in FIG. 20, when the lock member 2560 is pulled out to the second position, the base member 2562 protrudes from the rear surface of the rear surface member 550 by the dimension L2. Therefore, the lock member 560 (base member 2562 ) is interposed between the front surface of the inner frame 4 and the rear surface of the front door 5 , so that the front door 5 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 4 . This makes it possible for the operator to recognize that he/she has forgotten to return the interposition plate 540 .

In this case, the lock member 2560 is in a state in which the rod-shaped portion 2561a of the tip member 2561 protrudes from the base member 2562. Therefore, as will be described later, when the interposition plate 540 is forgotten to be returned, When the front door 5 is closed by pressing, the tip member 2561 (rod-shaped portion 2561a) is first brought into contact with the front surface of the inner frame 4, and when the rod-shaped portion 2561a is pushed in, the compression spring SP2 is elastically compressed and deformed. Therefore, the force of the collision can be weakened by the buffer effect, and damage to the lever member 570 can be suppressed.

After removing the intervening plate 540 from the main body member 510, the top plate 530 is slid rearward to replace the panel member 520, and after the panel member 520 is replaced, the top plate 530 is slid forward. The operation of mounting the interposition plate 540 (see FIGS. 20, 21, and 22) is the same as in the first embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 20, after the interposition plate 540 is placed in the accommodation portion 511 of the main body member 510 with one end side in the longitudinal direction being lifted upward, as in the case of the first embodiment, One longitudinal end of the interposed plate 540 is pushed downward, and the lock member 2560 is pushed toward the first position while the lever member 570 is pushed downward by the contacted portion 543 . As a result, the base end side (base member 2562) of the lock member 2560 is sequentially inserted through the insertion tube portion 541 of the interposition plate 540 and the holding portion 511e of the main body member 510, resulting in the state shown in FIG. 19 (the interposition plate 540 ( and the top plate 530) cannot be removed from the main body member 510).

The operation of pushing the lock member 2560 to the first position is performed by pushing the rod-shaped portion 2561a of the tip member 2561, thereby compressing the compression spring SP2 and allowing the base member 2562 to move toward the holding portion 511e via the compression spring SP2. by advancing it to a position where it is held at

When the lock member 2560 is pushed to the first position, the rod-like portion 2561a protrudes from the rear surface of the rear member 550 by the length L1 as described above. is closed, the rod-shaped portion 2561a is accommodated inside the back member 550, and the opening of the back surface of the back member 550 is closed by the inner frame 4, so that the lock member 2560 (the rod-shaped portion 2561a) is closed. cannot be manipulated from the outside.

Next, the operation of opening the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 23 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the inner frame 4 and the front door 5. FIG. The cross section of the front door 5 corresponds to FIG. 19(b).

As described above, when the lock member 2560 is pushed to the first position, the tip of the tip member 2561 (the bar-shaped portion 2561a) is projected from the back surface of the back surface member 550 by the dimension L1 toward the back side. forming (see FIG. 19).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 23, when the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4, the rod-shaped portion 2561a in contact with the front surface of the inner frame 4 is moved to the front side (the left side in FIG. 23) by the dimension L1. ) to further compress and deform the compression spring SP2. That is, the locking member 2560 is in a state in which the distal end member 2561 is always urged in the protruding direction (rightward direction in FIG. 23) by the elastic recovery force of the compression spring SP2.

Therefore, when the front door 5 is opened with respect to the inner frame 4, the front end member 2561 projected by the biasing force of the compression spring SP2 moves the inner frame 4 in the opening direction (the direction away from the front door 5, right in FIG. 23). ), and the front door 5 can also be pushed out in the opening direction (the direction away from the inner frame 4, leftward in FIG. 23) due to the reaction. As a result, the force required to open the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 is assisted, and the burden on the operator can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25, a structure for preventing breakage of the lever member 570 when the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 in a state in which the interposing plate 540 is forgotten to be returned will be described.

FIGS. 24(a) to 24(c) are top views of the inner frame 4 and the front door 5 for explaining state transitions when the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4. FIG. ) to FIG. 25(c) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame 4 and the front door 5 taken along lines XXVa-XXVa to XXVc-XXVc of FIGS. 24(a) to 24(c).

As described above, when the lock member 2560 is pulled out to the second position, the base member 2562 protrudes from the back surface of the back member 550 by the length L2, and the tip member 2561 (bar-shaped portion) protrudes from the base member 2562. 2561a) is projected to the maximum (see FIG. 20).

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, when the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 with the lock member 2560 at the second position (that is, when the interposed plate 540 is forgotten to be returned). First, the tip member 2561 (bar-shaped portion 2561 a ) can be brought into contact with the front surface of the inner frame 4 . As a result, when the bar-shaped portion 2561a is pushed in, the compression spring SP2 is elastically compressed and deformed, and the impact force can be weakened by the cushioning effect. As a result, damage to the lever member 570 can be suppressed.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 31. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the front door 5 can be opened/closed (rotated) with respect to the inner frame 4 in a state where the interposed plate 540 is not arranged at a predetermined position has been described. , the front door 5 is restricted from opening and closing (rotating) with respect to the inner frame 4 when the interposition plate 3540 is not arranged at a predetermined position. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 26 is a top view of the main part 3 of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment, showing only the main components.

As shown in FIG. 26, the suppression mechanism in the third embodiment includes a lock member 3560 operated by an operator, a lever member 3570 that regulates the operation of the lock member 3560, and a gap between the inner frame 4 and the front door 5. It mainly comprises a one-way clutch 3580 interposed (between the rotating shaft and the bearing) and a connecting member 3590 connecting the one-way clutch 3580 and the lock member 3560 .

The lock member 3560 includes an operating portion 3561 whose one end side (lower side in FIG. 26) protrudes from the rear surface of the back member 3550 so as to be operable, and a lateral side (FIG. 26 Left side) and an engaging portion 3562 projecting toward the left side), and formed from these portions 3561 and 3562 as a substantially L-shaped member when viewed from above.

The lock member 3560 is slidable in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 26) along a guide portion 3554 (see FIG. 29) formed in the back member 3550, and is slidable in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 26). is maintained at the initial position shown in . When the locking member 3560 is slid toward the release position (rightward in FIG. 26) against the biasing force of the biasing spring, the sliding displacement is transmitted to the one-way clutch 3580 via the connecting member 3590. The one-way clutch 3580 is driven, and the engagement by the engaging portion 3562 is released, so that the interposed plate 3540 can be removed from the main body member 3510 .

Here, the one-way clutch 3580 and the interposed plate 3540 will be described in order with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG.

FIG. 27(a) is a partial cross-sectional top view of the one-way clutch 3580 and the connecting member 3590 with the lock member 3560 slid to the initial position, and FIG. 27(b) is a top view of the lock member 3560 slid to the release position. FIG. 35 is a partial cross-sectional top view of one-way clutch 3580 and coupling member 3590 in an operated state;

As shown in FIGS. 27(a) and 27(b), the one-way clutch 3580 is connected to a pin 18d projecting from a hinge 18 (see FIG. 26) attached to the upper end side of the inner frame 4. An inner ring 3581, an outer ring 3582 connected to a mounting plate 3555 fixed to the back member 3550, a plurality of rollers 3583 arranged on each cam surface of the inner ring 3581, and a retainer 3584 holding each roller 3583. , and a switching plate 3585 connected to a retainer 3584 to switch the phase of the roller 3583 with respect to the cam surface.

One end of the coupling member 3590 is rotatably supported by the lock member 3560 (see FIG. 26), and the other end is rotatably supported by the switching plate 3585 of the one-way clutch 3580, so that the lock member 3560 can be slid. Transmits to switching plate 3585 .

As shown in FIG. 27(a), when the locking member 3560 is placed at the initial position (the interposed plate 3540 is irremovably placed at a predetermined position, see FIG. 26), the switching plate 3585 is tilted toward the lock member 3560 side, the roller 3583 is arranged at the neutral position of the cam surface and separated from the meshing space between the inner ring 3581 and the outer ring 3582 . As a result, the one-way clutch 3580 is brought into a neutral idling state (a state in which the outer ring 3582 is idling with respect to the inner ring 3581). As a result, the opening/closing (rotation) of the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 is permitted.

As shown in FIG. 27(b), the lock member 3560 is in the unlocked position (the interposition plate 3540 is detachable or removed, see FIGS. 29(b) and 29(c)). , the switching plate 3585 is set up in a direction away from the lock member 3560, so that the roller 3583 is arranged at the end of the cam surface and engaged with the wedge formed between the inner ring 3581 and the outer ring 3582. be taken in. As a result, the one-way clutch 3580 is brought into a driven state (a state in which the rotation of the outer ring 3582 in one direction with respect to the inner ring 3581 is restricted). As a result, the rotation of the front door 5 relative to the inner frame 4 in the opening direction is restricted.

In this state, rotation of the outer ring 3582 in the other direction with respect to the inner ring 3581 is permitted. That is, the front door 5 can be allowed to rotate relative to the inner frame 4 in the opening direction.

28(a) is a top view of the interposition plate 3540, FIG. 28(b) is a side view of the interposition plate 3540 viewed in the direction of arrow XXVIIIb in FIG. 28(a), and FIG. 28(c). 28(b) is a cross-sectional view of the interposition plate 3540 taken along line XXVIIIc-XXVIIIc of FIG. 28(b). In addition, in FIG. 28, the illustration of the projecting piece portion 542 is omitted in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIG. 28, the interposition plate 3540 is formed in a horizontally long plate shape, and an insertion tube portion 3541 and a contacted portion 3543 are formed on the bottom surface on the other longitudinal end side thereof. The insertion tubular portion 3541 is a portion into which the engaging portion 3562 of the lock member 3560 is inserted and removed, and is formed in a tubular shape with both ends opened. By inserting the engaging portion 3562 of the lock member 3560 into the insertion tube portion 3541, the interposition plate 3540 can be formed in a state in which it cannot be removed from the main body member 3510 (see FIG. 29A). By extracting the engaging portion 3562 of the locking member 3560 from the main member 3510, the interposition plate 3540 can be detached from the main body member 3510 (see FIG. 29(b)).

The abutted portion 3543 is a portion that abuts on the upper surface of the lever member 3570 . can be pushed downward (see FIG. 29(a)), and when the lever member 3570 is flipped upward, the intervening plate 3540 can be pushed upward via the abutted portion 3543. (See FIG. 29(b)).

Returning to FIG. 26, description will be made. The lever member 3570 is provided with a shaft support hole 3571 on the base end side, and this shaft support hole 3571 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 3512 of the main body member 3510 (see FIG. 29). The support shaft 3512 is formed so that its axial center extends along the horizontal direction of the main body member 3510 (horizontal direction in FIG. 26). Therefore, the lever member 3570 is disposed in a posture in which the tip side faces the front side of the main body member 3510 (upper side in FIG. 26).

A metal torsion spring (not shown) is interposed between the lever member 3570 and the main body member 3510 in an elastically torsionally deformed state. It is always biased in the direction of rotation that lifts the tip side upward.

In this case, when the interposition plate 3540 is accommodated in the accommodation portion 511 of the main body member 3510 (in a state where the engagement portion 3562 of the lock member 3560 is inserted into the insertion tube portion 3541), the lever member 3570 is positioned so that the interposition plate 29(a)), and when the engaging portion 3562 of the locking member 3560 is pulled out from the insertion cylindrical portion 3541 of the interposition plate 3540, The tip side of the lever member 3570 is flipped upward by the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring. As a result, the interposition plate 3540 can be pushed upward (see FIG. 29(b)).

When the tip side of the lever member 3570 is flipped upward, the tip side of the lever member 3570 is arranged at a position facing the tip of the engaging portion 3562 of the lock member 3560 (FIGS. 29(c) and 30). (c)). As a result, the lever member 570 can prevent the lock member 3560 from being slid to the initial position (that is, the one-way clutch 3580 to be in the neutral state).

Next, a method of operating the suppression mechanism in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. FIG.

29 to 31 are diagrams for explaining the state transition of the suppression mechanism, FIG. 29 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the front door 5, and FIG. 30 is a partially enlarged top view of the front door 5. 31 is a top view of the main part 3 of the gaming machine.

29(a) is in the state shown in FIGS. 30(a) and 31(a), and FIG. 29(b) is in the state shown in FIGS. 30(b) and 31(b). (c) corresponds to the states shown in FIGS. 30(c) and 31(c), respectively. 30(a) and 30(b), the insertion tube portion 3541 and the abutted portion 3543 of the interposed plate 3540 are schematically illustrated by dashed lines.

When removing the intervening plate 3540 in order to replace the panel member 520 (see FIG. 9) or the like, first, as shown in FIGS. By opening the front door 5 with respect to the frame 4, a state in which the lock member 3560 can be slid from the back side of the back member 3550 is created.

The lock member 3560 slides from the initial position shown in FIGS. 29(a), 30(a), and 31(a) toward the unlocked position (backward in FIG. 29(a), rightward in FIG. 30(a)). When operated, the engaging portion 3562 of the locking member 3560 is pulled out from the insertion tube portion 3541 of the interposition plate 3540 and retracted to the side of the lever member 3570 . As a result, the lever member 3570 is rotated by the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring, and the distal end side (opposite side to the shaft support hole 3571) is flipped upward, thereby pushing the abutted portion 3543 upward. As shown in 29(b), FIG. 30(b) and FIG. 31(b), one longitudinal end of the interposition plate 3540 is lifted upward.

This allows the interposition plate 3540 to be removed from the body member 3510 as shown in FIGS. 29(c), 30(c) and 31(c). After removing the intervening plate 3540 from the main body member 3510, the top plate 530 is slid rearward to replace the panel member 520, and after the panel member 520 is replaced, the top plate 530 is slid forward. The operation of mounting the interposition plate 3540 is the same as in the case of the first embodiment, so the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 29(b), 30(b), and 31(b), when the lock member 3560 is slid to the unlocked position, as described above, the slide operation of the lock member 3560 causes the connecting member to slide. 3590 to the one-way clutch 3580, and the one-way clutch 3580 is switched to the driving state. As a result, it is possible to restrict the rotation of the front door 5 relative to the inner frame 4 in the opening direction (direction of arrow A in FIGS. 31(b) and 31(c)). It is possible to recognize that the plate 3540 has been forgotten to be returned.

After the panel member 520 has been replaced, etc., as shown in FIGS. After being placed in the accommodation portion 511 of the main body member 3510, the interposing plate 3540 is pushed downward, and the lock member 3560 is directed to the initial position while the lever member 3570 is pushed downward by the contacted portion 3543. to slide. As a result, the engagement portion 3562 of the lock member 3560 is inserted into the insertion cylinder portion 3541 of the interposition plate 3540, and the state shown in FIGS. (and the top plate 530) cannot be removed from the main body member 3510).

Further, when the lock member 3560 is slid to the initial position, the slide operation of the lock member 3560 is transmitted to the one-way clutch 3580 via the connecting member 3590 as described above, and the one-way clutch 3580 is switched to the neutral state. be done. Thereby, the opening/closing (rotation) of the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 is permitted. That is, the front door 5 can be opened with respect to the inner frame 4 .

As described above, according to this embodiment, by opening the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4, the lock member 3560 can be slid, and as a result, the intervening plate 3540 can be removed. In addition, since the front door 5 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 4 when the interposition plate 3540 is not placed in the predetermined position (accommodating portion 511), the interposition plate 3540 is returned to the predetermined position. You can prevent forgetting.

That is, in order to remove the interposition plate 3540 from the predetermined position, it is necessary to open the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4. Therefore, when the interposition plate 3540 is removed from the predetermined position, the inner The operator can always perform the operation of closing the front door 5 with respect to the frame 4 as an essential work. In this case, unless the interposition plate 3540 is returned to the predetermined position, the front door 5 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 4, and a state in which a game can be played cannot be formed. can be reliably suppressed.

In this case, in the present embodiment, after the front door 5 is opened with respect to the inner frame 4, when the intervening plate 3540 is removed from the predetermined position, the opening position Since the displacement of the front door 5 in the closing direction with respect to the inner frame 4 from the position shown in FIG. .

That is, for example, as in the case of the first embodiment, the back surface of the front door 5 is superimposed on the front surface of the inner frame 4, and the lock member 560 (tip member 561) is interposed therebetween to close the door. can not be formed (that is, a structure that allows the front door 5 to be displaced in the closing direction with respect to the inner frame 4 until the rotation position where the front surface of the inner frame 4 abuts on the lock member 560). Even if the closed state is not formed, the rear surface of the front door 5 overlaps the front surface of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 17(b)), and the operator may erroneously recognize that the closed state is formed. There is Further, if the closing operation is performed with a large force, the front door 5 collides with the inner frame 4 while sandwiching the lock member 560, which may cause damage.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the interposition plate 3540 is removed from the predetermined position, the displacement of the front door 5 relative to the inner frame 4 in the closing direction can be restricted. As long as the 3540 is not returned to the predetermined position, the front door 5 is kept open with respect to the inner frame 4, so that it is possible to prevent the operator from erroneously recognizing that the closed state has been established. In addition, since the displacement itself in the closing direction can be restricted, it is possible to avoid damage to the member due to a collision that accompanies the closing operation.

In this embodiment, the lock member 3560 is arranged on the side (right side in FIG. 26) closer to the rotation shaft (pin 18d) than the center in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 26) of the front door 5 . Therefore, when opening the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 in order to slide the lock member 3560 from the initial position to the release position, it is necessary to open the front door 5 to a relatively large opening angle. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operator from erroneously recognizing that the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 .

Here, in this embodiment, when the intervening plate 3540 is removed from the predetermined position (that is, when the one-way clutch 3580 is driven), the front door 5 is displaced relative to the inner frame 4 in the closing direction. However, the displacement of the front door 5 in the opening direction with respect to the inner frame 4 is allowed. As a result, when the front door 5 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 4 because the installation plate 3540 has been forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position, the operator can alternately move the front door 5 in the closing direction and the opening direction. , the opening angle of the front door 5 can be gradually increased. This makes it easier for the operator to recognize that the interposed plate 3540 has not been returned to the predetermined position. In addition, since it is possible to form an operation that is different from a malfunction of the rotating shaft (pin 18d) or a foreign matter being caught, the operator is made to recognize that the interposition plate 3540 has not been returned to the predetermined position. It can be done easily.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 37. FIG. In the first embodiment, the front door 5 can be closed with respect to the inner frame 4 by arranging the interposition plate 540 at a predetermined position regardless of the presence or absence of the panel member 520 (to be replaced). In the fourth embodiment, the front door 5 can be closed with respect to the inner frame 4 when the panel member 4520 is provided in addition to the top plate 4530 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the front door 5 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 32 , the suppression mechanism in the fourth embodiment has the panel member 4520 fastened and fixed to the top plate 4530 , and the top plate 4530 with the panel member 4520 fastened and fixed is placed on the upper surface of the main body member 510 (accommodated). 511). Here, the panel member 4520 and the top plate 4530 are described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34. FIG.

33(a) is a rear view of the top plate 4530 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIII in FIG. 32, and FIG. 33(b) is a cross-sectional view of the top plate 4530 taken along line XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb in FIG. 33(a). .

34(a) is a rear view of the top plate 4530 and the panel member 4520 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIII in FIG. 32, and FIG. 34(c) is a cross-sectional view of the top plate 4530 and the panel member 4520 along line XXXIVc-XXXIVc of FIG. 34(a).

As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the top plate 4530 integrates the top plate 530 and the intervening plate 540 in the first embodiment, and has projecting pieces 531 and 542 projecting from the left and right edges. It is formed as an omitted plate-like body. That is, the top plate 4530 is formed with a projecting piece 531 on the edge on the front side thereof, and the projecting piece 531 can be engaged (inserted) into the slide groove 511 a of the main body member 510 . Further, an insertion tube portion 541 is formed on the bottom surface of the top plate 4530, through which the lock member 560 can be inserted.

A contact member 4532 is arranged on the bottom surface of the top plate 4530 . The abutting member 4532 is a long plate-like member, and is arranged in a posture in which its longitudinal direction is along the front-rear direction of the front door 5 (horizontal direction in FIG. is rotatably supported by a support shaft 4533 on the bottom surface of the top plate 4530 .

In this case, a torsion spring (not shown) is interposed between the top plate 4530 and the contact member 4532 in an elastically torsionally deformed state, and the contact member 4532 receives the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring. 33(b), the bottom surface of the top plate 4530 is urged in the rotational direction. That is, the contact member 4532 is maintained in the state shown in FIG. 33(b) when the panel member 4520 is not fastened and fixed.

On the bottom surface of the top plate 4530, a recessed groove 4534 is recessed along a region facing the upper surface of the contact member 4532 on the other longitudinal end side (left side in FIG. 33(b)), and the internal space of the recessed groove 4534. The other end in the longitudinal direction of the contact member 4532 can be received. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34 , when the panel member 4520 is fastened and fixed to the bottom surface of the top plate 4530 , the panel member 4520 pushes the other longitudinal end of the contact member 4532 into the recessed groove 4534 . , the one end in the longitudinal direction of the contact member 4532 can be separated from the bottom surface of the top plate 4530 .

That is, as will be described later, when the panel member 4520 is not attached (fastened and fixed) to the top plate 4530, one longitudinal end side of the contact member 4532 is positioned upward (bottom side of the top plate 4530) (Fig. 33(b)), when the top plate 4530 is arranged in the main body member 510 (receiving portion 511), it is possible to disable downward pressing of the lever member 570 by one longitudinal end side of the contact member 4532. On the other hand, when the panel member 4520 is attached (fastened and fixed) to the top plate 4530, one longitudinal end side of the contact member 4532 is positioned downward (the side away from the bottom surface of the top plate 4530). When arranged in the body member 510 (accommodating portion 511 ), the lever member 570 can be pushed downward by one longitudinal end of the contact member 4532 . As a result, as will be described later, forgetting to attach the panel member 4520 can be suppressed.

The recess dimension (depth dimension) of the recess 511c (the space for storing the panel member 4520) recessed in the housing portion 511 is equal to the height dimension of the panel member 4520 (vertical dimension in FIG. 34(b)). ) is set to a dimension sufficiently larger than

Therefore, when the panel member 4520 is housed in the concave portion 511c without being fastened and fixed to the top plate 4530, and the top plate 4530 is arranged in the housing portion 511 (that is, the panel member 4520 and the top plate 4530 are attached separately) ), the upper surface of the panel member 4520 is separated from the bottom surface of the top plate 4530 (the other end in the longitudinal direction of the contact member 4532), so that the other end in the longitudinal direction of the contact member 4532 is recessed by the panel member 4520. The state of being pushed into the groove 4534 cannot be formed, and the one longitudinal end side of the contact member 4532 cannot be separated from the bottom surface of the top plate 4530 (the state of FIG. 34(b) can be formed). Therefore, downward pressing of the lever member 570 by the one longitudinal end side of the contact member 4532 can be disabled.

That is, for example, in order to simplify the process of exchanging the panel member 4520, the operator does not intentionally fasten and fix the panel member 4520 to the top plate 4530, or it is necessary to fasten and fix the panel member 4520. If the panel member 4520 and the top plate 4530 are separately arranged on the main body member 510 without knowing this, the lever member 570 cannot be pushed down. That is, the front door 5 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 4, and a playable state cannot be formed. This makes it difficult for a foreign object to be inserted through the gap between the top surface of the panel member 4520 and the bottom surface of the top plate 4530, thereby making it easier to suppress fraud.

Next, a method of operating the suppression mechanism in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37. FIG. 35 to 37 are diagrams for explaining the state transition of the suppressing mechanism, and FIGS. 35(a) to 37(a) are front views of the back member 550 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXV in FIG. 35(b) to 37(b) are cross-sectional views of the back member 550 taken along lines XXXVb-XXXVb to XXXVIIb-XXXVIIb of FIGS. 35(a) to 37(a).

In addition, in FIG.35(a) and FIG.36(b), the top plate 4530 is shown sectional view. 35(b) to 37(b), the lock member 560 is shown without cross-sectional view, and the overall structure of the upper portion of the front door 5 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 35 , when the lock member 560 is pushed to the first position, the lock member 560 is inserted through the insertion tube portion 541 of the top plate 4530 , and the top plate 4530 is moved from the accommodation portion 511 of the main body member 510 . Not removable.

From the state shown in FIG. 35, the lock member 560 is pulled out toward the back side of the back member 550 and reaches the second position. , the lock member 560 (base member 562 ) is retracted to a position where the proximal end surface of the lock member 560 (base member 562 ) exceeds the lever member 570 .

As a result, the lever member 570 is rotated by the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP1, and the tip side thereof is flipped upward. In this case, one longitudinal end side of the contact member 4532 of the top plate 4530 is in contact with the upper surface of the lever member 570, so that the contact member 4532 is pushed upward by the lever member 570, so that the contact member 4532 shown in FIG. As shown, the rear side of the top plate 4530 (the side opposite to the protrusion 531) is lifted upward. Therefore, the portion lifted upward can be gripped, and as shown in FIG. 37, workability in removing the top plate 4530 from the body member 510 can be improved.

After removing the panel member 4520 from the removed top plate 4530 and replacing it with another panel member 4520, as shown in FIG. is attached to the housing portion 511 of the . In this case, the protrusion 531 formed on the front side of the top plate 4530 is engaged (inserted) into the slide groove 511 a of the main body member 510 . As a result, one longitudinal end side of the contact member 4532 of the top plate 4530 is brought into contact with (placed on) the upper surface of the lever member 570, and as shown in FIG. It is arranged in the accommodating portion 511 of the main body member 510 in a posture in which the piece portion 531 and the opposite end thereof are lifted upward.

When the rear side of the top plate 4530 is pushed downward from this state (the state shown in FIG. 36), the lever member 570 is pushed downward by the one longitudinal end side of the contact member 4532 while resisting the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP1. , the tip end of the lever member 570 is arranged below the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550, and the insertion cylinder portion 541 of the top plate 4530 is pushed down to the holding portion 511e of the main body member 510 and the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550. (that is, the positions where the openings at both ends of the insertion tube portion 541 face the holding portion 511e and the insertion hole 551).

Therefore, by pushing the lock member 560 in the second position toward the first position, the base end side (base member 562) of the lock member 560 can be inserted into the insertion tube portion 541 of the top plate 4530 and the main body member 510. , and the state shown in FIG. 35 is formed. That is, a state is created in which the top plate 4530 cannot be removed from the main body member 510 .

On the other hand, when the panel member 4520 is removed from the removed top plate 4530, but the replacement with another panel member 4520 (attaching (fastening and fixing) another panel member 4520 to the top plate 4530) is forgotten. , even if the top plate 4530 is attached to the housing portion 511 of the main body member 510, the one longitudinal end side of the contact member 4532 is positioned above (the bottom side of the top plate 4530) (see FIG. 33(b)). One longitudinal end of the contact member 4532 cannot push the lever member 570 downward. That is, the tip side of the lever member 570 is maintained facing the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550, and the state in which the lock member 560 at the second position is pushed toward the first position is restricted. Therefore, the front door 5 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 4.例文帳に追加

Here, for example, in the case of the first embodiment, the front door 5 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 4 unless the interposition plate 540 is disposed at a predetermined position. can be suppressed. However, in this case, whether or not the front door 5 can be closed depends only on the intervening plate 540, not on the panel member 520. That is, even if the panel member 520 is forgotten to be attached, the front door 5 can be closed, so forgetting to attach the panel member 520 cannot be suppressed.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the panel member 4520 is not attached (fastened and fixed) to the top plate 4530, even if the top plate 4530 is arranged at a predetermined position (accommodating portion 511), the second The locking member 560 in the position cannot be pushed toward the first position, and the state in which the locking member 560 is interposed between the front surface of the inner frame 4 and the rear surface of the front door 5 is maintained. A state in which the front door 5 cannot be closed with respect to the frame 4 can be formed. This allows the operator to recognize that the panel member 4520 has been left unattached.

On the other hand, a member (abutment member 4532) for pushing down the lever member 570 is arranged on the top plate 4530, and the posture of the abutment member 4532 is determined by whether or not the panel member 4520 is attached (fastened and fixed). Since it is a switching structure, even if only the panel member 4520 is arranged at a predetermined position (recessed portion 511c) of the main body member 510 and the top plate 4530 is forgotten to be arranged at a predetermined position (accommodating portion 511) of the main body member 510 , a state in which the front door 5 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 4 can be formed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the worker from forgetting to attach the top plate 4530 .

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 44. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the front door 5 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 4 by interposing (sandwiching) the lock member 560 has been described. By disabling locking, the front door 5 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 4.例文帳に追加In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 38 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper portion of the front door 5 in the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 38, illustration of some of the various members (for example, one of the pair of speakers) disposed on the front surface of the back member 5550 is omitted, and illustration of the lower end side of the lifting member 5565 is omitted. .

As shown in FIG. 38, the front door 5 according to the fifth embodiment includes a rotary plate 5563 rotatably supported by a support shaft 5556 of a back member 5550, and an upper end side of the rotary plate 5563 as a base of the lock member 560. It comprises a connecting rod 5564 connected to the member 562 and an elevating member 5565 arranged in a guide groove (not shown) extending in the vertical direction and raised and lowered as the rotary plate 5563 rotates.

The connecting rod 5564 is a rod-shaped member for transmitting the displacement associated with the sliding operation of the locking member 560 to the rotating plate 5563, and is connected to one end side connected to the locking member 560 or the other end side connected to the rotating plate 5563. At least one of them is rotatably supported by the locking member 560 or the rotating plate 5563 .

The rotation plate 5563 has a shaft support hole 5563a at the center in the longitudinal direction, and a projecting pin 5563b projecting from the side surface on the lower end side. The shaft support hole 5563a is a hole through which the support shaft 5556 of the back member 5550 is inserted. movable grooves). Therefore, when the sliding operation of the locking member 560 is transmitted to the upper end side of the rotating plate 5563 via the connecting rod 5564, the supporting shaft 5556 slides relatively within the shaft support hole 5563a, thereby causing the rotating plate 5563 to slide. is rotated while changing the height position (see FIGS. 40 and 43).

The elevating member 5565 has an elongated sliding groove 5565a extending parallel to the direction in which the locking member 560 is slid, and has a plurality of (three in this embodiment) pushers from the side surface. A lowering pin 5565b is projected. A projecting pin 5563b of the rotary plate 5563 is slidably inserted into the sliding groove 5565a.

Therefore, when the rotary plate 5563 is rotated while changing the height position, the change in the height position of the rotary plate 5563 is transmitted to the lifting member 5565 via the projecting pin 5563b and the sliding groove 5564a. The lifting member 5565 is lifted (FIGS. 40 and 43).

Each push-down pin 5565b is a part for pushing down the rear end side of each of the hook members 166a to 166c (see FIG. 5). They are placed side by side while being separated from each other.

The hook members 166a to 166c are rotatably supported by the support shaft 5557, and are arranged on the back member 5550 in such a manner that the tip end side thereof protrudes from the back face of the back member 5550. is engaged with the hook receiving member 167 of the inner frame 4 to constitute a locking mechanism of the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 (see FIGS. 40 and 41).

Next, a suppression mechanism in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 44. FIG.

39(a) and 39(b) are cross-sectional views of the gaming machine main section 3 in a state where the lock member 560 is slid to the first position, corresponding to the cross-sectional view taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. do. 40 and 41 are cross-sectional views of the gaming machine main section 3 in a state where the lock member 560 is slid to the first position, and correspond to the cross-sectional view taken along line XL-XL in FIG. 39(a) and 40, the front door 5 is opened with respect to the inner frame 4. In FIGS. 39(b) and 41, the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4. Each state is illustrated.

42(a) and 42(b) are cross-sectional views of the gaming machine main section 3 in a state where the lock member 560 is slid to the second position, corresponding to the cross-sectional view taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. do. 43 and 44 are cross-sectional views of the gaming machine main section 3 in a state where the lock member 560 is slid to the second position, and correspond to the cross-sectional view taken along line XL-XL in FIG. 42(a) and 43 show a state in which the front door 5 is opened with respect to the inner frame 4, and in FIGS. 42(b) and 44, the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4. Each state is illustrated.

Here, in the inner frame 4, a receiving plate 5028 is arranged behind the hook receiving member 167 (on the right side in FIG. 40). The receiving plate 5028 is biased toward the hook receiving member 167 by the elastic recovery force of the compression spring SP3 that has been elastically compressed and deformed.

Further, in the inner frame 4 in this embodiment, an escape portion 5004a is recessed in a region facing the lock member 560. As shown in FIG. When the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 with the lock member 560 being slid to the second position, the escape portion 5004a has the lock member 560 (tip member 561) (that is, the size that allows the locking member 560 and the inner frame 4 to be non-interfering).

As shown in FIGS. 39 to 41, when the lock member 560 is slid to the first position, the gap between the connecting rod 5564 and the support shaft 5556 is increased as the lock member 560 is slid to the first position. is increased, the rotating plate 5563 and the lifting member 5565 are lifted upward.

As a result, the push-down pin 5565b of the lifting member 5565 is positioned above the upper surface of the rear end side of the hook member 166a. Therefore, the hook member 166a for engaging with the hook receiving member 28 is allowed to rotate around the support shaft 557, so that the inner frame 4 is moved forward from the state shown in FIGS. When the door 5 is closed, as shown in FIGS. 39(b) and 41, the engaging portion of the hook member 166a is engaged with the hook receiving member 167 to form a locked state.

In this case, since the receiving plate 5028 is pushed backward by the hook member 166a, when the engagement between the hook member 166a and the hook receiving member 167 is released (unlocked), the elastic recovery force of the compression spring SP3 can push back the hook member 166a. That is, when opening the front door 5 from the closed state with respect to the inner frame 4, the force required for the opening can be assisted by the elastic recovery force of the compression spring SP3. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the operator when opening the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 42 to 44, when the lock member 560 is slid to the second position, the connecting rod 5564 and the support shaft 5556 are disengaged as the lock member 560 is slid to the second position. Since the distance between is reduced, rotating plate 5563 and lifting member 5565 are pushed downward.

As a result, the push-down pin 5565b of the lifting member 5565 pushes down the upper surface of the rear end side of the hook member 166a, and the hook member 166a is placed in a posture in which the engaging portion on the front end side is lifted upward, that is, , the hook-receiving member 167 can be in an unengageable posture.

Therefore, when the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 from the state shown in FIGS. 42(b) and 44, the engaging portion of the hook member 166a is not engaged with the hook receiving member 167, thereby preventing the locked state from being formed. That is, in a state where the interposition plate 540 is not arranged at a predetermined position, the locking can be restricted and the unlocked state can be maintained, so that the front door 5 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 4. can be formed. As a result, the operator can be made to recognize that the interposition plate 540 is not arranged. In addition, it is possible to suppress the action of intentionally not arranging the interposition plate 540 at a predetermined position.

In this case, when the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4, if the front door 5 is not locked, the front door 5 overlaps the front of the inner frame 4, so that the closed state is formed. There is a risk that the user may misunderstand.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the receiving plate 5028 and the compression spring SP3 are provided behind the hook receiving member 167, the hook member 166a lifts up the engaging portion on the tip side thereof, and the hook receiving member When the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 in a state in which it cannot be engaged with 167, as shown in FIG. The compression spring SP3 can be further compressed.

As a result, the elastic recovery force of the compression spring SP3 pushes back the hook member 166a forward (to the left in FIG. 44), displacing the front door 5 relative to the inner frame 4 in the opening direction. That is, even if the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4, the front door 5 is opened, so that it is possible to prevent the operator from erroneously recognizing that a closed state has been established. As a result, the worker can easily recognize that the interposition plate 540 is not provided.

Further, when closing the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 in this manner, the receiving plate 5028 can be pushed backward by the hook member 166a, and the compression spring SP3 can be compressed and deformed. can absorb impact and prevent damage.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the relief portion 5004a is recessed in the inner frame 4, it is possible to suppress damage due to impact when the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4. FIG. That is, for example, in the case of the first embodiment, if the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 without returning the interposed plate 540 to the predetermined position, the lock member is pulled between the inner frame 4 and the front door 5 . 560 (tip member 561) is partially interposed (sandwiched), and the force at the time of collision concentrates around the lock member 560, so the surface pressure increases and the lock member 560 is easily damaged.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, even if the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 without returning the interposition plate 540 to the predetermined position, as shown in FIGS. Since the lock member 560 (tip member 561) is received in the relief portion 5004a, the lock member 560 is not partially interposed (caught) between the inner frame 4 and the front door 5, and the front and front sides of the inner frame 4 are separated. The back surface of the door 5 can be brought into contact (collision) with the entire surface. As a result, the force at the time of collision can be distributed over the entire surface, the surface pressure can be reduced, and damage can be suppressed.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 50. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the operation of sliding the lock member 560 from the first position to the second position was restricted by the lever member 570 was described. A sliding operation to the second position is restricted by the slide plate 6540 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 45 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper portion of the front door 5 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 45, an accommodating portion 6511 for slidably arranging a slide plate 6540 is recessed in the upper surface of the main body member 510, and a working space 6511a is provided in a part of the accommodating portion 6511. recessed. Predetermined members (equipment) are accommodated in the work space 6511a.

The slide plate 6540 can be slid between a shielding position (see FIG. 47(a)) that shields the work space 6511a and an open position (see FIG. 47(b)) that opens the work space 6511a. . That is, normally, the slide plate 6540 is arranged at the shielding position, and when performing replacement, maintenance (adjustment), setting change/switching, switch operation, etc. of predetermined members housed in the work space 6511a, the slide plate 6540 is slid from the closed position to the open position. Here, slide plate 6540 will be described with reference to FIG.

46(a) is a top view of the slide plate 6540, FIG. 46(b) is a side view of the slide plate 6540 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLVIb in FIG. 46(a), and FIG. FIG. 46(b) is a cross-sectional view of slide plate 6540 taken along line XLVIc-XLVIc, and FIG. 46(d) is a cross-sectional view of slide plate 6540 taken along line XLVId-XLVId of FIG. 46(b).

As shown in FIG. 46, the slide plate 6540 includes a long plate-like top plate 6541 and a rectangular parallelepiped box-like shape protruding from the bottom surface of the top plate 6541 at one end in the longitudinal direction (the right side in FIG. 46(b)). and a portion 6542 .

The upper surface plate 6541 has plate-like projecting pieces 6541a protruding from the edges along the longitudinal direction. (See FIG. 48, respectively), so that the slide plate 6540 cannot be removed from the housing portion 6511 .

The top plate 6541 is placed on the bottom surface opposite to the working space 6511a of the housing part 6511 (the bottom surface that is one step higher than the bottom surface in which the working space 6511a is recessed), and is slid on the bottom surface. be.

The box-shaped portion 6542 is formed with an insertion hole 6542a through which the lock member 560 can be inserted. That is, when the slide plate 6540 is placed at the shielding position (see FIG. 47), the insertion hole 6542a is aligned with the holding portion 511e of the main body member 6510 and the insertion hole 551 of the back member 6550 (that is, Both end openings of the insertion hole 6542a are arranged at positions facing the holding portion 511e and the insertion hole 551 (see FIG. 48).

The box-shaped part 6542 is placed on the bottom surface of the accommodating part 6511 in which the work space 6511a is recessed, and is slid on the bottom surface. In this case, the longitudinal end surface of the box-shaped part 6542 (the left side in FIG. 46(b)) is the difference in level between the bottom surface of the housing part 6511 (the bottom surface on which the top plate 6541 is placed and the bottom surface on which the box-shaped part 6542 is placed). 6511, the slide plate 6540 cannot be removed from the accommodating portion 6511, and the slide plate 6540 is arranged at the open position.

Returning to FIG. 45, description will be made. A holding portion 511e is formed or provided in the main body member 6510, and an insertion hole 551 and a locking member 560 are formed or arranged in the back member 6550, respectively. The holding portion 511e of the main body member 6510, the insertion hole 551 of the rear member 6550, and the lock member 560 are arranged at the same positions as the holding portion 511e of the main body member 510, the insertion hole 551 of the rear member 550, and the lock member 560 in the first embodiment. Since the other configurations are substantially the same except for the point that is different, the same reference numerals are attached and the description thereof is omitted.

Next, a method of operating the suppression mechanism in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. FIG.

FIG. 47(a) is a top view of the front door 5 with the slide plate 6540 and the lock member 560 slid to the shielding position and the first position, respectively, and FIG. 47(b) is a top view of the slide plate 6540 and the lock member. 560 is a top view of the front door 5 in a state in which the door 560 is slid to the open position and the second position, respectively.

48 is a cross-sectional view of the front door 5 taken along line XLVIII-XLVIII in FIG. 47(a), and FIG. 49 shows a state in which the lock member 560 has been slid from the state shown in FIG. 48 to the second position. 50 is a cross-sectional view of the front door 5, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view of the front door 5 taken along line LI-LI in FIG. 47(b).

When performing replacement or maintenance of predetermined members in the work space 6511a, first, the front door 5 is opened with respect to the inner frame 4 in order to allow the lock member 560 to be slid (pushed in or pulled out).

As shown in FIGS. 47(a) and 48, when the lock member 560 is pushed into the first position, the lock member 560 is inserted through the insertion hole 6542a of the slide plate 6540, and the lock member 560 is inserted from one end of the insertion hole 6542a. The proximal end of the protruding locking member 560 (base member 562) is held in the holding portion 511e of the main body member 6510, and the distal end of the locking member 560 (distal member 561) protruding from the other end side of the insertion hole 6542a is the rear surface. It is held in the insertion hole 551 of the member 6550 . Therefore, the slide plate 6540 cannot be slid and is held at the shielding position (predetermined position).

47(a) and 48, the locking member 560 is pulled out to the rear side of the rear member 6550 and reaches the second position, as shown in FIG. 49, the locking member 560 (base member 562). is extracted from the insertion hole 6542a of the slide plate 6540. This allows the slide plate 6540 to be slid from the covering position to the releasing position.

As shown in FIGS. 47(b) and 50, when the slide plate 6540 is placed at the open position, the work space 6511a is opened, so that the replacement and maintenance of predetermined members accommodated in the work space 6511a can be performed. work is possible.

When the slide plate 6540 is placed at the open position, the lock member 560 is placed at the second position by the pullout operation. The lock member 560 (tip member 561) protrudes from.

Therefore, as described above, the lock member 560 is interposed between the front surface of the inner frame 4 and the rear surface of the front door 5 , so that the front door 5 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 4 . This makes it possible for the operator to recognize that the slide plate 6540 has forgotten to be returned to the shielding position (predetermined position).

Further, in this embodiment, when the slide plate 6540 is arranged at the open position, the slide plate 6540 can be projected from the front door 5 . This makes it possible for the operator to recognize that the slide plate 6540 has not been returned to the shielding position.

In particular, the slide plate 6540 protrudes toward the side of the leading end of the front door 5 (the side opposite to the center of rotation), and this slide plate 6540 hinders the operator's movement to open and close the front door 5. Therefore, the operator can be reminded that the slide plate 6540 has not been returned to the shielding position. On the other hand, since the slide plate 6540 protrudes to the side of the front door, even if the operator inadvertently closes the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 with the slide plate 6540 protruding, the slide plate 6540 does not slide. By avoiding interference between the plate 6540 and the inner frame 4, damage thereof can be suppressed.

In addition, in this state (state in which the slide plate 6540 is forgotten to be returned to the blocking position), the rear surface (rear end surface) of the box-shaped portion 6542 of the slide plate 6540 faces the proximal end of the base member 652 of the lock member 560. This restricts the pushing operation of the lock member 560 to the first position. In order to push the lock member 560 to the first position (that is, to create a state in which the front door 5 can be closed with respect to the inner frame 4), the slide plate 6540 is placed at a predetermined position (shielding position). There is a need to. That is, unless the slide plate 6540 is returned to the predetermined position, the lock member 560 cannot be pushed into the first position (close the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4). can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, after the locking member 560 is placed at the second position, the pushing operation of the locking member 560 to the first position is performed on the rear surface (rear end surface) of the box-shaped portion 6542 of the slide plate 6540 . can be regulated by That is, since it is not necessary to provide the lever member 570 as in the case of the first embodiment, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a seventh embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, the case where the compression spring SP2 is pushed in the axial direction by the tip member 2561 and is compressed and deformed in the state where the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 has been described (see FIG. 23). The compression spring SP2 in the seventh embodiment is pushed axially and compressed and deformed not only by the tip member 2561 but also by the insertion piece 7511f of the holding portion 511e. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 51 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the inner frame 4 and the front door 5 in the seventh embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. As shown in FIG. 51, at the rear end of the base member 7562 of the lock member 7560, a region including at least the upper surface (the upper surface in FIG. 51) and the rear end surface (the left surface in FIG. 51) of the base member 7562 is cut out. An opening is formed as a result, and the opening serves as the notch portion 7562f.

On the other hand, in the holding portion 511e of the body member 510, an insertion piece 7511f protruding from the inner wall surface and the bottom surface of the recess is formed at a position corresponding to the notch portion 7562f of the lock member 7560. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when the base end of the lock member 7560 (base member 7562) is held by the holding portion 511e, the insertion piece 7511f is inserted from the notch portion 7562f of the base member 7562 into the sliding guide portion 2562b, thereby displacing the compression spring SP2. Compressive deformation.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4, the rod-shaped portion 2561a in contact with the front surface of the inner frame 4 extends from the above-described dimension L1 (see FIG. 19). In addition to compressively deforming the compression spring SP2 by being pushed into the sliding guide portion 2562b by the amount of , the insertion piece 7511f of the holding portion 511e is inserted into the sliding guide portion 2562b, thereby compressing the compression spring SP2. can be further compressed and deformed. That is, compared with the case of the second embodiment (see FIG. 23), the amount of compressive deformation of the compression spring SP2 is increased to increase the biasing force that biases the tip member 2561 in the protruding direction (rightward direction in FIG. 51). can.

Therefore, when the front door 5 is opened with respect to the inner frame 4, the tip member 2561 can be protruded with a stronger force by the biasing force of the compression spring SP2. 51), and the reaction pushes the front door 5 in the opening direction (away from the inner frame 4, leftward in FIG. 51). As a result, even when the weight of the front door 5 is relatively large, the front door 5 can be easily opened from the inner frame 4, and the burden on the operator can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the lock member 7560 is slid (pulled out) to the second position (for example, see FIGS. 20 and 21), the insertion piece 7511f of the holding portion 511e is removed from the notch 7562f. Thus, the compression spring SP2 can be compressed and deformed between the rear end surface of the base member 7562 (sliding guide portion 2562b) and the piston portion 2561b of the tip member 2561. As shown in FIG.

In other words, since the insertion piece 7511f is not inserted, the amount of possible stroke in the pushing direction (leftward direction in FIGS. 20 and 21) of the tip member 2561 can be ensured, so that the state where the lock member 7560 is in the second position (that is, , the installation plate 540 has been forgotten), and when the front door 5 is closed against the inner frame 4 (see FIGS. 24 and 25), the compression spring SP2 exerts a cushioning effect due to elastic compression deformation. You can make it easier. As a result, the momentum of the collision can be weakened, and breakage of the lever member 570 can be suppressed.

Next, the suppressing mechanism in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 58. FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the gaming machine main section 8003 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG. FIG. 52 is an exploded front perspective view of the gaming machine main section 8003 in the eighth embodiment. 53(a) is a front view of the inner frame 8004, and FIG. 53(b) is a cross-sectional view of the inner frame 8004 along line LIIIb--LIIIb in FIG. 53(a). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, in the inner frame 8004 of the eighth embodiment, a projecting member 8713, which will be described later, projects between an insertion hole 8004a for inserting a locking member 8560, which will be described later, and the guide rail 75. An opening 8004b is formed through from the front surface to the rear surface.

The insertion hole 8004a is formed above the rotating shaft side of the inner frame 8004 (the left side in FIG. 53(a)), and is formed to have substantially the same or larger outer shape than the lock member 8560 when viewed from the front. is inserted.

The opening 8004b is formed between the guide rails 75 and has substantially the same or larger outer shape than the protruding member 8713 when viewed from the front, and the protruding member 8713 is inserted through the opening 8004b.

A hitting restricting member 8710 is arranged on the back surface of the inner frame 8004 . The ejection restricting member 8710 includes a pushing member 8711 arranged on the right side of the through hole 8004a in front view, a slide piece 8712 arranged below the pushing member 8711, and a projecting member 8713 arranged below the slide piece 8712. Mainly provide

The pushing member 8711 is a member that slides in the front-rear direction by being pressed by the lock member 8560, and is arranged so that at least a part thereof overlaps with the lock member 8560 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 53(a)). . In addition, the pushing member 8711 is formed in a trapezoidal shape when viewed from the side, and is tapered so that the thickness in the vertical direction becomes smaller (thinner) toward the tip. That is, the pressing member 8711 is formed with an inclined surface 8711a whose lower surface side is inclined upward toward the tip (front).

The slide piece 8712 is formed in a side view shape in which two tips on the short sides of an L-shape are connected point-symmetrically, and is formed to have a predetermined thickness in the left-right direction. In addition, inclined surfaces 8712a and 8712b inclined toward the center are formed at both upper and lower end portions of the slide piece 8712. As shown in FIG. That is, the inclined surfaces 8712a and 8712b are inclined upward toward the front.

The inclined surface 8712a is a surface that abuts against the inclined surface 8711a of the pushing member 8711, and its inclination angle is set substantially perpendicular to the inclination angle of the inclined surface 8711a of the pushing member 8711. In addition, the inclined surface 8712b is a surface formed on the lower end side, and is disposed in contact with an inclined surface 8713c of the protruding member 8713, which will be described later.

The protruding member 8713 is a member that protrudes from the opening 8004b described above, and the left and right side surfaces (the left and right sides in FIG. be. The protruding member 8713 is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the side, and has a protruding surface 8713a formed substantially parallel to the plane of the game board on the front end surface, and an inclined surface 8713b inclined downward toward the tip on the rear side. , and a plate-like protruding wall 8713c that is connected to the base of the inclined surface 8713b and protrudes upward.

The inclined surface 8713b is a surface that abuts on the inclined surface 8712b of the slide piece 8712 described above, and the inclination angle thereof is formed substantially perpendicular to the inclination angle of the inclined surface 8712b of the slide piece 8712.

A compression spring SP4 is arranged in front of the projecting wall 8713c. The compression spring SP4 is arranged between the projecting wall 8713c and the game board 13 so as to be contracted by a predetermined amount, and the projecting member 8713 is always urged rearward by the urging force of the compression spring SP4. be. Further, the projecting wall 8713c is arranged in contact with the front surface of the slide piece 8712 when the projecting member 8713 is positioned rearward. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protruding member 8713 from being pulled in beyond the predetermined position by the compression spring SP4.

It should be noted that the projecting surface 8713a is flush with the front surface of the game board 13 when the projecting member 8713c is retracted rearward by the biasing force of the compression spring SP4. As a result, the protruding surface 8713a does not affect the game balls (passing between the guide rails 75) launched into the game area PE.

Next, referring to FIG. 54, lock member 8560 will be described. FIG. 54(a) is a front perspective exploded view of the locking member 8560, FIG. 54(b) is a side view of the locking member 8560, and FIG. 54(c) is LIVc-LIVc of FIG. 8560 is a cross-sectional view of locking member 8560 at line.

As shown in FIGS. 54( a ) to 54 ( c ), the locking member 8560 mainly includes a tip member 8561 and a base member 8562 connected to the proximal end of the tip member 8561 . A plurality of protruding portions 562a are protrudingly formed on the proximal end side of.

The distal end member 8561 has a reduced thickness on the base end side, and a shaft support hole 8561a is formed in the reduced thickness. On the other hand, the base member 8562 is divided into two in the thickness direction, and a shaft portion 8562b is protrudingly provided on the tip end side of one divided body. With the shaft portion 8562b inserted through the torsion spring SP5 and the shaft support hole 8561a, the two divided bodies are fastened and fixed by bolts BT to be integrated, so that the base member 8562 can rotate toward the proximal end of the tip member 8561. connected to That is, the locking member 8560 is formed bendable.

In addition, in a state in which the extending directions of the tip member 8561 and the base member 8562 are arranged in the same direction (on a straight line), on one side of the tip member 8561 on the proximal side (upper side in FIG. 54(c)), A contact surface 8561b that contacts the base member 8562 is formed, and the surface on the other side (lower side in FIG. 54(c)) is formed in an arc shape having the same axis as the shaft support hole 8561a. It has a curved surface 8561c.

Thereby, the rotation of the tip member 8561 with respect to the base member 8562 is restricted in only one direction (clockwise in FIG. 53(c)). That is, when the distal end member 8561 and the base member 8562 are arranged in the same extending direction, the contact surface 8561b of the distal end member 8561 is arranged in contact with the base member 8562 . Therefore, the tip member 8561 cannot rotate in one side direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 53(c)) with respect to the base member 8562 . On the other hand, for rotation in the other direction, the curved surface 8561c ensures the space required for the rotation of the tip member 8561, so that the tip member 8561 can be rotated.

Here, as described above, the torsion spring SP5 is arranged on the shaft portion of the base member 8562 . As shown in FIG. 54(b), the torsion spring SP5 has an end extending toward one end biasing the tip member 8561 toward one side, and an end extending toward the other end biases the base member 8562 to one side. placed in a directionally biased manner.

As a result, the lock member 8560 is biased by the torsion spring SP5 so that the extending directions of the tip member 8561 and the base member 8562 are always the same. As a result, even if an external force acting in the other direction acts on the tip member 8561 and the tip member 8561 rotates with respect to the base member 8562, the external force acting in the other direction is released, so that the tip member 8561 becomes a torsion spring. By rotating with the biasing force of SP5, the tip member 8561 and the base member 8562 can extend in the same direction (the state before the external force acts).

Next, the outer frame 8002 will be described with reference to FIG. 55(a) is a front perspective view of the outer frame 8002, FIG. 55(b) is a front view of the outer frame 8002, and FIG. 55(c) is the line LVc-LVc of FIG. 55(b). is a sectional view of the folding member 8002a in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b), the outer frame 8002 is formed with a folded portion 8002a protruding inward. The folding part 8002a is a member that rotates the tip member 8561 of the locking member 8560 with respect to the base member 8562 when the locking member 8560 abuts thereon, and is arranged behind the locking member 8560 .

Further, referring to FIG. 55(c), the folded portion 8002a includes a first folded portion 8002a1 that has a substantially triangular cross section and protrudes forward, and a second folded portion 8002a1 that is connected to the base end side of the first folded portion 8002a1. It is mainly formed with a folded portion 8002a2.

Next, referring to FIG. 56, the operation of lock member 8560 will be described. FIGS. 56(a) to 56(d) are top views of the pachinko machine 1 in each state of closing the game machine main section 8003 opened from the outer frame 8002. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 56(a) and 56(b), the main part 8003 of the gaming machine is rotated from the outer frame 8002 around one end, whereby the lock member 8560 is operably exposed on the back surface of the inner frame 8004. be.

When the lock member 8560 is pulled backward from the inner frame 8004 in a state in which the game machine main portion 8003 is rotated about one end from the outer frame 8002, the tip side of the lever member 570 moves upward as in the first embodiment. and pushes the intervening plate 540 upward. Also, the tip side of the lever member 570 is arranged at a position facing the insertion hole 8551 of the back member 8550 . This restricts the movement of the lock member 8560 in the pushing direction.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 56(c) and 56(d), a description will be given of a case in which the main part 8003 of the game machine is rotated with respect to the outer frame 8002 and closed with the interposition plate 540 removed. . When the lock member 8560 is pulled out rearward from the inner frame 8004 , the tip member 8561 is arranged in a state protruding from the inner frame 8004 . When the gaming machine main portion 8003 is closed to the outer frame 8002 with the tip member 8561 protruding from the inner frame 8004, the tip member 8561 of the lock member 8560 comes into contact with the folded portion 8002a of the outer frame 8002.

In this case, the tip member 8561 first contacts the first folded portion 8002a1 of the folded portion 8002a. As described above, the first folded portion 8002a1 is inclined to have a substantially triangular cross-section. An external force that rotates the 8561 can be applied.

Furthermore, when the tip member 8561 is rotated by the base member 8562 by the first folded portion 8002a, the end of the tip member 8561 reaches the connection portion between the first folded portion 8002a1 and the second folded portion 8002a2, 2 The side surface of the folded portion 8002a2 is slidably displaced. As a result, an external force for rotating the distal end member 8561 with respect to the base member 8562 can be applied, and the rotational distance can be ensured.

Further, referring to FIG. 56(d), the tip member 8561 rotated with respect to the base member 8562 abuts the back surface of the pushing member 8711 arranged adjacently on its side surface. Therefore, as the distal end member 8561 rotates relative to the base member 8562, the pushing member 8711 can be pushed forward.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the operation of the launch restricting member 8710 will be described. 57(a) and 57(b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame 8004, corresponding to the cross-section taken along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 53(a).

As described above, when the distal end member 8561 of the locking member 8560 is rotated with respect to the base member 8562, its side surface presses the rear surface of the pushing member 8711. As shown in FIG. This allows the pushing member 8711 to be displaced forward.

When the pushing member 8711 is displaced forward, the inclined surface 8711a of the pushing member 8711 slides on the inclined surface 8712a of the slide piece 8712 . As a result, the displacement when the pushing member 8711 is pushed becomes an operation for displacing the slide piece 8712 downward. Further, when the slide piece 8712 slides downward due to the displacement of the pushing member 8711 described above, the inclined surface 8712b of the slide piece 8712 slides on the inclined surface 8713b of the protruding member 8713 . Therefore, the protrusion member 8713 can be pushed forward by the displacement of the slide piece 8712 displaced by the pushing member 8711 .

That is, when the game machine main section 8003 is rotated with the lock member 8560 pulled out backward (the interposition plate 540 is removed) and arranged inside the outer frame 8002, the pushing member 8711 pushes the tip member 8561 to rotate. , and the protruding member 8713 is pushed forward.

As a result, when the operator forgets to return the interposition plate 540 and the interposition plate 540 is not arranged on the main body member, the game machine main part 8003 is rotated and placed inside the outer frame 8002. A member 8713 protrudes from between the guide rails 75 . As a result, the operator can be made to recognize that the interposed plate 540 has been left unattached.

Next, referring to FIG. 58, the relationship between the projecting member 8713 and the game ball will be described. FIG. 58(a) is a front view of the gaming machine main section 8003, and FIG. 58(b) is a sectional view of the gaming machine main section 8003 along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb of FIG. 58(a). In addition, in FIG. 58(b), the glass 8 is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line.

The distance L1 between the protruding member 8713 and the outer rail 77 (guide rail 75) is set smaller than the diameter L2 of the game ball T and larger than half the diameter L2 of the game ball (L2/2<L1< L2). Further, the distance L3 from the projecting surface 8713a of the projecting member 8713 to the glass 8 is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball L2 (L3<L2).

Therefore, since the interval L1 is set to be smaller than the diameter L2 of the game ball T, the ball hit to the guide rail 75 cannot pass between the guide rails 75, so that the game ball T is placed in the game area PE It is possible to regulate that it is emitted (flowed) into.

That is, the protruding member 8713 protrudes from between the guide rails 75 to restrict the flow of the game ball T into the game area PE, thereby making it impossible to play the game. It is possible to prevent the game from being played with cheating by avoiding the ball from entering the entrance of the ball. In addition, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is not involved in a fraudulent act to recognize that it is impossible to play a game when playing the game unintentionally.

Furthermore, since the protruding member 8713 protrudes between the guide paths 75 from which the game ball T is launched, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the game cannot be played. In this case, even if a player who is not involved in the fraudulent act cannot recognize that the game cannot be played, the shot ball is restricted from being shot to the play area PE. The ball can be returned to the lower tray 50. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to avoid giving disadvantage to the player.

It should be noted that the projecting member 8583 is preferably arranged in the vicinity of the return prevention member 68 . As a result, it is possible to make the presence of the projecting member 8713 more easily recognized by the player watching the direction of the game ball shot from the shooting means.

Also, in this case, the retracting operation of the protruding member 8713 can be released by attaching the intervening plate 540 to a predetermined position and returning the locking member 8560 to the first position. That is, if the interposed plate 540 is not returned to a predetermined position, the protruding member 8713 is positioned forward and the game cannot be played.

Here, if the protruding member 8713 protrudes between the guide paths 42 to prevent the game ball T from being shot into the game area PE, in a normal game state in which the protruding member 8713 is retracted, the protruding member Due to variations in the retracted position of the 8713 and the gap between the projecting member 8713 and the opening 8004b, a load is applied to the game ball passing through the guide path 42, and there is a risk that the game ball T cannot be shot into the game area PE at a stable speed. be. In addition, there is a risk that the jumping game ball T will collide with the glass 8 and damage it due to the step caused by the variations and gaps described above.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the distance L1 between the protruding member 8713 and the guide rail 75 is formed larger than half the diameter L2 of the game ball T, as described above. Therefore, the game ball T to be shot is guided to the game area PE while contacting the outer guide rail 75 by the centrifugal force of the shot. is arranged (a gap larger than the radius of the game ball T is formed between the protruding member 8713 and the inlet portion 75b), so that the guidance of the game ball T in the normal game state is not loaded. , the game ball T can be shot to the game area PE at a stable speed. In addition, it is possible to suppress the breakage of the glass 8 by suppressing the jumping of the game ball T on the steps.

In addition, as described above, even if the retracted position of the protruding member 8713 varies, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied to the guidance of the game ball T. No need to consider. Therefore, the manufacturing of parts can be simplified, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, a suppressing mechanism in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 63. FIG.

FIG. 59 is an exploded front perspective view of the gaming machine main section 9003 in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 60(a) is a rear view of the gaming machine main section 9003, and FIG. 60(b) is a sectional view of the gaming machine main section 9003 along line LXb-LXb of FIG. 60(a). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, the front door 9005 in the ninth embodiment is provided with a handle projecting member 9720 on the far side (handle side) from the rotation axis. The handle protruding member 9720 includes a slide member 9721 arranged adjacent to the left side of the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550 when viewed from the back, and a connecting member 9722 having one end connected below the slide member 9721 and extending vertically. , a rotation transmission member 9723 having one end connected to the other end of the connection member 9722, and a protruding member 9724 arranged in the center of the operation handle 51 and connected to the rotation transmission member 9723 on the rear side.

The slide member 9721 is formed in a trapezoidal shape when viewed from the side. The slide member 9721 has an inclined surface 9721a extending to the tip and inclined downward on the side surface on the back side (the right side in FIG. 60(b)), and the bottom surface (the lower surface in FIG. 60(b)), which will be described later. A hole-shaped connecting hole 9721b having a predetermined depth into which one end of the connecting member 9722 is inserted is formed.

The inclined surface 9721a is a surface against which a tip member 8561 of a lock member 9560 described later abuts and is pressed. The slide member 9721 is arranged so as to be displaceable downward by the pressing force when the inclined surface 9721a is pressed in the horizontal direction.

The connecting hole 9721b is a hole to which one end of the connecting member 9722 is connected, and is formed to have a diameter substantially equal to or smaller than the diameter of the connecting member 9722 . As a result, one end of the connecting member 952 is press-fitted into the connecting hole 9721b, and the slide member 9721 and the connecting member 9722 are connected.

The connecting member 9722 is formed of a metal member and a round bar having a predetermined diameter, and extends vertically from the front door 9005 . One end of the connecting member 9722 is inserted into the connecting hole 9721b of the slide member 9721 as described above. On the other hand, the other end of the connecting member 9722 is provided with a bent portion 9722a that is bent in the direction opposite to the rotational axis of the front door 9005 .

The rotation transmitting member 9723 is formed in an elliptical shape when viewed from the side, and has a through hole 9723a formed at one end thereof into which the bent portion 9722a of the connecting member 9722 is inserted. A protrusion 9723b is formed on the other end of the rotation transmission member 9723 so as to protrude toward the rotation shaft side of the front door 9005 (left side in FIG. 2(a)).

The through-hole 9723a is a hole into which the bent portion 9722a of the connecting member 9722 is inserted, as described above. As a result, the rotation transmission member 9723 is rotatably arranged around the bent portion 9722a of the connecting member 9722 as an axis.

The protrusion 9723b is inserted through a sliding groove 9005a that is elongated in the front-rear direction, and is inserted through an engaging hole 9724a formed at one end of the protruding member 9724. As shown in FIG.

Here, the rotation transmission member 9723 has the through hole 9723a arranged above the projection 9723b. Therefore, when the rotation transmitting member 9723 rotates about the axis of the bent portion 9722a of the connecting member 9722, the projection 9723b can slide inside the sliding groove 9005a.

A torsion spring (not shown) is arranged between the bent portion 9722a of the connecting member 9722 and the through hole 9723a of the rotation transmitting member 9723. As shown in FIG. The torsion spring biases the projection 9723b side rearward about the rotation shaft 9593a of the rotation transmission member 9723 (in FIG. 60(b), the rotation transmission member 9723 is biased clockwise about the through hole 9723a). state). As a result, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member 9723 due to the gravity of the slide member 9721 and the connecting member 9722 can be suppressed.

The protruding member 9724 is a member that is formed in a columnar shape and arranged in the central portion of the operation handle 51 with its extending direction being the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 60(b)). The protruding member 9724 is arranged so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and its front surface is arranged so as to be substantially the same as the front surface of the operation handle 51 when positioned rearward (see FIG. 60(b)). In addition, the protruding member 9724 has a hole-shaped engaging hole 9724a penetrating in the left-right direction in a front view (the left-right direction in FIG. 60(a)) at the end on the back side.

The projection 9723b of the rotation transmission member 9723 described above is inserted into the engagement hole 9724a. As a result, when the rotation transmitting member 9723 rotates about the axis of the bent portion 9722a of the connecting member 9722 and the projection 9723b slides inside the sliding groove 9005a, the sliding of the projection 9723b interlocks with the sliding. The projecting member 9724 can be slid forward and backward.

The lock member 9560 differs from the base member 8562 of the eighth embodiment only in the length dimension in the extension direction, and the other configurations are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The game board accommodating portion 141 of the inner frame 9004 is formed with a folding portion 8002a on the inner surface thereof. The folded portion 8002a is a member that rotates the distal end member 8561 of the locking member 9560 with respect to the base member 9562 when the locking member 9560 abuts thereon, and is arranged behind the locking member 9560 .

Next, referring to FIG. 61, the operation of lock member 9560 will be described. 61(a) to (d) are top views of the game machine main section 9003 in each state of the operation of closing the front door 9005 opened from the inner frame 9004. FIG. 61(a) to 61(d), the locking member 9560 and the folded portion 8002a are illustrated by dashed lines.

As shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), the lock member 9560 is arranged to be operable from the front side of the inner frame 9003 by rotating the front door 9005 around one end of the inner frame 9004. be done.

With the front door 9005 rotated around one end of the inner frame 9004, when the lock member 9560 is pulled out rearward from the back member 550, the tip side of the lever member 570 is moved upward as in the first embodiment. The interposition plate 540 is pushed upward by being flipped up. Further, the tip side of the lever member 570 is arranged at a position facing the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550 . This restricts the movement of the lock member 9560 in the pushing direction.

Next, referring to FIGS. 61(c) and 61(d), the front door 9005 is rotated with respect to the inner frame 9004 with the interposition plate 540 removed (lock member 9560 pulled out rearward). I will explain what happens when the When the lock member 9560 is pulled out rearward from the back member 550 , the tip member 8561 is arranged in a state of protruding from the inner frame 8004 . When the front door 9005 is closed to the inner frame 9004 in this state (the tip member 8561 protrudes from the back member 550), the tip member 8561 of the lock member 9560 comes into contact with the folded portion 8002a of the inner frame 9004.

Here, since the operation of the tip member 8561 of the lock member 9560 after the tip member 8561 of the lock member 9560 abuts against the folded portion 8002a is the same as in the eighth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the handle projection member 9720 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63. FIG. 62(a) is a rear view of the front door 9005 viewed in the direction of arrow VXIIa in FIG. 61(b), and FIG. 62(b) is a rear view of the front door 9005 viewed in the direction of arrow VXIIb in FIG. 61(d). It is a diagram. FIG. 63(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front door 9005 taken along line LXIIIa-LXIIIa in FIG. 62(a), and FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. 62 and 63, illustration of the inner frame 9004 is omitted.

When the tip member 8561 of the lock member 9560 is rotated with respect to the base member 9562, the side surface of the tip member 8561 presses the inclined surface 9721a of the slide member 9721. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the slide member 9721 can be slid downward.

When the front door 9005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 9004 (the state shown in FIG. 61(d)), at least part of the bottom surface of the tip member 8561 of the lock member 9560 contacts the top surface of the slide member 9721. . As a result, when the protruding member 9724, which will be described later, is positioned in a protruding state, the pressing force of the protruding member 9724 can be received by the surfaces of the bottom surface of the locking member 9560 and the top surface of the distal end member 8561. As a result, damage to the lock member 9560 can be suppressed.

When the slide member 9721 is displaced downward, the connecting member 9722 connected to the slide member 9721 is similarly displaced downward. As a result, the rotation transmitting member 9723 to which the connecting member 9722 is connected is pushed downward.

When the through hole 9723a is pushed downward, the rotation transmitting member 9723 slides forward while rotating about the through hole 9723a. Accordingly, the protruding member 9724 engaged with the projection 9723b of the rotation transmission member 9723 is pushed forward, and the front surface of the protruding member 9724 protrudes from the central portion of the operation handle 51. As shown in FIG.

That is, when the operator forgets to return the interposition plate 540 and the interposition plate 540 is not arranged on the main body member 510 and the front door 9003 is closed to the inner frame 9004 , the protruding member 9724 moves to the central portion of the operation handle 51 . protrude from As a result, the operator can be made to recognize that the interposed plate 540 has been left unattached.

In this case, even if the operator does not recognize the projection of the projecting member 9724, the projecting member 9724 projects forward of the handle 51, so that the player cannot operate the handle 51. are restricted to be launched. The projection distance of the projecting member 9724 is preferably set larger than the radius of the handle 51 with respect to the handle 51, more preferably larger than the diameter of the handle 51.

That is, the protrusion member 9724 protrudes with respect to the handle 51 by a dimension larger than the radius of the handle 51 , thereby suppressing the player from grasping the handle 51 . Accordingly, when the lock member 9560 is not arranged at the first position, the projecting member 9724 can disable the playing of the game, thereby suppressing the playing of the game involving cheating. can.

Moreover, since the projection of the projecting member 9724 from the operating handle 51 is started during the operation of closing the front door 9005 to the inner frame 9004, the projection of the projecting member 9724 can be easily recognized by the operator. For example, when the protruding member 9724 protrudes from the operation handle 51 or the front door 9005 after the front door 9005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 9004, the worker's consciousness is already focused on the next work at that time. It is difficult to recognize that the protruding member 9724 protrudes from the operating handle 51 or the front door 9003 because it faces the front door 9003 . On the other hand, during the closing operation, there is a high possibility that the worker's consciousness is directed toward the front door 9003, so that at least the worker can easily recognize that the protrusion member 9724 has started to protrude.

Further, since the operation handle 51 is arranged on the side opposite to the rotation axis of the front door 9005, it is easily brought into contact with the operator when the operator closes the front door 9005 with respect to the inner frame 9004. can do. That is, when the front door 9005 is to be closed, the operator operates (pushes by hand) the other side in the width direction of the front door 9005 opposite to the side on which the inner frame 9004 is supported. By arranging the protruding member 9724 , the protruding member 9724 protruding from the front door 9005 can be easily recognized by the operator. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the operator to recognize that the interposing plate 540 has been forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position.

In this case, while the operator is likely to close the front door 9005 to the inner frame 9004 while gripping the operation handle 51, the operation handle 51 may be closed if the interposition plate 540 is forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position. Since the protruding member 9724 protrudes from the tip of the protruding member 9724, the tip of the protruding member 9724 can be easily pressed against the operator's hand. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the operator to recognize that the interposing plate 540 has been forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position.

Next, referring to FIG. 64, a state in which the protruding member 9724 protrudes from the operating handle 51 will be described. 64(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating handle 51 before the projecting member 9724 is projected, and FIG. 64(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating handle 51 after the projecting member 9724 is projected.

The operating handle 51 is formed with a rotating member that is rotated so that the player can hit the game ball T into the game area. Note that illustration of the rotating member is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 64, a projecting member 9724 inserted into the center of the operating handle 51 is formed with a projection 9724b. The protrusion 9724 b is a member that protrudes radially outward from the protruding member 9724 and is arranged in the space inside the operating handle 51 .

Here, when the protruding member 9724 protrudes forward, the protrusion 9724b formed on the protruding member 9724 is similarly displaced forward. When the projection 9724b is displaced forward, it engages with a rotating member provided on the operating handle 51. As shown in FIG. As a result, when the projecting member 9724 is projected, the rotating member of the operating handle 51 cannot be operated.

Therefore, since the operation of the rotating member of the operation handle 51 is disabled and the game is disabled, the game ball T is prevented from entering the ball entrance of the game area PE, which is accompanied by cheating. It is possible to suppress the game from being performed. In addition, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is not involved in a fraudulent act to recognize that it is impossible to play a game when playing the game unintentionally.

In this case, even if a player who is not involved in the fraudulent act cannot recognize that he or she is unable to play the game, shooting the game ball T is restricted, so that the player is not disadvantaged. You can avoid giving

Next, the suppression mechanism in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 70. FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the suppression mechanism in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. FIG. FIG. 65 is an exploded front perspective view of the gaming machine main section 10003 in the tenth embodiment. 66(a) is a top view of the gaming machine main section 10003, and FIG. 66(b) is a schematic side view of the gaming machine main section 10003. FIG. FIG. 67 is a schematic cross-sectional view along line LXVII-LXVII of FIG. 66(a). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the front door 10005 according to the tenth embodiment is provided with a rotation restricting member 10730 on the rear surface of the front door 10005 on the far side from the rotation axis that rotates with respect to the inner frame 9004 . On the other hand, a decorative member 10740 having a rotary shaft 10750 below is arranged on the front side on the right side of the front door 10005 when viewed from the front. An opening 10005b into which the projection 10742 of the decorative member 10740 is inserted is formed through the front door 10005 at a position facing the projection 10742 .

The rotation restricting member 10730 includes a slide member 9721 arranged adjacent to the left side of the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550 in the rear view, and a connecting member 10592 having one end connected to the lower side of the slide member 9721 and extending vertically. , and an engaging member 10731 whose one end is connected to the other end of the connecting member 10592 .

Since the connecting member 10722 differs from the connecting member 9722 in the ninth embodiment only in extension length dimension, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the connecting member 10722 is formed to have a length dimension shorter than that of the connecting member 9722 of the ninth embodiment.

The engaging member 10731 is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side and has a predetermined thickness. The engaging member 10731 has a through hole 10731c that penetrates in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 66(a)) at the end of the long side (one side) of the engaging member 10731 formed in a substantially L shape when viewed from the side. At the same time, a rotating shaft 10731b projecting in both left and right directions is formed at the approximate center of the long side (one side). On the other hand, the short side (the other side) formed in a substantially L-shape in side view is formed as an engagement piece 10731a that engages with a decorative member 10740, which will be described later.

The rotating shaft 10731b is a shaft portion for rotating with respect to the front door 10005 when the engaging member 10731 is arranged on the rear surface of the front door 10005. Formed in a columnar shape.

The through-hole 10731c is a hole into which the bent portion 9722a of the connecting member 10722 is inserted. It is formed in the shape of an elongated hole. Accordingly, when the connecting member 10722 is displaced in the extension direction, the bent portion 9722a of the connecting member 10722 can slide inside the through hole 9723a. As a result, the engaging member 10731 can be rotationally displaced about the rotating shaft 10731b as the connecting member 10722 is displaced without changing the position of the rotating shaft 10731b.

The engaging piece 10731a is a member that prevents the decorative member 10740 from being displaced by being fitted inside a concave groove 10742a of the decorative member 10740, which will be described later. It is set to be the same as the axis of 10731b. As a result, when the engaging member 10731 is rotationally displaced around the rotary shaft 10731b, the cross-sectional area of the decorative member 10740 fitted inside the groove 10742a can be kept constant. As a result, it is not necessary to consider the shape of the groove 10742a of the decorative member 10740 so as not to interfere with the rotational displacement of the engaging member 10731, and the width of the groove 10742a can be minimized.

A torsion spring (not shown) is arranged on the rotating shaft 10731b of the engaging member 10731 . The torsion spring is arranged in a state of always biasing the rotating shaft 10731b of the engaging member 10731 in a forward rotating direction. Thereby, the engaging member 10731 can be prevented from rotating due to the gravity of the slide member 9721 and the connecting member 10722 .

Next, the decorative member 10740 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 68(a) is a top view of the decorative member 10740, FIG. 68(b) is a rear view of the decorative member 10740, and FIG. 68(c) is the decoration in LXVIIIc-LXVIIIc of FIG. 68(a). 10740 is a cross-sectional view of member 10740. FIG.

The decorative member 10740 is formed in a substantially U shape when viewed from above, and is arranged on the front door 10005 with the curved surface positioned on the front side of the front door 10005 . In addition, the decorative member 10740 is a member made of a transparent material, and is configured so that lighting or blinking of light emitting means such as an LED provided inside can be visually recognized by the player. (right side in front view) (see FIGS. 65 to 67).

The decorative member 10740 includes a main body portion 10743 formed in a substantially U shape when viewed from the top, a cover portion 10741 through which a rotating shaft 10750 for rotation is inserted, and a protrusion with which an engaging piece 10601b of the engaging member 10731 engages. A part 10742 is mainly provided.

The body portion 10743 is formed in a substantially U shape having a predetermined thickness when viewed from the top, and has a notch 10743a formed in an arc shape on the lower rear surface side. The notch 10743a is formed with substantially the same axis as the shaft hole 10741a described later.

The cover portion 10741 is a portion that protrudes from the outer surface of the notch 10743 a of the body portion 10743 and is formed to have a smaller thickness than the body portion 10743 . Further, the cover portion 10741 is formed with a shaft hole 10741a penetrating in the left-right direction. The shaft hole 10741a is a hole through which a rotating shaft 10750 described later is inserted, and is formed to have a diameter substantially equal to or larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 10750 . Therefore, since the shaft hole 10741a is formed on the back side of the body portion 10743, when the decorative member 10740 is arranged with its longitudinal direction vertical, a load can be applied to the decorative member 10740 in a forward tilting direction.

The protruding portion 10742 is a portion that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the main body portion 10743, and is a portion that is inserted into the opening 10005b formed in the front door 10005 when the decorative member 10740 is arranged on the front door 10005. The protruding portion 10742 is formed in a fan shape when viewed from the side, and its curvature is formed from an axis that is substantially the same as the axis of the shaft hole 10741a. In addition, the inner curved surface formed in a fan-like shape when viewed from the side is formed continuously with the curved surface of the notch 10743a.

As a result, when the decorative member 10740 is tilted forward about the axial center of the shaft hole 10741a, the cross section of the projecting portion 10742 inserted through the opening 10005a of the front door 10005 can be kept constant. That is, the radial dimension L1 about the axis of the shaft hole 10741a can be kept constant. As a result, the formation of a gap between the opening 10005a and the decorative member 10740 can be suppressed.

Further, the protruding portion 10742 is formed with a protrusion 10742b protruding upward in the axial direction from the tip thereof. The projection 10742b is a member that functions as a stopper when the decorative member 10740 is tilted forward about the axial center of the shaft hole 10741a. A radial dimension L2 is formed larger than the opening 10005a. Thus, when the decorative member 10740 tilts forward about the axial center of the shaft hole 10741a, the projection 10742b can regulate the amount of tilting rotation.

Further, the projecting portion 10742 is formed with a groove 10742a into which the engaging piece 10731a of the engaging member 10731 is inserted. The recessed groove 10742a is a groove curved in a fan shape in a side view with the axis of the rotating shaft 10731b of the engaging member as the axis. Further, as described above, since the engagement piece 10731a is inserted into the inner surface of the groove 10742a, the groove width of the groove 10742a is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the engagement piece 10731a.

Returning to FIG. 67, the arrangement of the decorative member 10740 will be explained. Referring to FIG. 67, the upper plate 17 on which the decorative member 10740 is arranged is formed with a projecting portion 17a that curves and protrudes upward.

A shaft support hole 17b into which the rotating shaft 10750 is inserted is formed through the protrusion 17a at the center in a side view. The decorative member 10740 is arranged on the front door 10005 so as to surround the outer peripheral surface of the protrusion 17a. be mounted.

Moreover, the protrusion 17a is formed in substantially the same shape as the curved shape of the notch 10743a of the decorative member 10740, and its arc length is set larger than that of the notch 10743a. This allows the decorative member 10740 to tilt forward about the shaft hole 10741a.

Therefore, when the decorative member 10740 is arranged on the front door 10005, the gap formed between the protrusion 17a and the notch 10743a is minimized, and even when the decorative member 10740 is tilted, the gap is large. You can prevent it from becoming As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap on the front side of the game machine, thereby suppressing fraud by inserting a casting into the gap.

Next, referring to FIG. 69, the operation of lock member 9560 will be described. 69(a) to 69(d) are top views of the gaming machine main section 10003 in each state of the operation of closing the front door 10005 opened from the inner frame 9004. FIG. 69(a) to 69(d), the locking member 9560 and the folded portion 8002a are illustrated by dashed lines.

Here, description of each state of the operation of closing the front door 10005 opened from the inner frame 9004 shown in FIG. 69 is the same as that of the ninth embodiment except for the shape of the front door 10005. Therefore, description thereof is omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 70, the operation of rotation restricting member 10730 will be described. 70(a) is a sectional view of the gaming machine main section 10003 along line LXXa-LXXa in FIG. 69(b), and FIG. 70(b) is a gaming machine main section along line LXXb-LXXb in FIG. 10003 is a cross-sectional view of the portion 10003. FIG.

When the tip member 8561 of the lock member 9560 is rotated with respect to the base member 9562, the side surface of the tip member 8561 presses the inclined surface 9721a of the slide member 9721. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the slide member 9721 can be slid downward.

When the slide member 9721 is displaced downward, the connecting member 10722 connected to the slide member 9721 is similarly displaced downward. As a result, the engaging member 10731 to which the connecting member 10722 is connected is rotationally displaced around the rotating shaft 10731b.

When the through hole 10731c side of the engaging member 10731 is displaced downward, the engaging piece 10731a side is displaced upward. As a result, the engaging piece 10731a is pulled out from the inner surface of the groove 10742a of the decorative member 10740. As shown in FIG. Accordingly, the engagement between the decorative member 10740 and the engaging member 10731 is released, and the decorative member 10740 tilts forward about the shaft hole 10741a. As a result, even if the operator forgets to return the interposition plate 540 after removing the interposition plate 540, the decorative member 10740 disposed on the front surface of the front door 10005 can be tilted forward. The worker can be made to recognize that the installation plate 540 has been forgotten.

In addition, since the tilting of the decorative member 10740 is started during the operation of closing the front door 10005 to the inner frame 9004, the tilting of the decorative member 10740 can be easily recognized by the operator.

Furthermore, since the decorative member 10740 is arranged on the side opposite to the rotational axis of the front door 10005, it is easily brought into contact with the worker when the worker closes the front door 10005 with respect to the inner frame 9004. be able to. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the operator to recognize that the interposing plate 540 has been forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position.

In addition, in the case of the tenth embodiment, the decorative member 10740 that tilts from the front door 10005 is a member that extends in the vertical direction. The tilted distance can be sufficiently secured. As a result, the decorative member 10740 can be reliably brought into contact with the worker working in front of the front door 10005 . As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the operator to recognize that the interposing plate 540 has been forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position.

Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 77. FIG. In the first embodiment described above, when the lock member 560 is placed in the second position (the position removed from the insertion tube portion 541), the closing of the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 is restricted. In the eleventh embodiment, the panel member 520 is displaced when the front door 11005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 with the lock member 560 arranged at the second position. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

Further, the first position of the locking member 560 described below means that the locking member 560 is inserted through the tubular insertion portion 541 of the interposition plate 540 and protrudes from one end side of the tubular insertion portion 541, as in the first embodiment. The proximal end of the locking member 560 (base member 562) is held in the holding portion 511e of the main body member 11510, and the distal end of the locking member 560 (distal member 561) protruding from the other end side of the insertion tube portion 541 is the rear surface. The second position is a state in which the member 550 is held in the insertion hole 551 , and the lock member 560 is pulled out to the back side of the back member 550 and the projecting portion 562 a is engaged with the front side of the back member 550 . state.

Furthermore, in the following description, as in the first embodiment, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. ), the horizontal direction of the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 is defined as the horizontal direction, and the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG.

First, referring to FIGS. 71 to 74, the overall configuration of the upper portion of front door 11005 will be described. FIG. 71 is a front view of the upper portion of the front door 11005 in the eleventh embodiment. 72 is an exploded perspective view of the upper portion of the front door 11005. FIG. FIG. 73 is a top view of the main part 11003 of the gaming machine. 74(a) and 74(b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the main part 11003 of the gaming machine taken along line LXXIVa-LXXIVa in FIG.

In FIG. 71, a transparent region R1 and an opaque region R2, which will be described later, are shown surrounded by two-dot chain lines, and the outer shape of the panel member 11520 arranged on the back side of the transparent region R1 is shown by chain lines. be. 73 shows a state in which the top plate 530 and the interposition plate 540 are removed (seeing through), and FIGS. 74(a) and 74(b) show the top plate 530 and the interposition plate 540 is shown attached. Further, in FIG. 74(a), the front door 11005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4, and in FIG. Positioned states are illustrated respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 71 to 74, the upper portion of the front door 11005 in the eleventh embodiment includes a main body member 11510 arranged on the front side, a panel member 11520 housed in the main body member 11510, and a main body member 11520. A rotating member 11810 that is accommodated in 11510 and arranged in a rotatable state, a connecting member 11820 that is connected to the rotating member 11810, a top plate 530 that is arranged on the upper surface of the main body member 11510, and an intervening plate. 540 , a rear member 11550 fastened to the rear side of the main body member 11510 , and a lock member 560 and a lever member 570 disposed on the rear member 11550 .

The main body member 11510 is a member made of a light-transmitting material for constituting the electric decoration part on the front upper part of the pachinko machine 1, and the light emitting means such as LED provided inside emits light at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. Lighting up or blinking according to the change of the game state plays a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. Further, the body member 11510 has a transparent region R1 (see FIG. 74(a)) formed of a transparent material in a region corresponding to the panel member 11520 to be described later on the front side. model information, etc., displayed in the .

Further, on the back side of the panel member 11520, an abnormality display member 11518 made of a transparent material is arranged at a position spaced apart from the panel member 11520 by a small distance. An LED board 11519 on which an LED capable of emitting light is mounted is arranged on the rear side of the abnormality display member 11518 . As a result, the light emitted from the LED board 11519 enters the panel member 11520 via the abnormality display member 11518, then exits from the panel member 11520 and is emitted (emitted) to the transparent region R1.

The abnormality display device 11518 is a member that displays an abnormality on the front side when there is an abnormality in the closing operation of the front door 11005 with respect to the inner frame 4, which will be described later. A shape such as a figure is formed. Therefore, when the panel member 11520 is not arranged in front (on the front side) of the abnormality display device 11518, the light emitted from the LED board 11520 through the transparent region of the abnormality display device 11518 is blocked from closing the front door 11005. It can be visually recognized by the operator who has operated. As a result, the operator can recognize characters and figures formed in the transparent area of the abnormality display device 11518, and can grasp that the pachinko machine 1 has an abnormality.

In this embodiment, the side surface of the panel member 11520 on the back side (the side of the error display device 11518) is processed to have a plurality of unevenness. This makes it easier to diffuse the light partially entering the panel member 11520 through the transparent region of the abnormality display device 11518 . Therefore, light can be easily emitted from the entire front side of the panel member 11520 .

Further, the body member 11510 comprises an opaque region R2 (see FIG. 74(a)) formed from an opaque material below the transparent region R1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the players from viewing the constituent materials such as the light-emitting member and the speaker disposed inside the main body member 11510 . That is, since the opaque region R2 can be used to dispose the constituent materials such as the light emitting member and the speaker, it is possible to easily dispose the panel member 11520 by securing the space on the back side of the transparent region R1. It is possible to secure a space for arranging constituent materials such as a light-emitting member and a speaker arranged in the main body member 11510 .

In addition, the front side of the main body 11510 (the side on which the transparent region R1 and the opaque region R2 are formed) is formed into a curved surface that curves downward toward the rear side in a side view (see FIG. 74(a)). . As a result, when the main body 11510 is viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the visible area in the vertical direction of the transparent area R1 (the vertical direction in FIG. The visible region of the direction can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the area where the inner space of the main body 11510 can be visually recognized from the player side (front side) through the transparent area R1. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the panel member 11520 through the transparent region R1.

Further, the front side of the main body portion 11510 is formed in a curved shape projecting from the left and right ends to the center portion toward the front side when viewed from above (see FIG. 73). Further, as will be described later, the panel member 11520 is curved along the internal space of the main body portion 11510, so that a region where the panel member 11520 can be visually recognized from the outside of the main body portion 11510 in the horizontal direction through the transparent region R1 is formed. You can make it bigger.

A housing portion 511 for disposing the top plate 530 and the interposition plate 540 is recessed in the upper surface of the main body member 11510 . The accommodating portion 511 is recessed downward from the bottom surface with slide grooves 511a formed in the mutually opposing left and right inner wall surfaces (left and right in FIG. 73) of the inner peripheral edge (inner wall surface) of the accommodating portion 511. A recessed portion 511c and an escape portion 511d, a holding portion 511e formed on the front side of the escaped portion 511d, and a holding portion 511e formed in the front side of the escape portion 511d. ) and second receiving grooves 11514 recessed on both sides of the receiving groove 11513 .

The housing groove 11513 is a space for housing a rotating member 11810, which will be described later, and is sized to allow the rotating member 11810 to rotate. A pair of accommodation grooves 11513 are formed at positions spaced apart from the opposing left and right inner wall surfaces of the inner peripheral edge of the accommodation portion 511 , and a pair of rotating members 11810 , which will be described later, are arranged in each of the accommodation grooves 11513 .

The second housing groove 11514 is a space for housing the connecting member 11820 that is connected to the rotating member 11810, and is located on the side where the connecting member 11820 is arranged (in this embodiment, the inner side in the facing direction of the pair of rotating members 11810). It is formed continuously on the side surface of the accommodation groove 11513 . Thereby, a connecting member 11820 to be described later can be arranged inside the main body member 11510 .

Further, in the housing groove 11513 and the second housing groove 11514, a groove 11513a is recessed downward from the bottom surface of the housing portion 511 and the bottom surface of the second housing groove 11514. As shown in FIG. The concave groove 11513a is a space in which the shaft portion 11811 of the rotating member 11810 is arranged, and the separation distance (groove width) between the opposing side surfaces is set slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 11811 . Thereby, the shaft portion 11811 can be disposed inside the concave groove 11513a to hold the rotating member 11810 in a rotatable state.

In this embodiment, when the shaft portion 11811 is arranged in the groove 11513a, a space is formed above the shaft portion 11811, but the shaft portion 11811 does not come out of the groove 11513a. A member that closes the space above the shaft portion 11811 may be provided in the groove 11513a so as not to move.

The rotating member 11810 is made of a resin material and formed of a plate-like body that bends in a substantially L shape when viewed from the side. Further, the rotating member 11810 has a through hole penetrating in the plate pressure direction at a bent portion in a side view, and a columnar shaft portion 11811 made of a metal material is fitted in the through hole.

The rotating member 11810 has a circular recessed portion 11812 to be fastened on the outer peripheral surface of one end thereof. The to-be-fastened portion 11812 is a female screw for fastening and fixing a panel member 11520 to be described later. Can be fastened and fixed.

One of the rotating members 11810 formed in a pair (the side on which the connecting member 11820 is arranged) is formed with an elongated hole-shaped sliding groove 11813 through which the insertion portion 11821 of the connecting member 11820 described later is inserted. be done. Accordingly, when the connecting member 11820 is displaced, the displacement of the connecting member 11820 is transmitted to the rotating member 11810 via the sliding groove 11813, and the rotating member 11810 is rotated about the shaft portion 11811 as an axis.

The slide groove 11813 is formed in one of the pair of rotating members 11810, but may be formed in both of the pair of rotating members 11810. FIG. In this case, the parts of the rotating member 11810 can be shared, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, if the sliding groove 11813 is damaged after being introduced into the store, by reversing the arrangement of the pair of rotating members 11810, a new sliding groove 11813 can be used, which reduces the cost of parts replacement. can be reduced.

The connecting member 11820 is made of a resin material and has a rectangular plate shape when viewed from the side. In addition, the connecting member 11820 is formed to extend from one end of the body member 11510 to the other end of the back member 11550, and is fitted in a through-hole extending through the one end in the plate thickness direction. It has an insertion portion 11821 and a bulging portion 11822 that bulges out on both sides in the plate thickness direction on the other end side.

The bulging portion 11822 has the other contact surface 11822b on the side of the body member 11510 (the other end of the connecting member 11820) and the one contact surface 11822a on the side of the back member 11550 (one end of the connecting member 11820). and

The one-side contact surface 11822a is a surface against which the lock member 560 abuts when the front door 11005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 with the lock member 560 arranged at the second position. The width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 73) dimension is set to be substantially the same as the width direction dimension of the member 560 (rotational axis direction of the lock member 560). As a result, the contact area when the lock member 560 comes into contact with the one-side contact surface 11822a can be maximized, so that the impact when the lock member 560 comes into contact with the connecting member 11820 can be dispersed. It is possible to suppress damage to the one-side contact surface 11822a (connecting member 11820).

Further, below the one-side contact surface 11822a, a restriction portion 11822c is recessed toward the other-side contact surface 11822b. The restricting portion 11822c is a member that restricts the displacement of the connecting member 11820 toward the back surface member 11550 (back surface side), and is formed at a position facing a contact portion 11558a described later. Displacement of the connecting member 11820 to the rear side is restricted.

The other-side contact surface 11822b is a surface against which a coil spring SP6, which will be described later, is brought into contact and the biasing force of the coil spring SP6 is applied. As a result, the connecting member 11820 is biased by the biasing force of the coil spring SP6, and the restricting portion 11822c is biased toward the contact portion 11558a.

The coil spring SP6 is a spring member that is spirally turned a plurality of times, and its axial direction (turning direction) is set in the pull-out direction of the lock member 560 (horizontal direction in FIG. 74(a)). In addition, the coil spring SP6 is arranged in a slightly compressed state between the covering member 11830 fastened and fixed to the back member 11550 and the opposing contact surface 11822b on the other side. Therefore, the biasing force of the coil spring SP6 can always bias the other side contact surface 11822b (connecting member 11820) toward the back side with respect to the back member 11550. FIG.

The covering member 11830 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper side and the back member 11550 open, and standing walls 11831 standing outward are provided at the ends of the two opposing sides on the side of the back member 11550 . It is formed. A plurality of circular through-holes are formed in the standing wall 11831, and screws are fastened to the rear member 11550 through the through-holes, thereby fastening the covering member 11830 to the rear member 11550. Fixed.

The rear surface member 11550 is provided with an insertion hole 551 at a position corresponding to the insertion cylindrical portion 541 of the interposition plate 540, and a second insertion hole 11558 below the insertion hole 551 and an intermediate plate 11559, which will be described later. is perforated.

The second insertion hole 11558 is a hole in which the bulging portion 11822 of the connecting member 11820 is arranged, and is formed to have an inner edge shape slightly larger than the outer dimensions (width and height) of the bulging portion 11822. be. In addition, the second insertion hole 11558 has a contact portion 11558a protruding upward from the lower surface of the end portion of the back member 11550 on the back side (inner frame 4 side).

The abutting portion 11558a is a portion to which the regulating portion 11822c of the connecting member 11820 abuts as described above, and the projecting dimension thereof is the width of the recess in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 74(a)) of the regulating portion 11822c. is set smaller than Thereby, the restricting portion 11822c can be brought into contact with the contact portion 11558a.

In addition, the dimension of the contact portion 11558a in the thickness direction (the direction from the front surface to the back surface (horizontal direction in FIG. 74(a))) is the same as the recessed dimension of the restricting portion 11822c (the dimension in the lateral direction in FIG. 74(a)). They are set to be approximately the same. As a result, in a state where the connecting member 11820 is biased by the coil spring SP6 and the restricting portion 11822c is in contact with the contact portion 11558a, the one side contact surface 11822a is the back surface of the back member 11550 on the inner frame 4 side (Fig. 74(a) right side). Thereby, when the lock member 560 is in the second position, the base member 562 of the lock member 560 can be brought into contact with the one-side contact surface 11822a.

Further, the contact portion 11558a has a separation distance from the projecting tip to the upper end surface of the insertion hole 551 larger than the dimension in the extension direction of the tip member 561 of the lock member 560 (horizontal direction in FIG. 74(a)). position. As a result, when the lock member 560 is in the second position, the one-side contact surface 11822a can be the only portion that the tip member 561 of the lock member 560 contacts. That is, it is possible to prevent the tip member 561 from contacting the contact portion 11558a.

The intermediate plate 11559 has an upper surface formed from a portion of the inner surface of the insertion hole 551 and a lower surface formed from a portion of the second insertion hole 11558 . In addition, the intermediate plate 11559 is formed continuously from the side surface (front surface) on the front side (body member 11510 side) of the back member 11550, and from the side surface (back surface) on the back side (inner frame 4 side) of the back member 11550. , are spaced apart by a distance larger than the width of the tip member 561 of the locking member 560 in the thickness direction (vertical direction in FIG. 74(a)).

As described above, when the lock member 560 is at the second position, the contact of the tip member 561 with the contact portion 11558a is suppressed. The member 561 can be inserted inside the insertion hole 551 and the second insertion hole 11558 . Therefore, when the front door 11005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 when the lock member 560 is in the second position, the rear side (inner frame 4 side) of the tip member 561 contacts the inner frame 4 and the front side is closed. (Body member 11510 side), and the tip member 561 is inserted inside the insertion hole 551 and the second insertion hole 11558 .

The panel member 11520 is formed of a resin material in a curved shape along the inner space of the recessed portion 511c of the main body member 11510, and the curved axis is at substantially the same position as the axis of the shaft portion 11811 when viewed in the axial direction of the shaft portion 11811. set. As a result, when rotating member 11810 is rotated to displace panel member 11520, the area of the displacement trajectory of panel member 11520 can be minimized. As a result, the internal space of the recess 511c can be easily used as a space for arranging other members.

In addition, the panel member 11520 has fastening portions 11521 projecting in the left-right direction below both end portions in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 73), and is inserted through the through holes formed in the fastening portions 11521. The screw is screwed into the fastened portion 11812 of the rotating member 11810 to fasten to the rotating member 11810 .

Next, a procedure for exchanging the panel member 11520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIG. 75(a) and 75(b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the main part 11003 of the gaming machine. 74(a) to 75(a), FIG. 74(a), FIG. 74(b), and FIG. 75(a) are illustrated in order when the panel member 11520 is replaced. FIG. 75(b) shows a state in which the front door 11005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 without the locking member 560 being returned to the first position (remaining in the second position). Further, FIGS. 75(a) and 75(b) correspond to FIG. 74(a).

As shown in FIG. 74(a), when the lock member 560 is pushed into the first position, the lock member 560 is inserted through the insertion tube portion 541 of the interposed plate 540 in the same manner as in the first embodiment. The proximal end of the locking member 560 (base member 562) protruding from one end side of the tubular insertion portion 541 is held inside the holding portion 511e of the main body member 11510, and the locking member 560 protruding from the other end side of the tubular insertion portion 541. The tip of (the tip member 561 ) is held in the insertion hole 551 of the back member 11550 . Therefore, the intervening plate 540 cannot be removed from the housing portion 511 of the main body member 11510 .

As shown in FIG. 74(b), the locking member 560 is pulled out from the state shown in FIG. Further withdrawal of locking member 560 is disabled upon reaching the second mated position.

By this pull-out operation, the lock member 560 (base member 562) is pulled out from the insertion tube portion 541 of the interposition plate 540, and the end surface of the proximal end of the lock member 560 (base member 562) retreats to a position exceeding the lever member 570. be done. That is, a space is formed above the lever member 570 . As a result, the lever member 570 is rotated by the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP1, and the tip side thereof is flipped upward. In this case, since the contacted portion 543 of the interposing plate 540 is in contact with the upper surface of the tip side of the lever member 570, the contacted portion 543 is pushed upward by the lever member 570, thereby One longitudinal end side of the installation plate 540 (the side on which the lever member 570 is arranged) is lifted upward. Accordingly, the operator who replaces the panel member 11520 can remove the interposed plate 540 by holding one longitudinal end of the interposed plate 540 (the left side in the left-right direction in FIG. 73).

As shown in FIG. 75(a), the intervening plate 540 is removed from the main body member 11510 from the state shown in FIG. Since the space is formed, the top plate 530 can be slid backward (retracted) using the space. As a result, the front of the top plate 530 is opened and the panel member 11520 can be replaced. The replacement of the panel member 11520 is performed by inserting a screwdriver or the like from the open space in front of the top plate 530 and removing the screw fastening the panel member 11520 and the rotating member 11810 . On the other hand, after replacing the panel member 11520, the panel member 11520 can be returned to the state shown in FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 75(b), after the operator replaces the panel member 11520, the operator forgets to return the lock member 560 from the second position to the first position. A description will be given of the case where the

As shown in FIG. 75(b), when the worker pushes the interposition plate 540 downward to close the front door 11005 with respect to the inner frame 4 with the lock member 560 arranged at the second position, , the tip member 561 of the locking member 560 is pushed forward by the front surface (front surface) of the inner frame 4 . That is, the tip member 561 of the lock member 560 is inserted inside the insertion hole 551 and the second insertion hole 11558 of the back member 11550 .

As described above, when the lock member 560 is arranged at the second position, the tip member 561 of the lock member 560 is brought into contact with the one side contact surface 11822a of the connecting member 11820 . Therefore, when the lock member 560 is pushed forward by the inner frame 4 , the coupling member 11820 is slid forward by the displacement of the lock member 560 .

Further, when the connecting member 11820 is slid forward, the insertion portion 11821 of the connecting member 11820 pushes the inner surface of the sliding groove 11813 forward. Thereby, the rotating member 11810 can be rotated around the shaft portion 11811 . As a result, the portion to be fastened 11812 of the rotating member 11810 can be displaced downward. As a result, the panel member 11520 fastened to the fastened portion 11812 is displaced downward.

Here, as described above, the abnormality display member 11518 is arranged on the rear side (rear) of the transparent region R1. Therefore, by displacing the panel member 11520 downward (toward the rear side of the opaque region R2), the display of the abnormality display member 11518 can be visually recognized from the front side. This makes it easier for the operator who replaces the panel member 11520 to recognize that there is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (forgetting to return the lock member 560). The display contents of the abnormality display member 11518 include, for example, character display such as "abnormal" or "please call a staff member (operator)", or graphic display such as "x".

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, on the front side of the main body member 11510, a region (transparent region R1) corresponding to the panel member 11520 before movement is formed of a transparent material, and is after movement. A region corresponding to the panel member 11520 (opaque region R2) is formed from an opaque material. Therefore, when the panel member 11520 is in a moved state, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the panel member 11520 through the body member 11510 . As a result, the operator can be made aware that the lock member 560 has been forgotten to be returned.

Furthermore, as described above, the inner frame 4 and the front door 11005 are connected by the hinge 18, and the front door 11005 is opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 4 with the hinge 18 as the rotation axis. Therefore, the operator who opens and closes the front door 11005 with respect to the inner frame 4 is often positioned on the side opposite to the hinge 18 side. As described above, the front side of the main body portion 11510 is formed in a curved shape projecting from the left and right ends to the center portion toward the front side when viewed from above, so that the panel member 11520 can be visually recognized through the transparent region R1. is magnified. Therefore, the operator who closes the front door 11005 with respect to the inner frame 4 can easily see the panel member 11520 . Therefore, the operator who closes the front door 11005 with respect to the inner frame 4 can easily recognize the movement of the panel b diagram 11520 visually. As a result, the operator can be made aware that the lock member 560 has been forgotten to be returned.

Here, in the eighth to tenth embodiments described above, when the operator forgets to return the lock members 8560, 9560, 10560 and closes the front door 11005 with respect to the inner frame 4, members other than the panel member 520 is displaced to make the operator aware that the lock members 8560, 9560, and 10560 have forgotten to be returned.

However, in the eighth to tenth embodiments described above, it is necessary for the operator to recognize that the lock members 8560, 9560, and 10560 have not been returned. , the handle 51). Therefore, when the operator does not notice the displacement of the displaced member, the player is put in a state where it is difficult for the player to play, or a state where the player cannot actually play the game although it looks playable at first glance. Therefore, there is a risk that the interest of the player will be greatly spoiled.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the player plays the pachinko machine 1, the panel member 11520, which is not directly involved in the game, is displaced. In addition, even if the operator does not notice the displacement of the panel member 11520 when the front door 11005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4, the player's game is prevented from being hindered (the game becomes difficult to play). can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the panel member 11520 to be replaced by the operator is displaced. Therefore, when the operator normally checks whether the replacement object (panel member 11520) is arranged in an appropriate state and position after the replacement work, the pachinko machine 1 becomes abnormal due to the displacement of the replacement object. This makes it easier for the operator to recognize that there is (forgetting to return the lock member 560).

Furthermore, since the replacement target (panel member 11520) is arranged on the back side of the opaque region of the main body member 11510 after the movement, when the worker confirms the replacement target panel member 11520 after replacement, the operator cannot confirm the panel member. 11520 can be made difficult to see. Therefore, it is not necessary for the operator to judge the abnormality after the replacement of the panel member 11520 by its arrangement position, and the operator can easily recognize that the replacement target is not in an appropriate position. As a result, the operator can easily recognize that there is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (the locking member 560 has been forgotten to be returned).

Further, as described above, the coil spring SP6 is arranged so as to be able to expand and contract in the moving direction of the lock member 560 . Therefore, when the tip member 561 of the lock member 560 is displaced forward by the inner frame 4, the lock member 560 can be braked by the biasing force of the coil spring SP6. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lock member 560 from changing at a high speed, and to suppress the breakage of the lock member 560 .

When the operator closes the front door 11005 to the inner frame 4 without attaching the interposition plate 540 (forgetting to put it back) and without pushing the interposition plate 540 downward, the lock member 560 The sliding displacement of the lock member 560 is restricted by the contact of the tip of the base member 562 with the side surface of the lever member 570 . As a result, the front end member 561 of the lock member 560 is interposed between the front surface of the inner frame 4 and the back surface of the front door 11005 , thereby restricting the closing of the front door 11005 with respect to the inner frame 4 . As a result, it is possible to make the operator aware that the interposing plate 540 has been forgotten to be returned.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77, the case of returning the lock member 560 from the state shown in FIG. 75(b) to the first position will be described. FIG. 76(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the main part 11003 of the gaming machine along line LXXVIa-LXXVIa of FIG. 75(a). FIG. 76(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the main part 11003 of the game machine along line LXXVIb-LXXVIb of FIG. 75(b). 77(a) and 77(b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the main part 11003 of the gaming machine.

76(a) and 76(b), illustrations other than the lock member 560, the inner frame 4 and the back member 11550 are omitted. 77(a) shows a state in which the front door 11005 is opened with respect to the inner frame 4 from the state shown in FIG. 75(b), and FIG. 77(b) shows the state shown in FIG. , respectively, the state in which the front door 11005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 is illustrated.

First, the base member 562 of the lock member 560 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the base member 562 of the eleventh embodiment, protruding portions 11562c having U-shaped openings are formed on both side surfaces in the axial direction of the shaft portion 562b.

The projecting portion 11562c is formed so that the shaft portion 562b side is connected to the outer surface, and extends toward the base end side (front side (left side in FIG. 76(a))) of the base member 561 . Further, the projecting portion 11562c is formed with an engaging portion 11562c1 that bulges outward in a semicircular shape in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 76(a)) of the shaft portion 562b of the projecting portion 11562c.

The maximum separation distance L4 (see FIG. 76(b)) between the engaging portions 11562c1 of the pair of projecting portions 11562c is longer than the dimension L5 (see FIG. 76(b)) between the insertion holes 551 facing each other in the horizontal direction. It is set large (L4>L5). In addition, the separation distance L6 (see FIG. 76(b)) from the proximal end of the engaging portion 11562c1 of the locking member 560 (see FIG. 76(b)) to the back surface of the lock member 560 (see FIG. 76(b)) at the second position is the thickness of the back member 11550. It is set to be substantially the same as the dimension L7 (see FIG. 76(b)) (L6=L7).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 76A, when the panel member 11520 is replaced (the lock member 11561 is pulled out to the rear side), the engagement portion 11562c1 of the lock member 560 is inserted into the insertion hole 551 of the rear member 11550. inserted inside the In this case, the protruding portion 11562c has a U-shaped opening at its periphery, so that it is allowed to bend in the axial direction of the pivot hole 561a. Therefore, the engaging portion 11562c1, which is set to the separation distance L4 that is larger than the dimension L5 between the opposing portions, is arranged inside the insertion hole 551 in a bent state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76(b), when the lock member 560 is forgotten to be returned to the first position and the front door 11005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4, it is locked to the front surface of the inner frame 4 as described above. Base member 562 of member 560 is extruded. As a result, the engaging portion 11562 c 1 protrudes forward of the back member 11550 from the insertion hole 551 . Therefore, when the lock member 560 is displaced rearward, the engaging portion 11562c1 can be brought into contact with the front end portion of the insertion hole 551, thereby making it difficult for the lock member 560 to be slid rearward.

Also, when the operator pulls out the lock member 560 rearward from the first position, the engagement portion 11562c1 can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the insertion hole 551 at the end position of the displacement of the lock member 560 . Therefore, the displacement of the lock member 560 can be braked by increasing the sliding resistance at the end position of the displacement of the lock member 560 . As a result, when the operator vigorously pulls out the lock member 560, the stopping speed can be slowed down, so that the lock member 560 can be prevented from being damaged. Further, by increasing the resistance of the lock member 560, it is possible to make it easier for the operator to recognize the end position of the displacement. As a result, the operator can reduce the displacement speed at the end position of the displacement, thereby suppressing damage to the lock member 560 .

Next, description will be made with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 77(a), when the front door 11005 is opened from the state in which the front door 11005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 for the first time with the lock member 560 arranged at the second position, the connecting member 11820 is displaced to the rear side by the biasing force of the coil spring SP6. As a result, the base member 562 of the lock member 560 is pushed out to the one-side contact surface 11822a of the connecting member 11820 toward the rear side. As a result, the base member 562 is rotated about the shaft portion 562b, and the end opposite to the shaft portion 562b is flipped upward.

Here, since lock member 560 is slidably displaceable, there is a possibility that the entire lock member 560 will be pushed out to the rear side by the sliding displacement of connecting member 11820 . On the other hand, as described above, when the tip member 561 of the lock member 560 is arranged inside the insertion hole 551, the engaging portion 11562c1 is positioned in front of the insertion hole 551 (extended from the insertion hole 551). ) state, the base member 562 of the lock member 560 is less likely to be slid to the rear side, and only the distal end member 561 can be easily displaced. As a result, the connecting member 11820 can rotationally displace only the distal end member 561 by pushing out the distal end member 561 . In this case, the rotation angle of the distal end member 561 is preferably 45 degrees or more, and is set to about 70 degrees in this embodiment. As a result, the locking member 560 can be easily arranged at the first position by the closing operation of the inner frame 4, which will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), when the front door 11005 is closed again from the state where the front door 11005 is opened with respect to the inner frame 4, the connecting member 11820 is The front surface of the inner frame 4 is brought into contact with the end surface on the opposite side (rear side) of the shaft portion 562b of the tip member 561 rotated by the one-side contact surface 11822a. As a result, the distal end member 561 and the base member 562 (locking member 560) are slid forward. As a result, locking member 560 is placed in the first position.

That is, in the eleventh embodiment, if the operator forgets to place the lock member 560 at the first position after replacing the panel member 11520, the operator is forced to open the front door 11005 again with respect to the inner frame 4. The locking member 560 can then be placed in the first position and the panel member 11520 placed behind the opaque region R2 of the body member can be placed behind the transparent region R1 by closing afterward.

Therefore, for example, when the operator notices an abnormality after closing the front door 11005 with respect to the inner frame 4 for the first time after replacing the panel member 11520 and opens the front door 11005 again, even if the cause of the abnormality is unknown, Also, by closing the front door 11005 with respect to the inner frame 4 again, the lock member 560 and the panel member 11520 can be placed in their normal positions.

Furthermore, since the lock member 560 and the panel member 11520 can be arranged in the normal position without the operator operating the lock member 560, the work process of the operator when he/she forgets to return the lock member 560 can be reduced. can be done.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 and 79. FIG. In the eleventh embodiment, the panel member 11520 as a whole is made of a single resin material, but in the twelfth embodiment, the panel member 12520 is made up of a plurality of split plates. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

78(a) and 78(b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the gaming machine main section 12003 in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 79 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the main part 12003 of the game machine along line LXXIX-LXXIX in FIG. 78(b). 78(a) corresponds to FIG. 74(a), and FIG. 78(b) corresponds to FIG. 75(b).

As shown in FIG. 78(a), the panel member 12520 in the twelfth embodiment is formed of a plurality of divided plate members, and the respective plate members are displaced in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, the panel member 12520 is formed of four plate members, each of which is a first split plate 12520a, a second split plate 12520b, a second split plate 12520c, and a fourth split plate 12520d. A sign is given.

Further, the rotating member 12810 in the twelfth embodiment is made of a resin material and is made of a plate-like body that bends in a substantially L shape when viewed from the side. Also, the rotating member 12810 has a shaft portion 11811 at its bent portion. The connecting member 12820 connected to the rotating member 12810 is the connecting member 11820 in the eleventh embodiment (the connecting member 12820 in the twelfth embodiment) and the rotating member 11810 (the rotating member 12810 in the twelfth embodiment). The only difference is the connection position of the , and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The rotating member 12810 has a circular recessed portion 11812 to be fastened on the outer peripheral surface of one end. In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, the panel member 12520 is connected to the bottom surface of the rotating member 12810 on the tip side. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, the part to be fastened 11812 is formed on the bottom surface of the rotating member 12810 on the tip side.

The first dividing plate 12520a to the fourth dividing plate 12520d are formed in a curved shape centering on the rotating shaft (shaft portion 11811) of the rotating member 12810, and are displaced in the front-rear direction. Also, when the first dividing plate 12520a to the fourth dividing plate 12520d are displaced in the vertical direction (in the state of FIG. 78(a)), the decorations on the front surfaces of the respective plates can be seen in a row. decorations (patterns and characters) are displayed. In the twelfth embodiment, when the panel member 12520 displays 1 decoration (the first division plate 12520a to the fourth division plate 12520d are displaced in the vertical direction), the fourth division plate 12520d is arranged on the rear side of the opaque region R2 of the body member 11510, and the third dividing plate 12520c is arranged on the rear side of the transparent region R1.

Further, each of the first divided plate 12520a to the fourth divided plate 12520d is configured to be rotatable around the rotation shaft (shaft portion 11811). The manner of displacement from the first split plate 12520a to the fourth split plate 12520d will be described later.

A lower wall portion 12522 protrudes rearward from the lower end surface of each of the first division plate 12520a to the third division plate 12520c. Further, upper wall portions 12523 protrude from the upper end surfaces of the second to fourth division plates 12520b to 12520d.

The lower wall portion 12522 and the upper wall portion 12523 are portions that regulate the amount of displacement in the circumferential direction from the first dividing plate 12520a to the fourth dividing plate 12520d. The upper wall portion 12523 of the plate 12520b abuts to restrict the displacement of the second split plate 12520b. Displacement of the third divided plate 12520c is restricted, and the upper wall portion 12523 of the fourth divided plate 12520d comes into contact with the lower wall portion 12522 of the third divided plate 12520c, thereby restricting the displacement of the fourth divided plate 12520d.

Further, as shown in FIG. 79, a locking portion 12524 having a substantially L-shaped cross section protrudes from the rear surface of the first dividing plate 12520a to the third dividing plate 12520c. The locking portion 12524 is formed of a first locking portion 12524a projecting rearward and a second locking portion 12524b bending from the first split plate 12520a toward the center in the extending direction of the third split plate 12520c. be.

The first locking portion 12524a is a divided plate (one of the second divided plate 12520b to the fourth divided plate 12520d) arranged behind one divided plate (the first divided plate 12520a to the third divided plate 12520c). is formed outside in the extending direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 79). In addition, the projecting tip of the first locking portion 12524a is positioned rearward (lower in FIG. 79) than the rearwardly disposed split plate. As a result, it is possible to prevent the split plate arranged behind the one split plate from being displaced in its extending direction.

The second locking portion 12524b is formed by bending from the protruding distal end portion of the first locking portion 12524a toward the central side in the extending direction of each divided plate (first divided plate 12520a to third divided plate 12520c). As a result, it is possible to prevent the division plate arranged behind the one division plate from being displaced toward the rear side with respect to the one division plate.

According to the panel member 12520 of the twelfth embodiment configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 78(b), after the operator replaces the panel member 12520, the lock member 560 is moved from the second position to the first position. If you forget to put them back in place, the split plates can be stacked in the front-rear direction.

More specifically, similarly to the eleventh embodiment, when the lock member 560 arranged at the second position is pushed forward by the rear member 11560, the connecting member 12820 is slid forward, and the rotary member 12510 is moved. It is rotated around the shaft portion 11511 . As a result, the distal end side (fastened portion 11812 side) of the rotating member 12810 is displaced downward, and the panel member 12520 fastened to the distal end side of the rotating member 12510 is displaced downward.

When the panel member 12520 is displaced downward, the fourth dividing plate 12520d of the panel member 12520 comes into contact with the contact surface 12511c1 of the bottom surface of the concave portion 511c, thereby restricting further displacement of the fourth dividing plate 12520d. be done. Therefore, when the rotary member 12510 continues to rotate, the other split plates (from the first split plate 12520a to the third split plate 12520c) are displaced with respect to the fourth split plate 12520d. The third split plate 12520c is arranged in front of the fourth split plate 12520d and contacts the contact surface 12511c. In this way, each of the divided plates can be arranged in a state of being overlapped in the front-rear direction by being brought into contact with the contact surface 12511c in order from the lower divided plates.

The panel members 12520 stacked in the longitudinal direction are arranged behind the opaque region R2 of the body member 11510 . This makes it difficult for the worker to visually recognize the panel member 12520 when the worker checks the panel member 12520 to be replaced after the replacement. Therefore, it is not necessary for the operator to judge the abnormality after the replacement of the panel member 12520 by its arrangement position, and the operator can easily recognize that the replacement target is not in an appropriate position. As a result, the operator can easily recognize that there is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (the locking member 560 has been forgotten to be returned).

Also, the panel member 12520 to be replaced by the operator is displaced. Therefore, when the operator normally checks whether the replacement object (panel member 12520) is arranged in an appropriate state and position after the replacement work, the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions due to the displacement of the replacement object. This makes it easier for the operator to recognize that there is (forgetting to return the lock member 560).

Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment, since the panel members 12520 are arranged inside the main body member 11510 in a state of being superimposed in the front-rear direction, a space for displacing the panel members 12520 is provided in the main body member as in the eleventh embodiment. 11510 does not need to be provided inside. As a result, the internal space of the main body member 11510 can be used as a space for arranging other members (for example, a light emitting device such as an LED), and the internal space of the main body member 11510 can be efficiently used.

In addition, since the panel members 12520 can be stacked in the front-rear direction, the volume required for packaging can be reduced when only the panel members 12520 are sold. Therefore, the panel member 12520 can be easily packed. As a result, packaging costs can be reduced.

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 84. FIG. In the first embodiment described above, when the lock member 560 is placed in the second position (the position removed from the insertion tube portion 541), the closing of the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 is restricted. In the thirteenth embodiment, the panel member 13520 is displaced when the front door 13005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 with the lock member 13560 arranged at the second position. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the upper portion of the front door 13005 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. FIG. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the upper portion of the front door 13005 in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 81 is a top view of the main part 13003 of the gaming machine. 82(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the gaming machine main section 13003 along line LXXXIIa-LXXXIIa in FIG. 81, and FIG. 82(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of gaming machine main section 13003 along line LXXXIIb-LXXXIIb in FIG. 82(a). FIG. 82(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the main part 13003 of the game machine taken along line LXXXIIc-LXXXIIc in FIG. 82(b).

81 shows a state in which the top plate 13530 and the intervening plate 540 are removed (seeing transparently), and FIG. 82(a) shows a state in which the top plate 13530 and the intervening plate 540 are attached. illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 80 to 82, the upper portion of the front door 13005 in the thirteenth embodiment includes a main body member 13510 arranged on the front side, a panel member 13520 housed in the main body member 13510, and a main body member 13520. Rotating member 13810 housed in 13510 and arranged in a rotatable state, engaging member 13850 arranged adjacent to rotating member 13810, and top plate arranged on upper surface of body member 13510 530 , an intervening plate 13540 , a rear member 11550 fixed to the rear side of the main body member 13510 , and a lock member 13560 and a lever member 570 arranged on the rear member 11550 .

The main body member 13510 is a member made of a light-transmitting material for constituting the electric decoration part in the upper front part of the pachinko machine 1, and a light emitting means such as an LED provided inside emits light at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach. Lighting up or blinking according to the change of the game state plays a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. In addition, on the front side of the main body member 13510, a region corresponding to the panel member 13520 is formed from a transparent material, and model information and the like displayed on the panel member 13520 can be visually recognized through the transparent material portion.

A housing portion 511 for disposing the top plate 530 and the interposition plate 540 is recessed in the upper surface of the main body member 13510 . The accommodation portion 511 includes slide grooves 511a formed on the left and right inner wall surfaces facing each other of the inner peripheral edge (inner wall surface) of the accommodation portion 511, recesses 511c recessed downward from the bottom surface, and relief portions. 511d, a holding portion 511e formed on the front side of the relief portion 511d, and a holding portion 511e that is recessed downward from the bottom surface, one end of which is connected to the recessed portion 511c and the other end of which is open to the back side (back member 11550 side). and second accommodation grooves 13514 recessed on both side surfaces of the accommodation groove 13513 .

The housing groove 13513 is a space for housing a rotating member 13810, which will be described later, and is formed in a size that allows the rotating member 13810 to rotate. A pair of accommodation grooves 13513 are formed at positions spaced apart from the opposing left and right inner wall surfaces of the inner peripheral edge of the accommodation portion 511 , and a pair of rotating members 13810 to be described later are arranged in each of the accommodation grooves 13513 .

The second housing groove 13514 is a space for housing the engaging member 13850 arranged next to the rotating member 13810, and is located on the side where the engaging member 13850 is arranged (in this embodiment, the pair of rotating members 13810 facing each other). It is formed continuously with the side surface of the housing groove 13513 on the direction outside). As a result, an engaging member 13850, which will be described later, can be displaced and brought into contact with the rotating member 13810. As shown in FIG.

Further, in the accommodation groove 13513 and the second accommodation groove 13514 , a concave groove 11513 a is provided downward from the bottom surface of the accommodation portion 511 . The concave groove 11513a is a space in which the shaft portion 11811 of the rotating member 13810 is arranged, and the separation distance (groove width) between the opposing side surfaces is set slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 11811 . Thereby, the shaft portion 11811 can be arranged inside the concave groove 11513a to hold the rotating member 13810 in a rotatable state.

The rotating member 13810 is made of a resin material and formed of a rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the side. The rotating member 13810 has a recessed portion 11812 to be fastened on the outer peripheral surface of one end in the longitudinal direction, and a contact portion 13814 that protrudes in a semicircular shape on the outer peripheral surface of the other end in the longitudinal direction. A concave portion 13815 is provided in the surface on which the engaging member 13850 is disposed, and a columnar shaft portion 11811 is fitted in a through hole penetrating in the plate thickness direction.

Further, a biasing means (such as a spring) is interposed between the rotating member 13810 and the main body member 13510 . As a result, a biasing force is applied to the rotating member 13810 to displace the other longitudinal end side (the fastened portion 11812 side) upward. Therefore, when no external force acts on the rotating member 13810 , the other end in the longitudinal direction is rotationally displaced upward about the shaft portion 11811 .

The concave portion 13815 is a portion into which a projection 13853 of an engaging member 13850 described later is inserted, and the insertion of the projection 13853 can restrict the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 13810 . A detailed description of the state of engagement between the recess 13815 and the projection 13853 will be given later.

The abutting portion 13814 is such that when the protrusion 13853 of the engaging member 13850 is extracted from the recess 13815, the engaging member 13850 intersects with the rotating member 13810 in top view (the position where the engaging member 13850 exceeds the rotating member 13810). 11811 of the rotating member 13810, and is formed in a fan shape coaxial with the axis of the shaft portion 11811 of the rotating member 13810. As shown in FIG.

The panel member 13520 is formed in a curved shape along the internal space of the recess 511c of the main body member 13510 . In addition, the bending axis of the panel member 13520 is set at substantially the same position as the axis of the shaft portion 11811 when viewed in the axial direction of the shaft portion 11811 . As a result, the region of the displacement trajectory of the panel member 13520 when the panel member 13520 is displaced by rotating the rotating member 13810 can be minimized. As a result, the internal space of the concave portion 511c can be easily used as a space for arranging other members.

In addition, the panel member 13520 includes fastening portions 11521 below both ends in the left-right direction, and bulging portions 13522 bulging in the front-rear direction at the upper end. In addition, the panel member 13520 has its upper end (bulged portion 13522 ) arranged between the top plate 13530 and the main body member 13510 .

The bulging portion 13522 is formed to bulge in the front-rear direction toward the upper end. As a result, when the bulging portion 13522 is pushed from the outside of the game machine main portion 13003, the bulging portion 13522 is brought into contact with the front end surface of the top plate 13530 or the end portion of the main body member 13510. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the panel member 13520 from being operated from outside the gaming machine main section 13003 .

Also, the end of main body member 13510 and the front end surface of top plate 13530 that come into contact with bulging portion 13522 are formed as inclined surfaces along the outline of bulging portion 13522 . This prevents the player from inserting an illegal object through the gap between the bulging portion 13522 and the main body member 13510 or the top plate 13530 .

The engaging member 13850 includes, when viewed from above, an annular portion 13851 formed in an annular shape, and an engaging portion 13852 projecting from the outer edge of the annular portion 13851 toward the concave portion 13815 (forward) of the rotating member 13810. and

The engaging portion 13852 is arranged such that its protruding tip side (the side opposite to the annular portion 13851 side) is adjacent to the rotating member 13810 in a top view, and the protruding tip 13853 protrudes from the protruding tip toward the rotating member 13810 side. is projected.

The annular portion 13851 includes a release member 13554 protruding radially outward from the outer peripheral surface thereof, an accommodating portion 13856 recessed downward from the upper surface of the annular portion 13851, and a rotatable state inside the accommodating portion 13856. and a second release member 13855 disposed at .

A cylindrical shaft member 13857 is fitted in the inner edge of the circular ring portion 13851 , and the shaft member 13857 is a cylindrical shape recessed in the recessed bottom surface of the second housing groove 11514 of the main body member 13510 . The engagement member 13850 is held in a rotatable state with respect to the body member 13510 by being inserted into a recess (not shown) in the body member 13510 . In addition, the engagement member 13850 and the main body member 13510 are interposed with biasing means (such as a spring), and the engagement portion 13852 of the engagement member 13850 is always biased toward the rotating member 13810 side. Accordingly, when the protrusion 13853 of the engaging portion 13852 and the recess 13815 of the rotating member 13810 face each other, the protrusion 13853 can be inserted inside the recess 13815 . As a result, the engagement member 13850 can restrict the rotation of the rotating member 13810 .

The releasing member 13554 is arranged in a displacement region of the projection 13533 when the top plate 13530 described later is slid and displaced in the front-rear direction. As a result, when the top plate 13530 is slid, the protrusion 13533 of the top plate 13530 is brought into contact with the engagement member 13850 to rotate.

Although detailed description will be given later, the projection 13533 is formed at a position where it abuts against the releasing member 13554 of the engaging member 13850 when the top plate 13530 is slid rearward. As a result, the releasing member 13554 and the engaging member 13850 can be brought into contact in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the top plate 13530 .

The accommodating portion 13856 is a space for accommodating a second releasing member 13855 described later when the second releasing member 13855 is rotationally displaced, and is recessed in the displacement direction of the second releasing member 13855 .

The second release member 13855 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape protruding upward in the axial direction of the annular portion 13851, and has a circular through hole 13855a formed at the lower end thereof. In addition, the second release member 13855 is arranged inside an engagement recess 13563a of the lock member 13560, which will be described later.

A screw is inserted through the through-hole 13855a while a collar (not shown) is arranged inside the through-hole 13855a. Therefore, the second releasing member 13855 is made rotatable with respect to the engaging member 13850 by screwing a screw inserted through the through hole 13855a into the receiving portion 13856 .

In addition, the second release member 13855 has a curved non-contact portion 13855b at the lower end on the front side. The non-contact portion 13855b is a portion that prevents contact between the inner surface of the accommodating portion 13856 and the second release member 13855 when the second release member 13855 is rotated. It is formed in a curved shape.

As a result, when the end of the second release member 13855 on the far side from the through hole 13855a (upper end in FIG. 82(c)) is displaced to the rear side (right side in FIG. 82(c)), the second release member 13855 and The second release member 13855 can be rotationally displaced while preventing contact with the inner surface of the housing portion 13856 . Therefore, the locking member 13560, which will be described later, is displaced to the rear side, and the inner surface of the engaging recess 13563a and the second releasing member 13855 are brought into contact with each other, so that the second releasing member 13855 can be rotated.

The non-contact portion 13855b is formed only on the front side of the second release member 13855. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when the lock member 13560 (to be described later) is displaced to the front side and the inner surface of the engagement recess 13563a and the second release member 13855 come into contact with each other, the outer surface of the second release member 13855 contacts the inner surface of the housing portion 13856. can be abutted. That is, when the lock member 13560 is displaced to the front side, the rotation of the second release member 13855 is restricted, and the displacement of the lock member 13560 is displaced through the second release member 13855 to the annular portion of the engagement member 13850. 13851.

A biasing means (such as a torsion spring) is provided between the second release member 13855 and the housing portion 13856, and thereby the end portion of the second release member 13855 on the far side from the through hole 13855a is displaced. is displaced upward so that the outer surface of the second release member 13855 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the housing portion 13856 . In addition, when the second release member 13855 is rotationally displaced by operating the lock member 13560, which will be described later, it can be returned to the position before displacement by the biasing force of the biasing means.

The locking member 13560 includes a tip member 561, a base member 562 connected to the base end side of the tip member 561, and a protruding portion 13563 protruding from the tip side of the base member 562 to the tip side (front side). Mainly provide

The protruding portion 13563 is arranged above the engaging member 13850 described above, and is located at substantially the same position as the second releasing member 13855 of the engaging member 13850 in the horizontal direction (a position vertically overlapping in FIG. 82(b)). ). Also, the projecting distance of the projecting portion 13563 to the distal end side is set to a length exceeding the second releasing member 13855 .

An engagement recess 13563 a is formed in the projecting portion 13563 at a position corresponding to the second release member 13855 . The width of the engaging recess 13563a in the direction in which the protruding portion 13563 protrudes (horizontal direction in FIG. 82(a)) is set longer than the width of the second releasing member 13855, and the second releasing member 13855 is accommodated.

A biasing member 13840 is arranged below the lock member 13560 . The biasing member 13840 is formed in a rectangular shape larger than the outer shape of the tip member 561 of the lock member 13560 arranged at the second position in a rear view, and is arranged in front of the tip member 561 . Further, a biasing spring SP6 in a compressed state is arranged in contact with the front surface of the biasing member 13840, and the biasing member 13840 is biased rearward (back side).

Further, the biasing member 13840 has a one-side abutted surface 13842 on its back surface, and a restricting portion 13841 recessed toward the body member 13510 side (forward) below the one-side abutted surface 13842 . . The restricting portion 13841 is a member that restricts the rearward movement of the biasing member 13840 by coming into contact with the contacting portion 11558a. It is formed at a position separated from the rear surface of 13840 by the plate thickness of the contact portion 11558a. As a result, the biasing member 13840 is flush with the rear surface of the back surface member 11550 when biased by the biasing spring SP6.

Next, procedures for exchanging the panel member 13520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. 83(a), 83(b), 84(a) and 84(b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the main part 11003 of the gaming machine. 83(a) and 84(a) correspond to FIG. 82(a), and FIGS. 83(b) and 84(b) correspond to FIG. 82(b). FIGS. 82 to 84 show, in the order of replacement of the panel member 13520, FIG. 82(a), FIG. 83(a), FIG. FIG. 84(b) is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b), when the lock member 13560 is pushed into the first position, it is locked by the insertion tube portion 541 of the interposed plate 540, as in the first embodiment. The base end (base member 562) of the locking member 13560, through which the member 560 is inserted, protruding from one end side of the tubular insertion portion 541 is held inside the holding portion 511e of the main body member 13510, and the other end of the tubular insertion portion 541 is held. The tip (tip member 561 ) of the lock member 13560 protruding from the side is held in the insertion hole 551 of the back member 11550 . Therefore, the intervening plate 540 cannot be removed from the housing portion 511 of the main body member 11510 .

In this case, the projection 13853 of the engaging member 13850 is inserted inside the recess 13815 of the rotating member 13810 . As a result, rotation of the rotating member 13810 by the biasing force of the biasing means (torsion spring) interposed between the rotating member 13810 and the main body member 13510 can be restricted.

Furthermore, in a state where the rotation of the rotating member 13810 is restricted by the engaging member 13850, the panel member 13520 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 13810 has an upper end surface flush with the upper end surface of the top plate 530. placed in position. That is, the panel member 13520 is arranged in the internal space of the recess 511c of the main body member 11510 .

Further, in a state in which the tip of the locking member 13560 (base member 562) is inserted and held inside the insertion hole 551 of the rear member 11550, the second base member 13850 of the engaging member 13850 is positioned inside the engaging recess 13563a of the locking member 13560. The release member 13855 is arranged.

As shown in FIGS. 83(a) and 83(b), the locking member 13560 is pulled out from the state shown in FIGS. When 562a reaches the second position where it engages the front of back member 11550, further withdrawal of locking member 560 is disabled.

By this pull-out operation, the lock member 13560 (base member 562) is pulled out from the insertion tube portion 541 of the interposition plate 540, and the end face of the base end of the lock member 13560 (base member 562) retreats to a position exceeding the lever member 570. be done. That is, a space is formed above the lever member 570 . As a result, the lever member 570 is rotated by the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP1, and its distal end side is pushed upward. Accordingly, the operator who replaces the panel member 13520 can remove the interposed plate 540 by grasping one longitudinal end of the interposed plate 540 .

In the thirteenth embodiment, the projecting portion 13563 of the locking member 13560 is inserted through the inserting tubular portion 541 formed in the interposition plate 540. A cutout portion 13541a is provided in a part of the portion to be cut out in the pull-out direction of the lock member 13560, and the protruding portion 13563 can be pulled out from the insertion tube portion 541 through the cutout portion 13541a. This allows the operator to remove the interposition plate 540 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 82(b), when the tip of the lock member 13560 (tip member 561) is inserted and held inside the insertion hole 551 of the back member 11550, the engagement recess 13563a of the lock member 13560 is The second release member 13855 of the engagement member 13850 is arranged inside. Therefore, by pulling out the lock member 13560, the inside of the engagement recess 13563a and the second release member 13855 are brought into contact with each other.

In this case, the second release member 13855 is rotated in a direction in which it is prevented from contacting the inner surface of the housing portion 13856 by the non-contact portion 13855b. Therefore, when the lock member 13560 is pulled out, the second release member 13855 can be rotated to arrange the second release member 13855 outside the engaging recess 13563a. That is, the pullout operation of the lock member 13560 is in a state in which the transmission of force to the annular portion 13851 is cut off.

As shown in FIGS. 84(a) and 84(b), the intervening plate 540 is removed from the main body member 13510 from the state shown in FIGS. Since a space is formed on the rear side (back side, back member 11550) of the top plate 530, the top plate 530 can be slid backward (retracted) using the space.

In this case, the protrusion 13533 formed on the top plate 13530 abuts the releasing member 13554 of the engaging member 13850 . As a result, the engagement member 13850 is pushed rearward, and the engagement member 13850 can be rotated about the axis of the annular portion 13851 .

When the engaging member 13850 is rotated, the state in which the protrusion 13853 of the engaging member 13850 is inserted inside the recess 13815 of the rotating member 13810 is released (the protrusion 13853 is pulled out from the inside of the recess 13815). Since the rotating member 13810 is biased by biasing means (torsion spring) interposed between the main body member 13510 and the rotating member 13810, the rotating member 13810 can be rotated by the biasing means. As a result, the front side (to-be-fastened portion 11812 side) of the rotating member 13810 is flipped upward, and the panel member 11520 is ejected from the inside of the recess 511c to the outside.

Therefore, the panel member 11520 can be displaced by sliding the top plate 13530, so that the operator who replaces the panel member 11520 can easily recognize the next replacement work procedure. That is, it is possible to make it easy for the user to recognize that the panel member 11520 is to be replaced after the operation of the top plate 13530 .

In addition, since the fastening portion between the panel member 13520 and the rotating member 13810 (the fastened portion 11812 of the rotating member 13810) is displaced toward the opening formed by the sliding displacement of the top plate 13530, the operator does not need to press the panel member 13520. The replacement work can be facilitated. That is, when replacing the panel member 11520, a screwdriver or the like is inserted through the opening formed between the top plate 13530 and the main body member 13510 to remove the screw fastened to the fastened portion 11812 of the rotary member 13810. Therefore, if the fastening portion (fastened portion 11812) is located away from the opening, it becomes difficult to remove the screw. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, since the fastening portion is closer to the opening side, the screw to be screwed can be easily removed.

After replacing the panel member 13520, the removal procedure is reversed to return the top plate 13530, the intervening plate 540 and the lock member 13560 to the positions shown in FIG. By pushing into the recess 511c of the body member 13510, the rotation member 13810 is rotated, and the recess 13815 of the rotation member 13810 is moved to a position facing the projection 13853 of the engaging member 13850, so that the projection is formed in the recess 13815. 13853 is inserted. Thereby, the panel member 13520 and the rotating member 13810 can be returned to the positions shown in FIG. 82(a).

Next, referring to FIG. 85, after the operator replaces the panel member 13520, the front door 13005 is closed to the inner frame 4 while forgetting to return the lock member 13560 from the second position to the first position. A case will be described.

85(a) and 85(b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the main part 13003 of the gaming machine. 85(a) corresponds to FIG. 82(a), and FIG. 85(b) corresponds to FIG. 82(b). 85(a) shows a state in which the lock member 13560 has been forgotten to be returned from the second position to the first position (state shown in FIG. 83(a)), and the front door 13005 is closed to the inner frame 4. The states are illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 85, when the worker pushes the interposition plate 540 downward to close the front door 13005 with respect to the inner frame 4 with the lock member 13560 positioned at the second position, the lock member The tip member 561 of 13560 is pushed forward by the front surface (front surface) of the inner frame 4 . That is, the tip member 561 of the locking member 13560 is inserted inside the insertion hole 551 and the second insertion hole 11558 of the back member 11550 .

When the lock member 560 is arranged at the second position, the tip member 13561 of the lock member 560 is brought into contact with the one-side contacted surface 13842 of the biasing member 13840 . Therefore, when the locking member 13560 is pushed forward by the inner frame 4, the biasing member 13840 is slid forward (to the left in FIG. 85(a)) by the displacement of the locking member 13560, and the distal end member 561 is inserted into the second position. It can be inserted inside hole 11558 .

In addition, the lock member 13560 moves from the distal end of the protruding portion 13563 in the second position (the state shown in FIGS. 83(a) and 83(b)) to the second release member 13855 of the engagement member 13850. is set smaller than the thickness dimension S2 (see FIG. 83(a)) of the tip member 561 of the locking member 13560 arranged at the second position. .

Therefore, when the worker pushes the interposition plate 540 downward to close the front door 13005 with respect to the inner frame 4 with the lock member 13560 positioned at the second position, the lock member 13560 is pushed into the tip member 561 . is slid forward by the thickness dimension S2 (see FIG. 83(a)). As a result, the tip of the projecting portion 13563 and the second release member 13855 can be brought into contact with each other.

As described above, when the lock member 13560 is displaced to the front side, the rotation of the second release member 13855 is restricted, and the displacement of the lock member 13560 causes the engagement member 13850 to move through the second release member 13855. It is transmitted to the annular portion 13851 . As a result, the engagement member 13850 is rotated about the axis of the annular portion 13851, and the state in which the projection 13853 of the engagement member 13850 is inserted into the recess 13815 of the rotating member 13810 is released (the recess 13815 is closed). The protrusion 13853 is withdrawn from the inside). As a result, the front side (to-be-fastened portion 11812 side) of the rotating member 13810 is flipped upward, and the panel member 11520 is ejected from the inside of the recess 511c to the outside.

Thereby, when the operator forgets to return the lock member 13560, the panel member 13520 to be replaced is displaced. Therefore, when the operator usually checks whether the replacement object (panel member 13520) is arranged in an appropriate state and position after the replacement work, the pachinko machine 1 may malfunction due to the displacement of the replacement object. This makes it easier for the operator to recognize that there is a problem (forgetting to return the lock member 13560).

Furthermore, since the replacement target (panel member 13520) is in a state of protruding from the inside of the main body member 11510 to the outside (protruded from the installation space), there is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (the lock member 560 has been forgotten to return). This makes it easier for workers to recognize that That is, since the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed, the operator can easily recognize that there is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (the lock member 560 has been forgotten to be returned).

When the worker closes the front door 13005 to the inner frame 4 without attaching the interposition plate 540 (forgetting to return it) and without pushing the interposition plate 540 downward, the lock member 13560 The sliding displacement of the lock member 13560 is restricted by the contact of the tip of the base member 562 with the side surface of the lever member 570 . As a result, the front end member 561 of the lock member 13560 is interposed between the front surface of the inner frame 4 and the rear surface of the front door 13005 , thereby restricting the closing of the front door 13005 with respect to the inner frame 4 . As a result, it is possible to make the operator aware that the interposing plate 540 has been forgotten to be returned.

Further, from the state in which the tip member 561 of the lock member 13560 is inserted into the insertion hole 551 and the second insertion hole 11558 of the rear member 11550 (the state shown in FIG. 85(a)), the lock member 13560 is moved to the first position. Since it is the same as that of 11th Embodiment when returning to 1, the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88. FIG. In the first embodiment, the top plate 530 can be slidably displaced by pulling out the lock member 560 after the front door 5 is opened with respect to the inner frame 4. However, in the fourteenth embodiment, , the top plate 14530 can be slidably displaced by opening the front door 14005 with respect to the inner frame 4 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the upper portion of the front door 14005 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. FIG. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the upper portion of the front door 14005 in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 87(a) is a top view of the gaming machine main section 14003, and FIG. 87(b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the gaming machine main section 14003 along line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87(a).

As shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the upper portion of the front door 14005 in the fourteenth embodiment includes a main body member 14510 arranged on the front side, a panel member 520 housed in the main body member 14510, and a main body member 14510. Engagement member 14860 that is accommodated in 14510 and is disposed in a vertically slidable state, top plate 14530 that is disposed on the upper surface of body member 14510, and is fixed to the rear side of body member 14510 and a back member 14550 .

The main body member 14510 is a member made of a light-transmitting material for constituting the electric decoration part in the upper front part of the pachinko machine 1, and the light emitting means such as an LED provided inside is used when hitting a big hit or when reaching a small bank. Lighting up or blinking according to the change of the game state plays a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. In addition, on the front side of the main body member 14510, a region corresponding to the panel member 520 is formed from a transparent material, and model information and the like displayed on the panel member 520 can be visually recognized through the portion of the transparent material. .

A housing portion 511 for disposing the top plate 530 and the interposition plate 540 is recessed in the upper surface of the main body member 14510 . The accommodation portion 511 includes slide grooves 511a formed on the left and right inner wall surfaces facing each other of the inner peripheral edge (inner wall surface) of the accommodation portion 511, recessed portions 511c recessed downward from the bottom surface, and relief portions. 511d, a holding portion 511e formed on the front side of the relief portion 5111d, and an accommodating portion 14515 recessed from the upper surface side and open on the back side.

The accommodating portion 14515 is a space for accommodating an engaging member 14860 to be described later, and is formed to have an inner edge shape that is larger than the outer shape of the engaging member 14860 when viewed from above. In addition, the dimension of the downward recess of the accommodation portion 14515 is set larger than the thickness dimension of the engaging member 14860 (the vertical dimension in FIG. 87(b)). This allows the engagement member 14860 to slide in the thickness direction.

The engaging member 14860 is formed in a rectangular plate-like body when viewed from above. The engaging member 14860 has a columnar protrusion 14861 protruding from its upper surface, and a coil spring SP7 is connected to its lower surface.

The protrusion 14861 has an outer diameter that allows it to be inserted into an engaged portion 14534 that is recessed in the top plate 14530 described later, and is attached to the top plate 14530 when the front door 14005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 . It is formed at a position corresponding to the engaging portion 14534 . Thereby, when the front door 14005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 , the projection 14861 can be inserted into the engaged portion 14534 to engage the top plate 14530 and the engaging member 14860 .

The coil spring SP7 is a spring member that is spirally turned a plurality of times. Connected to the bottom surface. Also, the free length of the coil spring SP7 (length in the vertical direction when no load is applied) is determined by the thickness of the engaging member 14860 from the distance dimension from the bottom surface of the recess of the housing portion 14515 to the bottom surface of the recess of the housing portion 511. It is set smaller than the distance dimension S3 (see FIG. 87(b)) obtained by subtracting the dimension. Therefore, the engaging member 14860 connected to the coil spring SP7 is arranged below the recessed bottom surface of the housing portion 511 (inside the housing portion 14515) when the coil spring SP7 is not loaded.

The top plate 14530 is formed to have a size corresponding to the accommodating portion 511 of the main body member 14510 and the upper surface concave portion 14550b of the rear member 14550 described later when viewed from above. The thickness of the top plate 14530 is set to be substantially the same as the downward recess dimension of the upper recesses of the housing portion 511 and the back member 14550 . Accordingly, when the top plate 14530 is arranged on the main body member 14510 and the back member 14550 , it can be arranged flush with the upper surfaces of the top plate 14530 , the main body member 14510 and the back member 14550 .

In addition, the top plate 14530 has projecting portions 531 projecting from left and right edges, and engaged portions 14534 are recessed upward on the bottom surface. As a result, the top plate 14530 can be slidably displaced with respect to the main body member 14510 by inserting the projecting piece portion 531 into the slide groove 511a, and the projection 14861 can be inserted into the engaged portion 14534 and engaged. .

The back surface member 14550 has an upper end surface set at the same height as the top surface of the main body member 14510 and is arranged on the rear surface side of the main body member 14510 . Further, the back surface member 14550 has an upper surface recess 14550b recessed downward from the upper end surface, and an insertion hole 14550c is formed through the upper surface recess 14550b and the bottom surface of the recess at a position separated by a plate thickness separation of the engaging member 14860. be.

The upper recessed portion 14550b is recessed on the back side of the housing portion 511 of the main body member 14510 arranged on the front side, and the recessed dimension is set substantially equal to the recessed dimension of the recessed portion 511 . Thereby, the top plate 14530 can be arranged inside the upper surface concave portion 14550b.

The insertion hole 14550c is a hole through which a lock member 14560 disposed on the inner frame 4, which will be described later, is inserted.

The lock member 14560 is formed so as to protrude from the front side of the inner frame 4 toward the main body member 14510 , and the projection dimension is set larger than the thickness dimension of the back member 14550 . The vertical dimension of the lock member 14560 is set substantially equal to the distance dimension S3 (see FIG. 87(b)). As a result, the tip side of the locking member 14560 projecting from the front surface of the back member 14550 is arranged on the lower surface side of the engaging member 14860 , so that the upper surface of the engaging member 14860 is aligned with the recessed bottom surface of the housing portion 511 of the main body member 14510 . can be placed at approximately the same height as

The locking member 14560 is formed with an inclined surface 14564 that is inclined upward toward the base end on the upper portion of the projecting tip. The inclined surface 13564 is a surface that comes into contact with the engaging member 14860 when the front door 14005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4, thereby displacing the engaging member 14860 upward. A detailed description of the state of contact between the inclined surface 14564 and the engaging member 14860 will be given later.

Next, a procedure for exchanging the panel member 11520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. 88(a) and 88(b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the main part 14003 of the gaming machine. 88(a) and 88(b) correspond to FIG. 87(b). Also, FIGS. 87(b), 88(a) and 88(b) show FIG. 87(b), FIG. 88(a) and FIG. 88(b) in order when the panel member 520 is replaced. be done.

As shown in FIG. 87(b), when the front door 14005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4, the engaging member 14860 is placed on the upper surface of the locking member 14560 arranged inside the accommodating portion 14515. state. As a result, the coil spring SP7 is stretched, and the projection 14861 of the engaging member 14860 is inserted inside the engaged portion 14534 . As a result, the sliding displacement of the top plate 14530 is restricted.

As shown in FIG. 88(a), when the front door 14005 is opened with respect to the inner frame 4 from the state shown in FIG. It is assumed to have been removed. As a result, a space is formed below the engaging member 14860 from the state in which the locking member 14560 is arranged.

As described above, since the engaging member 14860 is connected to the coil spring SP7, the engaging member 14860 is drawn downward by the coil spring SP7 due to the space formed on the lower side. As a result, the protrusion 14861 of the engaging member 14860 is pulled out from the engaged portion 14534 of the top plate 14530, and the engagement between the engaging member 14860 and the top plate 14530 is released. As a result, the restriction on the sliding displacement of the top plate 14530 is released.

As shown in FIG. 88(b), from the state shown in FIG. 88(a), the top plate 14530 is slid to the rear side (inner frame 4 side) to form an opening in front of the main body member 14510. can be done. Thereby, the panel member 520 arranged on the body member 14510 can be replaced through the opening of the body member 14510 .

When returning the gaming machine main section 14003 to its original position (the position shown in FIG. C2(b)) after replacing the panel member 520, the top plate 14530 is slid forward to open the front opening of the main body member 14510. After closing, the front door 14005 is closed to the inner frame 4 . As a result, the tip of the lock member 14560 protrudes inside the accommodation portion 14515 of the main body member 14510 through the insertion hole 14550c of the back member 14550 . In this case, the engaging member 14860 abuts on the inclined surface 14564 formed at the tip of the locking member 14560 . As a result, the engaging member 14860 is guided (displaced) upward along the slope of the inclined surface 14564 , and the projection 14861 of the engaging member 14860 is inserted into the engaged portion 14534 of the top plate 14530 . As a result, the sliding displacement of the top plate 14530 is restricted.

Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment, only by closing the front door 14005 with respect to the inner frame 4, the sliding displacement of the top plate 14530 can be restricted, and the panel member 520 can be removed from the main part 14003 of the gaming machine. Since it can be disabled, the worker's work can be simplified.

That is, in the first embodiment, the sliding displacement of the top plate 530 can be restricted by returning the locking member 560 from the second position to the first position after returning the intervening plate 540 to its original position. Since it is necessary for the operator to return the interposition plate 540 to the original position and to return the locking member 560 to the first position, the operator's work becomes complicated. In contrast, in the fourteenth embodiment, the slide displacement of the top plate 14530 can be restricted only by closing the front door 14005 with respect to the inner frame 4 . Therefore, the worker's work can be simplified.

Next, the case where the front door 14005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 in a state in which the top plate 14530 is slid to the rear side (inner frame 4 side) will be described with reference to FIG. 88(b).

As shown in FIG. 88(b), the projecting distance S4 (see FIG. 88(b)) to the end of the inclined surface 14564 of the lock member 14560 on the proximal side is such that the top plate 14530 is slid to the rear side. is set larger than the distance dimension S5 (see FIG. 88(b)) from the end of the engaging member 14860 on the back side to the end of the top plate 14530 on the side (back side) projecting from the back member 14550. (S4>S5). As a result, when the front door 14005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 in a state where the top plate 14530 is slid to the rear side (the front side of the top plate 14530 is opened), the rear side of the top plate 14530 can be prevented from coming into contact with the front surface of the inner frame 4 and damaging the top plate 14530 .

More specifically, when the front door 14005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 in a state where the top plate 14530 is slid to the back side (the front of the top plate 14530 is opened), the top plate 14530 moves to the back side. The locking member 14560 can abut the engagement member 14860 before abutting the front surface of the member 14550 . Accordingly, the engaging member 14860 is displaced upward.

When the top plate 14530 is slid to the rear side, the protrusion 14861 of the engaging member 14860 is not inserted into the engaged portion 14534 and is in contact with the lower surface of the top plate 14530 . Therefore, a gap into which the locking member 14560 can be inserted is not formed between the lower surface of the engaging member 14860 and the recessed bottom surface of the accommodating portion 14515, and the insertion of the locking member 14560 is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the front door 14005 from being closed with respect to the inner frame 4 , and prevent the top plate 14530 from being damaged by the back end of the top plate 14530 coming into contact with the front surface of the inner frame 4 .

In addition, the amount of rearward sliding displacement of the top plate 14530 is smaller than the distance dimension S6 (see FIG. 88(b)) from the outer edge of the projection 14861 of the engaging member 14860 to the rear end of the rear member 14550. set. As a result, when the top plate 14530 is slid to the back side, it is possible to prevent the engaged portion 14534 of the top plate 14530 from being arranged on the back side of the back member 14550 . As a result, modification of the engaged portion 14534 can be suppressed.

Note that modification of the engaged portion 14534 means, for example, modification to increase the outer diameter of the engaged portion 14534 so that the protrusion 14561 of the engaging member 14860 can be easily inserted into the engaged portion 14534. exemplified.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

In the above-described fourth embodiment, the case where the panel member 4520 is fastened and fixed to the bottom surface of the top plate 4530 has been described. For example, other fixing methods include engagement/fitting/press-fitting using elastic deformation, engagement/fitting without elastic deformation, and adhesion using an adhesive or adhesive tape.

In the fourth embodiment, the recess dimension (depth dimension) of the recess 511c is set to a dimension sufficiently larger than the height dimension of the panel member 4520, and the panel member 4520 is not fastened and fixed to the top plate 4530. When the contact member 4532 is housed in the recess 511c, the other longitudinal end of the contact member 4532 is not pushed into the recess 4534 by the panel member 4520, and the one longitudinal end of the contact member 4532 pushes down the lever member 570. Although a case has been described where is impossible, it is not necessarily limited to this. You can

In this case, even if the panel member 4520 is not fastened and fixed to the top plate 4530 and is accommodated in the recessed portion 511c, when the top plate 4530 is attached to the accommodation portion 511, the other longitudinal end of the contact member 4532 is attached to the panel member. 4520 is pushed into the recessed groove 4534 so that one longitudinal end side of the contact member 4532 can push down the lever member 570 .

Therefore, the work of fastening and fixing the panel member 4520 to the top plate 4530 becomes unnecessary, and the work can be simplified accordingly. Also, if the panel member 4520 is not stored in the recess 511c, the lever member 570 cannot be pushed downward (that is, the front door 5 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 4), so the installation of the panel member 4520 cannot be forgotten. can be recognized by workers.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the intervening plates 540 and 3540, the top plate 4530, the slide plate 6540 and the panel member 4520 (third member, target member) are not attached at predetermined positions, the inner frame 4 (first frame Although the case where the closing of the front door 5 (the second frame member or the first frame member) is restricted with respect to the member or the second frame member), the member to be suppressed from forgetting to attach to the predetermined position The (third member) and the members (the first frame member and the second frame member) whose closing is restricted when the installation is forgotten are not limited to the members exemplified in the above embodiment.

For example, as a combination of members (first frame member and second frame member) whose closing is regulated when the third member or the target member is forgotten to be attached, for example, the outer frame 2 and the inner frame 4, the front door 5 and the lower Plate unit 15, front door 5 and outer frame 2, inner frame 4 and back pack unit 6, front door 5 and passage forming unit 160, resin base 140 and game ball shooting mechanism 142, or inner frame 4 and foul ball passage 165 etc. are exemplified. That is, it may be applied to any member as long as it is a combination of members in which one member is openable (rotatable) with respect to the other member.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the front door 5 is restricted from being closed with respect to the inner frame 4 when the intervening plates 540, 3540, the top plate 4530, or the slide plate 6540 are not attached at predetermined positions will be described. However, this is not necessarily the case. For example, the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 in a state in which the intervening plates 540, 3540, the top plate 4530, or the slide plate 6540 are not attached to predetermined positions. The panel members 520 and 4520 are formed to be in a predetermined state (regardless of whether the state in which the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 can be formed) when at least the operation is performed. Also good. As the predetermined state, for example, the panel members 520 and 4520 are bent, protrude (fall off) from the recess 511c, and tilt within the recess 511c. After performing work such as replacement of the panel members 520 and 4520, the worker normally checks the state of the panel members 520 and 4520, so that the worker is aware that he or she has forgotten to attach the interposition plate 540 or the like. You can make it easier.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the front door 5 is restricted from being closed with respect to the inner frame 4 when the intervening plates 540, 3540, the top plate 4530, or the slide plate 6540 are not attached at predetermined positions will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. Alternatively, or in addition to this, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the intervening plates 540, 3540, the top plate 4530, or the slide plate 6540 The power supply of the pachinko machine 1 may be turned off when at least the action of closing the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 is performed without being attached to the predetermined position. In this case, turning off the power of the pachinko machine 1 may turn off the power of the whole (all structural units), and only the part corresponding to the forgetting to install (for example, a light emitting means such as an LED that illuminates the panel member 520) You can turn it off. This makes it easier for operators and players to recognize that the installation plate 540 or the like has not been installed.

On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, the operation of closing the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 without the installation plates 540, 3540, the top plate 4530, or the slide plate 6540 being attached to the predetermined positions is at least It may be formed so that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on when it is performed. In this case, turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 may turn on the power of the whole (all structural units), and only the part corresponding to the forgetting to install (for example, a light emitting means such as an LED that illuminates the panel member 520) You can turn it on. This makes it easier for operators and players to recognize that the installation plate 540 or the like has not been installed.

In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 1 was explained as an example, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to different types of gaming machines. Slot machines, for example, are examples of different types of gaming machines. In this case, for example, in the eighth embodiment, a case was described in which the projecting member 8713 projects into the game area PE to disable the game. By using the displacement, the selector may be operated to disable insertion of coins (cannot be inserted or ejected even if inserted). Further, for example, in the ninth embodiment, the case where the rotating member of the operating handle 51 is disabled by displacing the protruding member 9724 has been described. The operation of the operating lever may be disabled by utilizing the displacement of the member corresponding to . Also in these cases, the same effects as in the eighth and ninth embodiments can be obtained.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, the case where part of the abnormality display device 11518 is formed of a transparent material has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a sticker or the like having an opening only in a light-transmitting region may be attached to the abnormality display device 11518 which is entirely (integrally) formed of a transparent material. In addition to the seal, the area other than the area through which light is transmitted to the abnormality display device 11518 may be painted.

In this case, since the abnormality display device 11518 can be formed as an integral part, the formation of the abnormality display device 11518 can be simplified. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the abnormality display device 11518 can be reduced.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, the panel member 11520 is arranged on the back side of the opaque region R2 to make the operator aware of an abnormality. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the operator forgets to return the lock member 560 and closes the front door 11005 with respect to the inner frame 4, the rotary member 11810 may be rotated in the direction opposite to that of the eleventh embodiment.

In this case, by forming the panel member 11520 from a flexible resin material, the panel member 11520 can be sandwiched between the top plate 530 and the rotating member 11810 and deformed. As a result, the operator can visually confirm the state of the panel member 11520 that there is an abnormality in the panel member 11520 . As a result, it can be made easy to judge that the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal during work.

In the twelfth embodiment described above, when the panel member 12520 displays one decoration (the first division plate 12520a to the fourth division plate 12520d are displaced in the vertical direction), the fourth division plate 12520d is , the back side of the opaque region R2 of the main body member 11510, and the third dividing plate 12520c is disposed on the back side of the transparent region R1, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the entire front surface of the main body member 11510 may be formed with the transparent region R1, or the transparent region R1 may be formed up to the front side of the fourth dividing plate 12520d.

In this case, if the operator forgets to return the lock member 560 from the second position to the first position after replacing the panel member 12520, the operator can visually confirm that the split plates are stacked in the front-rear direction. You can make it easier. Therefore, the operator can easily recognize the abnormality of the panel member 12520 . As a result, the operator can easily recognize that there is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (the locking member 560 has been forgotten to be returned).

In the twelfth embodiment, when the rotating member 12810 is displaced (rotated), the plurality of split plates of the panel member 12520 overlap in the front-rear direction, and by returning the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 12810, the panel member 12520 is displaced (rotated). Although the case where the plurality of split plates are arranged at positions shifted in the vertical direction has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, once the plurality of split plates of the panel member 12520 are overlapped in the front-rear direction, they are fixed in that state. You may try not to go back to

In this case, when the player closes the front door 12004 with respect to the inner frame 4 after committing fraud, the panel member 12520 is deformed by operating the lock member 560 incorrectly. This makes it easier for the machine 1 to recognize that an unauthorized operation has been performed.

In the thirteenth embodiment, after the rotating member 13810 rotates, the front end side (fastened portion 11812 side) approaches the opening between the main body member 13510 and the top plate 13530, but this is not necessarily the case. not a thing For example, after rotating member 13810 rotates, the tip side (fastened portion 11812 side) may protrude from the opening between main body member 13510 and top plate 13530 .

In this case, the fastening (screwed) portion between the panel member 13520 and the rotating member 13810 can be projected outside the main part 13003 of the game machine, so that the panel member 13520 can be easily removed from the rotating member 13810 .

In the thirteenth embodiment, the panel member 13520 is fastened to the rotating member 13810, and when the rotating member 13810 is rotated, the panel member 13520 protrudes outward from the gaming machine main section 13003. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the panel member 13520 is engaged with the tip of the rotating member 13810, and when the rotating member 13810 is rotated, the panel member 13520 protrudes outward from the main part of the gaming machine and engages with the rotating member 13810. The combination may be canceled.

In this case, if there is a problem in the replacement work of the panel member 13520 (forgetting to return the lock member 13560 from the second position to the first position), the panel member 13520 can be dropped from the main part 13003 of the game machine. The operator who replaces the 13520 can easily recognize that there is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (the locking member 13560 has been forgotten to return).

In the thirteenth embodiment, the panel member 13520 protrudes (protrudes) toward the upper rear side of the main body member 13510 when the operator forgets to return the lock member 13560, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, the rotating member 13810 may be configured to protrude toward the upper front side of the main body member 13510 .

In this case, since the panel member 13520 protrudes on the front side of the main body member 13510, when the front door 13005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4, if the operator does not notice the protrusion of the panel member 13520, the worker can By visually recognizing the pachinko machine 1 from the left and right sides, it is possible to easily recognize that a part (the panel member 13520) protrudes to the front side. As a result, the operator who replaces the panel member 13520 or another operator can easily recognize that there is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (the lock member 13560 has been forgotten to return).

Furthermore, in this case, the panel member 13520 projecting from the body member 13510 is arranged at a position where at least a part of the projecting tip of the panel member 13520 overlaps with the body member 13510 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. is preferred. According to this, the main body member 13510 is hidden (overlapped) by the panel member 13520, so that part of the main body member 13510 is difficult to see. As a result, the operator who replaces the panel member 13520 or another operator can easily recognize that there is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (the lock member 13560 has been forgotten to return).

In the eleventh to thirteenth embodiments, by rotating the rotating members 11810, 12810, 13810, the positions of the panel members 11520, 12520, 13520 fastened to the rotating members 11810, 12810, 13810 are displaced. However, it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the members to which the panel members 11520, 12520, 13520 are fastened may be slid to displace the positions of the panel members 11520, 12520, 13520.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the game machine of the present invention are shown.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the One-Way Clutch 3580 as an Example>
a first frame member, a second frame member attached to the first frame member so as to be openable and closable, a third member disposed at a predetermined position of one of the first frame member and the second frame member; and wherein the third member is formed to be displaceable at least from the predetermined position, wherein the third member is moved to the predetermined position by opening the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is allowed to displace at least from, and in a state in which the third member is not arranged at the predetermined position, closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is restricted. Gaming machine A1 to play.

Here, it comprises a first frame, a second frame attached to the first frame so as to be openable and closable, and a third member (decoration panel 25) arranged on either the first frame or the second frame. , and a game machine in which the third member is at least displaceable from a predetermined position is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2001-104546).

According to this gaming machine, the third member is at least displaced (or removed) from a predetermined position, thereby enabling a predetermined operation (for example, inspection, adjustment, replacement of parts, etc.) by the operator. . On the other hand, by returning the third member to the predetermined position, it is possible to restrict the operator or the player from performing a predetermined operation.

However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that the third member may be forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position. If the third member is forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position, the portion where the third member is to be arranged is opened, and there is a risk that the opened portion will be used to commit fraud.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, by opening the second frame member with respect to the first frame member, the third member is allowed to be at least displaced from the predetermined position, and the third member is When the second frame member is not arranged at the predetermined position, the closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is restricted, so that forgetting to return the third member to the predetermined position can be suppressed.

That is, according to the gaming machine A1, in order to at least displace the third member from the predetermined position, it is necessary to open the second frame member with respect to the first frame member. When the second frame member is at least displaced from the position, the operator can always perform the operation of closing the second frame member with respect to the first frame member as an essential work. In this case, unless the third member is returned to the predetermined position, the second frame member cannot be closed with respect to the first frame member, and a playable state cannot be formed, so the third member is forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position. can be reliably suppressed.

It should be noted that displacing at least the third member means not only displacing the third member while it is disposed on either the first frame member or the second frame member, but also displacing the first frame member or the second frame member. A mode in which the third member is removed from one of the frame members is also included. Examples of the predetermined operation performed by at least displacing the third member include the case of removing and replacing a target part or device, the case of adjusting the arrangement direction, the case of operating a switch, and the like. be.

In the game machine A1, when the second frame member is opened with respect to the first frame member and the third member is at least displaced from the predetermined position, the second frame member is moved with respect to the first frame member, A gaming machine A2 comprising prohibiting means for prohibiting displacement from the open position at least in the closing direction.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, when the second frame member is opened with respect to the first frame member and the third member is at least displaced from the predetermined position, the Since the second frame member is provided with the prohibiting means for prohibiting the second frame member from being displaced from the open position at least in the closing direction, it is possible to prevent forgetting to return the third member to the predetermined position.

That is, by making it impossible to close the second frame member with respect to the first frame member unless the third member is returned to the predetermined position, it is possible to prevent forgetting to return the third member. However, in this case, for example, in a state in which the second frame member overlaps the first frame member, a predetermined member is interposed between the two to prevent the closed state from being formed (that is, the first frame member structure that allows the displacement of the second frame member in the closing direction with respect to the member), the second frame member is displaced in the closing direction with respect to the first frame member even if the closed state is not actually formed. , there is a risk that the operator will mistakenly recognize that a closed state has been formed due to the overlapping of the two. In addition, if the closing operation is performed with a large force, the second frame member may collide with the first frame member while sandwiching a predetermined member, resulting in damage.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A2, when the third member is at least displaced from the predetermined position, the prohibiting means prohibits the second frame member from at least being displaced in the closing direction with respect to the first frame member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from erroneously recognizing that the closed state has been formed. In addition, by prohibiting the displacement in the closing direction, it is possible to avoid damage due to a collision that accompanies the closing operation.

The game machine A3 in the game machine A2 is characterized in that the prohibiting means permits the second frame member to be displaced in the opening direction with respect to the first frame member.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, the prohibition means allows the second frame member to be displaced in the opening direction with respect to the first frame member. It is possible to make the operator easily recognize that the third member has forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position by forming an operation different from failure of the connecting portion with the frame member and foreign matter getting caught.

In the game machine A3, the prohibiting means comprises a one-way clutch, and by the operation of the one-way clutch, the second frame member is prohibited from being displaced in the closing direction with respect to the first frame member, and the first frame member is A gaming machine A4 characterized in that it is formed so as to allow the second frame member to be displaced in the opening direction with respect to the member.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the prohibition of displacement of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member in the closing direction and the displacement of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member in the opening direction are prohibited. Since the tolerance is formed by the operation of the one-way clutch, once displaced in the opening direction, displacement in the closing direction from that position can be prohibited. The opening angle of the second frame member relative to the member can be increased. Therefore, the operator can easily recognize that the third member has not been returned to the predetermined position, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the second frame member from being forcibly pushed in the closing direction and damaged.

The gaming machine A1 is provided with a locking device for locking the second frame member with respect to the first frame member, and the locking device is in an unlocked state when the third member is not arranged at the predetermined position. A gaming machine A5 characterized by:

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, it is equipped with a locking device for locking the second frame member with respect to the first frame member. Since the device is in the unlocked state, even if the second frame member is displaced in the closing direction with respect to the first frame member, it is possible to create a state in which locking is not performed. Therefore, the operator can be made to recognize that the third member is not arranged at the predetermined position, and it is possible to suppress forgetting to return the third member to the predetermined position.

In the gaming machine A5, when the second frame member is displaced in the closing direction with respect to the first frame member in a state in which the third member is not arranged at the predetermined position, the second frame member is opened. A gaming machine A6 characterized by comprising an urging member that urges the game machine A6.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of the game machine A5, when the second frame member is displaced in the closing direction with respect to the first frame member while the third member is not arranged at the predetermined position, Since the urging member that urges the second frame member in the opening direction is provided, the operator can easily recognize that the third member is not arranged at the predetermined position.

That is, for example, when the second frame member is displaced in the closing direction with respect to the first frame member, if the locking is not performed, the second frame member overlaps the first frame member, and the closing mechanism is closed. The operator may mistakenly recognize that a state of On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A6, when the second frame member is displaced with respect to the first frame member in the closing direction, the second frame member is pushed back in the opening direction by the biasing force of the biasing member. , can form an open state. Therefore, the operator can easily recognize that the third member is not arranged at the predetermined position.

Also, if the closing operation is performed with a large force, the second frame member may collide with the first frame member and be damaged, but such collision can be buffered by the biasing force of the biasing member. Therefore, damage can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine A6, the biasing member is formed to be capable of biasing the second frame member in the opening direction when the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member. Gaming machine A7.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of the game machine A6, the biasing member can bias the second frame member in the opening direction when the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member. Since it is formed, when the second frame member is opened from the closed state with respect to the first frame member, the force required for opening can be assisted by the biasing force of the biasing member. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the operator when opening the second frame member with respect to the first frame member.

In game machines A1 to A7, when the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member in a state in which the third member is at least displaced from the predetermined position, the first frame member and the second frame member A gaming machine A8 characterized by comprising an urging member interposed between and elastically deformed.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 to A7, when the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member in a state in which the third member is at least displaced from the predetermined position, the first Since the urging member is interposed between the frame member and the second frame member and is elastically deformed, the force of collision between the first frame member and the second frame member is weakened by the cushioning effect accompanying the elastic deformation of the urging member. be able to. As a result, breakage and damage due to collision can be suppressed.

In the game machine A8, an operation member is provided which is operable at least at a first position or a second position in a state where the second frame member is opened with respect to the first frame member, and the operation member is operated at the second position. The operation member is interposed between the first frame member and the second frame member to restrict the closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member, and the urging member acts as the operation member. A gaming machine A9 characterized by being housed in a member.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of the game machine A8, the operating member is formed to be operable at least at the first position or the second position in a state in which the second frame member is opened with respect to the first frame member. and the operating member operated to the second position is interposed between the first frame member and the second frame member, thereby restricting the closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member and biasing the second frame member. Since the member is accommodated in the operation member, the biasing member can be easily elastically deformed between the first frame member and the second frame member, and space efficiency can be improved.

In the gaming machine A9, the biasing member is elastically deformed between the first frame member and the second frame member when the second frame member is closed to the first frame member. Gaming machine A10.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A9, the urging member, in a state where the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member, is arranged between the first frame member and the second frame member. Since the second frame member is elastically deformed, when the second frame member is to be opened from the first frame member, the elastic recovery force of the biasing member is used as a force to assist the opening operation, and the operator can perform the opening operation. can assist.

The game machine A10 includes a deformation imparting section that elastically deforms the biasing member in a state in which the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member, and the second frame member is provided with respect to the first frame member. The game machine A11 is characterized in that elastic deformation of the biasing member by the deformation imparting section is released in an open state.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effects of the game machine A10, the first frame member is provided with a deformation imparting section that elastically deforms the biasing member in a state in which the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member. Since the elastic deformation of the biasing member by the deformation imparting section is released in a state in which the second frame member is released with respect to the first frame member, when the second frame member is released with respect to the first frame member, biasing By increasing the elastic recovery force of the member, the opening operation can be facilitated. The momentum of collision between the first frame member and the second frame member can be easily weakened.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Lock Member 560 as an Example>
a first frame member, a second frame member attached to the first frame member so as to be openable and closable, a third member disposed at a predetermined position of one of the first frame member and the second frame member; wherein the third member is at least displaceable from the predetermined position, wherein the third member is at least at the first position or the second position in a state where the second frame member is opened with respect to the first frame member An operating member formed to be operable is provided, and when the operating member is operated from the first position to the second position, the third member is allowed to be at least displaced from the predetermined position. By disposing the member at the predetermined position, the operating member can be operated from the second position to the first position, and at least in a state where the operating member is not operated to the first position, the The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is restricted.

Here, it comprises a first frame, a second frame attached to the first frame so as to be openable and closable, and a third member (decoration panel 25) arranged on either the first frame or the second frame. , and a game machine in which the third member is at least displaceable from a predetermined position is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2001-104546).

According to this gaming machine, the third member is at least displaced (or removed) from a predetermined position, thereby enabling a predetermined operation (for example, inspection, adjustment, replacement of parts, etc.) by the operator. . On the other hand, by returning the third member to the predetermined position, it is possible to restrict the operator or the player from performing a predetermined operation.

However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that the third member may be forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position. If the third member is forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position, the portion where the third member should be placed is opened, and there is a risk that the opened portion will be used to commit fraud.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, by operating the operating member from the first position to the second position, the third member is allowed to displace at least from the predetermined position. When the second frame member is not positioned at the first position, the closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is restricted, and in order to operate the operating member from the second position to the first position, the third member Since it is necessary to arrange the third member at a predetermined position, it is possible to prevent the third member from being forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position.

That is, according to the game machine B1, in order to at least displace the third member from the predetermined position, it is necessary to operate the operating member from the first position to the second position, and the operating member must be moved to the first position. Since the closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is restricted in the state where the second frame member is not operated, the operator is required to operate the operation member from the second position to the first position as an essential task. You can definitely do it. In this case, since the operation member cannot be operated from the second position to the first position unless the third member is returned to the predetermined position, it is possible to reliably prevent forgetting to return the third member to the predetermined position.

In the game machine B1, when the operation member is operated to the second position, the operation member is interposed between the first frame member and the second frame member, thereby A gaming machine B2 characterized in that closing of the second frame member is regulated by pressing.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, the operation member is interposed between the first frame member and the second frame member when the operation member is operated to at least the second position. Therefore, the closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is regulated, so that the product cost can be reduced. In other words, the operation member can perform both the role of switching between regulation and allowance of the displacement of the third member and the role of regulating the closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member. It is possible to eliminate the need to separately provide a member for this purpose. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

The gaming machine B2 includes a displacement member displaceably disposed on one of the first frame member and the second frame member, and an urging member that applies an urging force to the displacement member, and the operation member is When operated from the first position to the second position, the displacement member is displaced by the biasing force of the biasing member to a position that restricts movement of the operating member from the second position to the first position. A game machine B3 characterized by.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, a displacement member displaceably disposed on one of the first frame member and the second frame member and an urging force for applying an urging force to the displacement member a member, wherein when the operation member is operated from the first position to the second position, the displacement member moves to a position that restricts the movement of the operation member from the second position to the first position with the biasing force of the biasing member. Therefore, when the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member while the operation member remains at the second position, the operation member moves from the second position to the first position. can be reliably suppressed. That is, it is possible to prevent the second frame member from being closed with respect to the first frame member when the third member is not returned to the predetermined position.

In the game machine B3, the displacement member can be displaced to a position that allows the operation member to move from the second position to the first position when the third member is arranged at the predetermined position. A gaming machine B4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, it is possible to prevent forgetting to return the third member to the predetermined position. That is, in order to close the second frame member with respect to the first frame member, it is necessary to operate the operating member from the second position to the first position. to a position that allows it to move from the second position to the first position, and this displacement of the displacement member requires the placement of the third member in place. Therefore, unless the third member is returned to the predetermined position, the operation member cannot be operated from the second position to the first position, and the second frame member must be closed with respect to the first frame member (that is, the game can be played). Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent forgetting to return the third member to the predetermined position.

In the gaming machine B4, the displacement member is directly or indirectly acted upon by the third member when the third member is arranged at the predetermined position, thereby moving the operating member from the second position. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being displaced to a position that allows movement to the first position.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4, when the third member is arranged at the predetermined position, the third member is directly or indirectly acted on, so that the displacement member can be operated. Since the member is displaced from the second position to the position that allows movement to the first position (referred to as a displacement-allowing position), workability can be improved. That is, when the third member is placed at a predetermined position, the displacement member can be displaced to the displacement-permitting position in accordance with the movement of the third member. can. Thereby, workability can be improved.

In addition, in a structure that requires a separate operation of displacing the displacement member to the displacement-permitting position, if the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member in a state in which the displacement member is not displaced to the displacement-permitting position, However, according to the game machine B5, if the third member is placed at a predetermined position, the displacement member can be displaced. Since the member is displaced to the displacement allowable position, it is possible to suppress damage to the operating member, the displacement member, etc. when the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member.

In any one of game machines B3 to B5, the operating member is operated from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member is moved to a position that restricts movement of the operating member from the second position to the first position. When displaced by the biasing force of the biasing member, the displacement member acts directly or indirectly on the third member to displace the third member by a predetermined amount. .

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B3 to B5, the operation member is operated from the first position to the second position, and the movement of the operation member from the second position to the first position is performed. When the displacement member is displaced to the regulating position by the biasing force of the biasing member, the displacement member acts directly or indirectly on the third member to displace the third member by a predetermined amount (for example, while floating). Therefore, the third member can be easily displaced or removed, and workability can be improved.

In any one of the game machines B3 to B5, the operation member is formed so that a tip side thereof can be bent, and the bent tip side is sandwiched between the first frame member and the second frame member so that the operation member can be bent. The gaming machine B7 is characterized in that closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is restricted.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B3 to B5, the operation member is formed such that the tip side thereof can be bent, and the bent tip side is positioned between the first frame member and the second frame member. Since the closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is regulated, the second frame member is held with respect to the first frame member in a state in which the operation member is operated to the second position. Even when the members are closed, it is possible to prevent the operating member from being pushed toward the displacement member, thereby suppressing damage to the operating member and the displacement member.

In game machine B7, game machine B8 is characterized in that the operation member is disposed in a posture in which the rotation axis when the tip end side is bent is aligned in a horizontal direction.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of the game machine b7, the operation member is disposed in a posture in which the rotation axis when the tip side is bent is arranged in the horizontal direction, so that the tip side is supported by its own weight. can be tilted downward. Therefore, for example, even if the operator does not bend the operation member, the operation member can be bent by the action of gravity, and the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member. In this case, the distal end side of the operating member can be securely held between them. As a result, it is possible to suppress the operation member from being pushed in, thereby suppressing damage to the operation member and the displacement member.

In game machines B1 to B8, a target member is provided that can be removed from one of the first frame member and the second frame member by displacing the third member from the predetermined position, and the target member is the first frame member. A gaming machine B9 characterized in that, in a state in which the second frame member is not disposed on either the frame member or the second frame member, the closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is restricted.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B8, the object that can be removed from either the first frame member or the second frame member by at least displacing the third member from the predetermined position When the member is provided and the target member is not arranged on either the first frame member or the second frame member, the closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is restricted. It is possible to suppress forgetting to return.

In the game machine B9, the target member is formed to be attachable to the third member, and the third member is not disposed at the predetermined position while the target member is attached to the third member. The gaming machine B10 is characterized in that, in the state, closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is restricted.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects of the game machine B9, the target member is formed to be attachable to the third member, and the third member is arranged at the predetermined position while the target member is attached to the third member. When the second frame member is not provided, closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is restricted. A state can be created in which the second frame member cannot be closed with respect to the frame member. Thereby, forgetting to return the third member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the third member is disposed on one of the first frame member and the second frame member so as to be displaceable between the predetermined position and the open position, and is arranged relative to the first frame member. When the second frame member is opened and the third member is displaced to the predetermined position, the operating member can be operated to the first position or the second position, and the third member is arranged at the open position. The game machine B11 is characterized in that, in the closed state, the operation of the operating member from the second position to the first position is restricted by the third member.

According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1 or B2, the third member is disposed on either the first frame member or the second frame member so as to be displaceable between the predetermined position and the open position, When the second frame member is opened with respect to the first frame member and the third member is displaced to a predetermined position, the operation member can be operated to the first position or the second position, and the third member is in the open position. , the operation member is restricted from being operated from the second position to the first position by the third member, so that the operation member is restricted from moving from the second position to the first position. It is not necessary to separately provide the third member, and the role of such a member can be shared by the third member. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

In the game machine B11, the third member projects outward from either the first frame member or the second frame member when displaced to the open position.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B11, when the third member is displaced to the open position, it protrudes outward from either the first frame member or the second frame member. This makes it easier for the operator to recognize the three members. That is, since the third member protrudes outward from one of the first frame member and the second frame member, it is possible to prevent the third member from being returned to the predetermined position in a state where the third member does not return to the first frame member. It is possible to suppress the two frame members from being closed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Launch Control Member 8710 as an Example>
A gaming machine comprising a predetermined position arrangement member formed so as to be at least displaceable from a predetermined position, wherein when the predetermined position arrangement member is at least displaced, a predetermined work can be performed at the predetermined position. The game machine C1 is characterized in that a state in which a game cannot be played is created when the installation member is not arranged at the predetermined position.

Here, there is known a game machine provided with a predetermined position arrangement member (decoration panel 25) that is at least displaceable (or detachable) from a predetermined position (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-104546).

According to this game machine, the predetermined position arrangement member is at least displaced (or removed) from the predetermined position, so that the operator can perform a predetermined operation (for example, inspection, adjustment, replacement of parts, etc.). be done. On the other hand, by returning the predetermined position arrangement member to the predetermined position, it is possible to restrict the operator or the player from performing a predetermined operation.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is a possibility that the predetermined position arrangement member may be forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position. If the predetermined-position member is forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position, the portion where the predetermined-position member should originally be disposed is released, which may cause a game involving cheating. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, when the predetermined position arrangement member is not arranged at the predetermined position, a state in which the game cannot be played is created, thereby suppressing the playing of the game involving cheating. can.

In the case of the pachinko machine 1, for example, the state in which the game machine cannot operate means a state in which at least game balls are not allowed to flow into the game area. Therefore, even if the game ball can be shot, if the shot game ball does not flow into the game area, it corresponds to the state where the game is not performed. For example, in the case of a slot machine, it means a state in which a coin cannot be inserted, or a state in which the operating lever cannot be operated regardless of whether or not a coin can be inserted.

In the gaming machine C1, the gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the game disabling means disables the game by regulating the flow of game balls into the game area.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the game disabling means disables the game by regulating the flow of game balls into the game area. By avoiding the ball from entering the ball entrance of the game area, it is possible to suppress the playing of a game involving cheating. In addition, when a player who is not involved in a fraudulent act plays a game unintentionally, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the game cannot be played.

The gaming machine C2 comprises a shooting means for shooting game balls according to the player's operation, and a guide path for guiding the game balls shot by the shooting means to the game area, wherein the game disabling means A game machine characterized in that when the predetermined position arrangement member is not arranged at the predetermined position, the game is disabled by restricting passage of the game ball through the guide path. C3.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, the game disabling means restricts the game ball from passing through the guideway when the predetermined position arrangement member is not arranged at the predetermined position. This makes it impossible to play the game, so that the shot game ball can be returned to the shooting device or the lower tray. In other words, when a player who is not involved in the fraudulent act plays the game unintentionally, it is possible to make the player easily aware that the game cannot be played, and to avoid giving such a player a disadvantage. .

In the gaming machine C3, the game disabling means includes a protruding member that protrudes into the guideway so as to be visible when the predetermined position arrangement member is not arranged at the predetermined position, and protrudes into the guideway. The game machine C4 is characterized in that the projecting member restricts the passage of the game ball through the guide path, thereby disabling the game.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3, the game disabling means is provided with a protruding member that protrudes visibly into the guideway when the predetermined position arrangement member is not arranged at the predetermined position. Since the passage of the game ball in the guideway is restricted by the protruding member that protrudes into the guideway, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the game cannot be played.

In addition, the protruding member is located in the vicinity of the return ball prevention member (a member disposed at the end of the guide path to prevent the game ball released to the game area from returning to the guide path) (10 times the diameter of the game ball). It is preferable to dispose at a distance of twice or less). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for a player watching the destination of the game ball shot from the shooting means to recognize the presence of the protruding member.

In the game machine C4, the guide path is curved in an arc shape, and the protruding member is disposed inside the curved guide path curved in the arc shape and outside the guide path. A game machine C5 characterized in that a non-formation area of the protruding member is formed.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4, the guideway is formed to be curved in an arc shape, and the protruding member is disposed inside the curve of the guideway curved in an arc shape and guides the guideway. Since the non-formed area of the projecting member is formed on the curved outside of the path, the game ball guided to the guide path can be passed through the outside of the curve, that is, the non-formed area of the projecting member by centrifugal force. Therefore, it is possible to suppress jumping of the game ball.

That is, even when the protruding member is retracted (not protruded), a step is formed between the guide path and the protruding member due to assembly tolerances and dimensional tolerances of the parts. Therefore, when the game ball guided to the guideway passes through the steps, there is a risk of jumping. In this case, not only is the stable inflow of the game ball into the game area hindered, but there is a risk that the bouncing game ball will collide with the glass of the glass frame and damage it. On the other hand, if it is possible to pass through the non-formation area of the protruding member, the influence of the step can be suppressed, and the jumping of the game ball can be suppressed.

The gaming machine C1 is provided with an operation handle operated by a player to shoot a game ball, and the game disabling means is configured to perform the operation when the predetermined position arrangement member is not arranged at the predetermined position. The game machine C6 is characterized in that it is impossible to play a game by restricting the operation of the handle.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the game disabling means regulates the operation of the operation handle when the predetermined position arrangement member is not arranged at the predetermined position, thereby preventing the game from being played. Since it is impossible to play, it is possible to avoid the game ball from entering the ball entrance of the game area and suppress the game involving cheating. In addition, when a player who is not involved in a fraudulent act plays a game unintentionally, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the game cannot be played.

In the game machine C4, a first frame member and a second frame member attached to the first frame member so as to be openable and closable are provided, and the predetermined position arrangement member is the first frame member or the second frame member. By disposing the second frame member relative to the first frame member, the predetermined position member is allowed to be displaced at least from the predetermined position, and the game The disabling means causes the protruding member to protrude by the action when the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member when the predetermined position arrangement member is not arranged at the predetermined position. A gaming machine C7 characterized by:

The game machine C6 comprises a first frame member and a second frame member attached to the first frame member so as to be openable and closable, and the predetermined position arrangement member is the first frame member or the second frame member. By disposing the second frame member relative to the first frame member, the predetermined position member is allowed to be displaced at least from the predetermined position, and the game The disabling means restricts the operation of the operating handle by the action when the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member when the predetermined position arrangement member is not arranged at the predetermined position. A gaming machine C8 characterized by:

According to the game machine C7 or C8, in addition to the effects of the game machine C5 or C6, the projection of the projecting member or the regulation of the operation of the operating handle is effective when the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a drive source for restricting the projection of the projecting member or the operation of the operating handle, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, in order to at least displace the predetermined position member from the predetermined position, it is necessary to open the second frame member with respect to the first frame member. When displaced, the operation of closing the second frame member with respect to the first frame member can always be performed. Therefore, when the predetermined position arrangement member is forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position and the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member, it is possible to reliably create a state in which the game cannot be played.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Handle Protruding Member 9720 as an Example>
a first frame member, a second frame member attached to the first frame member so as to be openable and closable, a third member disposed at a predetermined position of one of the first frame member and the second frame member; and wherein the third member is formed to be displaceable at least from the predetermined position, wherein the third member is moved to the predetermined position by opening the second frame member with respect to the first frame member and when the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member in a state where the third member is not arranged at the predetermined position, a predetermined notification is made. A gaming machine D1 characterized by:

Here, it comprises a first frame, a second frame attached to the first frame so as to be openable and closable, and a third member (decoration panel 25) arranged on either the first frame or the second frame. , and a game machine in which the third member is at least displaceable from a predetermined position is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2001-104546).

According to this gaming machine, the third member is at least displaced (or removed) from a predetermined position, thereby enabling a predetermined operation (for example, inspection, adjustment, replacement of parts, etc.) by the operator. . On the other hand, by returning the third member to the predetermined position, it is possible to restrict the operator or the player from performing a predetermined operation.

However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that the third member may be forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position. If the third member is forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position, the portion where the third member is to be arranged is opened, and there is a risk that the opened portion will be used to commit fraud.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, by opening the second frame member with respect to the first frame member, the third member is allowed to be at least displaced from the predetermined position, and the third member is When the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member in a state in which it is not arranged at the predetermined position, a predetermined notification is given. It can be made to recognize forgetting to return to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the third member from forgetting to return to the predetermined position.

That is, according to the gaming machine D1, in order to at least displace the third member from the predetermined position, it is necessary to open the second frame member with respect to the first frame member. When the second frame member is at least displaced from the position, the operator can always perform the operation of closing the second frame member with respect to the first frame member as an essential work. Therefore, in one of the procedures that the worker must always perform to close the second frame member, the predetermined notification is performed, so that the worker can easily recognize that the third member has been forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position. .

In the game machine D1, the predetermined notification is performed by projecting a predetermined member outward from the first frame member or the second frame member.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the predetermined notification is performed by projecting a predetermined member outward from either the first frame member or the second frame member. In relation to the protrusion of the predetermined member, the operator can be made to recognize that the third member has forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position.

In the game machine D2, the game machine D3 is characterized in that the projection of the predetermined member from the second frame member is started at least during an operation of closing the second frame member with respect to the first frame member.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects of the game machine D2, the predetermined member starts to protrude from the second frame member at least during the operation of closing the second frame member with respect to the first frame member. , the projection of the predetermined member can be easily recognized by the operator. For example, when a predetermined member protrudes from the second frame member after the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member, the worker's consciousness is already directed to the next work at that time. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize that the predetermined member protrudes from the second frame member. On the other hand, during the closing operation, since there is a high possibility that the worker's awareness is directed toward the second frame member, at least the worker can easily recognize that the predetermined member has started to protrude.

In the game machine D2 or D3, the predetermined member is arranged on the front surface of the second frame member, and protrudes from the second frame member by tilting the upper side forward with the lower side as a fulcrum. A gaming machine D4 characterized by:

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of the game machine D2 or D3, the predetermined member is arranged on the front surface of the second frame member, and tilts the upper side forward with the lower side as the fulcrum, thereby Since it projects from the second frame member, the projection of the predetermined member from the front surface of the second frame member can be easily recognized by the operator who closes the second frame member.

In the gaming machine D4, the second frame member is pivotally supported so that one side in the width direction can be opened and closed with respect to the first frame member, and the predetermined member is disposed on the other side in the width direction of the second frame member. A gaming machine D5 characterized by:

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of the game machine D3, the second frame member is pivotally supported so that one side in the width direction can be opened and closed with respect to the first frame member, and the predetermined member is the second frame member. Since it is disposed on the other side in the width direction, it is possible to make it easier for the worker to come into contact with the predetermined member when performing the operation of closing the second frame member with respect to the first frame member. That is, when closing the second frame member, the operator operates (by hand) the other side in the width direction of the second frame member opposite to the side supported by the first frame member. By arranging the predetermined member on the other side, the predetermined member that tilts forward and protrudes to the front surface of the second frame member can be easily brought into contact with the operator. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the operator to recognize that the third member has forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position.

In the gaming machine D3, the second frame member is pivotally supported so that one side in the width direction can be opened and closed with respect to the first frame member, and the predetermined member is disposed on the other side in the width direction of the second frame member. A gaming machine D6 characterized in that

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, the second frame member is pivotally supported so that one side in the width direction can be opened and closed with respect to the first frame member, and the predetermined member is the second frame member. Since it is disposed on the other side in the width direction, when a worker performs an operation of closing the second frame member with respect to the first frame member, the worker can easily recognize that the predetermined member is protruding. can do. That is, when closing the second frame member, the operator operates (by hand) the other side in the width direction of the second frame member opposite to the side supported by the first frame member. By arranging the predetermined member on the other side, it is possible to make it easier to press the projecting tip of the predetermined member against the operator's hand. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the operator to recognize that the third member has forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position.

It should be noted that the predetermined member may protrude from the operation handle for adjusting the intensity of shooting the game ball. When the second frame member is to be closed with respect to the first frame member, the operator often operates the operation handle (push it in manually). can be made easier to apply.

A gaming machine D7, which is a gaming machine D2 or D3, further comprising an operation handle operated by a player to shoot a game ball, wherein the predetermined member protrudes from the operation handle.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects of the game machine D2 or D3, the predetermined member protrudes from the operating handle, so that the player can easily recognize the protrusion of the predetermined member from the operating handle. can be done.

A game machine D8 in the game machine D7, wherein the predetermined member protrudes from the front of the operation handle.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects of the game machine D7, the predetermined member protrudes from the front of the operation handle, so that the operation of the operation handle by the player can be prevented by the predetermined member. can. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the protrusion from the operating handle.

In the game machines D2 to D8, the predetermined member protruding from the second frame member can return to the state before the projection by arranging the third member at the predetermined position. A game machine D9.

According to the game machine D9, in any one of the game machines D2 to D8, the third member is arranged at a predetermined position, so that the predetermined member protruding from the second frame member can return to the state before the projection. That is, unless the third member is returned to the predetermined position, the predetermined member is maintained in a state of protruding from the second frame member, so that forgetting to return the third member to the predetermined position can be suppressed.

In any one of game machines D2 to D9, the predetermined member protrudes from the second frame member by directly or indirectly acting on the first frame member to close the second frame member. A gaming machine D10 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D2 to D9, the operation of closing the second frame member is directly or indirectly acted on the first frame member, thereby achieving a predetermined Since the member protrudes from the second frame member, it is not necessary to separately provide a drive source for protruding such a predetermined member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, in order to at least displace the third member from the predetermined position, it is necessary to open the second frame member with respect to the first frame member. Alternatively, the operation of closing the second frame member with respect to the first frame member can always be performed. Therefore, when the third member is forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position and the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member, a state in which the predetermined member protrudes from the second frame member can be reliably formed.

The game machine D11 is characterized in that the game machine D1 is provided with a panel member arranged on the second frame member and for displaying information, and the predetermined notification is performed by displacing the panel member.

According to the game machine D11, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, since the predetermined notification is performed by displacing the panel member, the operator is asked to return the third member in association with the displacement of the panel member. Forgetfulness can be recognized.

In particular, if the panel member is displaced, it is possible to prevent the player's game from being hindered (playing difficult). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being spoiled.

The information displayed on the panel member includes, for example, the model of the gaming machine, specs, images of characters, and the like. In other words, the form of display is not limited to characters, and may be arbitrary such as photographs, pictures, and graphs.

In the game machine D11, the game D12 is characterized in that the predetermined notification displaces the panel member so that at least a part of the panel member is invisible.

According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D11, the predetermined notification displaces the panel member so that at least a portion of the panel member is invisible, so that the panel member is displaced. It is possible to make the operator easily recognize that the panel member has been displaced by increasing the difference from the state before the displacement. As a result, the operator can more reliably recognize that the third member has been forgotten to be returned.

In the game machine D12, a fourth member is provided, and the predetermined notification is a state in which at least a portion of the panel member is made invisible by displacing at least a portion of the panel member toward the back side of the fourth member. A gaming machine D13 characterized by forming

According to the gaming machine D13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D12, the predetermined notification displaces at least a part of the panel member to the back side of the fourth member, and utilizes the shielding by the fourth member. At least a portion of the panel member can reliably form an invisible state. Therefore, the operator can easily recognize that the panel member has been displaced, and the operator can more reliably recognize that the third member has not been returned.

In the game machine D12, the panel member is formed to be deformable, and the predetermined notification is made by deforming the panel member as the panel member is displaced, so that at least a part of the panel member is invisible. A gaming machine D14 characterized by forming.

According to the game machine D14, in addition to the effects of the game machine D12, the predetermined notification deforms the panel member as the panel member is displaced, so that at least a part of the panel member is invisible. In addition to making it easier for the operator to recognize that the panel member has been displaced, the space required for displacing the panel member (the space required for receiving the displaced panel member) can be reduced. Therefore, the installation space for other members can be secured accordingly.

In addition, as a mode of deformation of the panel member, for example, the panel member is formed from a flexible material, and the panel member is bent (for example, curved or bent) when pressed against another member. A mode in which a panel member formed in a bellows shape (a shape in which mountain folds and valley folds are repeated) and pressed against another member is folded, the panel member is divided into a plurality of divided bodies, and the divided bodies are separated from each other. are displaceably connected, and the divided bodies of the panel member pressed against another member are displaced relative to each other.

In the game machine D12, the game machine D15 is characterized in that the predetermined notification is performed by projecting the panel member outward from the second frame member.

According to the game machine D15, in addition to the effects of the game machine D12, the predetermined notification is performed by projecting the panel member outward from the second frame member, so that the panel member is displaced. can be easily recognized by the operator, and the operator can more reliably recognize that the third member has been forgotten to be returned.

In any one of the game machines D11 to D15, after the second frame member is released with respect to the first frame member from the state in which the predetermined notification is performed, the second frame member is opened with respect to the first frame member. The game machine D16 is characterized in that when the frame member is closed, the third member is arranged at the predetermined position.

According to the gaming machine D16, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D11 to D15, after the second frame member is released with respect to the first frame member from the state where the predetermined notification is performed, When the second frame member is closed with respect to the member, the third member is arranged at the predetermined position, so that the work burden on the operator can be reduced.

That is, the fact that the predetermined notification has been made means that the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member while the third member is not arranged at the predetermined position. The present invention requires three steps of opening the second frame member with respect to the frame member, arranging the third member in a predetermined position, and then closing the second frame member with respect to the first frame member. Therefore, the operator can omit the step of arranging the third member in a predetermined position, and the operator only has to perform two steps of opening and closing the second frame member with respect to the first frame member. good. Therefore, the work burden on the worker can be reduced accordingly.

Also, an operator who recognized a predetermined notification (displacement of the panel member) opened the second frame member with respect to the first frame member. is not grasped, the third member can be placed at the predetermined position by closing the second frame member with respect to the first frame member. That is, the third member can be returned to the predetermined position without the operator intentionally working.

In the game machine D16, after the second frame member is opened with respect to the first frame member from the state in which the predetermined notification is performed, the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member. and the third member is arranged at the predetermined position, and the panel member is displaced to the arrangement before the predetermined notification is performed.

According to the gaming machine D17, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D16, after the second frame member is released with respect to the first frame member from the state where the predetermined notification is performed, the second frame member is opened with respect to the first frame member. When the second frame member is closed, not only is the third member placed (returned) to a predetermined position, but also the panel member is displaced to the position before the predetermined notification is performed, so that the worker's work is reduced accordingly. You can reduce the burden. In addition, the panel member can be returned to the initial position (placement before the predetermined notification is given) even if the operator does not work intentionally.

In any one of the game machines D11 to D17, the panel member is displaced by directly or indirectly acting on the first frame member to close the second frame member. Game machine D18.

According to the game machine D18, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D11 to D17, the action of closing the second frame member is directly or indirectly acted on the first frame member, and the panel member is displaced, there is no need to separately provide a drive source for displacing the panel member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, in order to at least displace the third member from the predetermined position, it is necessary to open the second frame member with respect to the first frame member. Alternatively, the operation of closing the second frame member with respect to the first frame member can always be performed. Therefore, when the third member is forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position and the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member, the state in which the panel member is displaced can be reliably formed.

A game machine K1, wherein the game machine is a slot machine in any one of the game machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C8 and D1 to D18. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A game machine K2, wherein the game machine is a pachinko game machine in any one of the game machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C8 and D1 to D18. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

A game machine K3 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C8 and D1 to D18, the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
8002 outer frame (first frame)
8003, 11003, 12003, 13003, 14003 Game machine main part (second frame)
4,9004 inner frame (first frame)
5 Outer frame (second frame)
9005, 10005, 11005, 12005, 13005, 14005 Front door (second frame)
166a-166c hook member (locking device)
27 hook receiving member (locking device)
32 game ball launching mechanism (shooting means)
42 guide rail (taxiway)
51 operation handle 7511f insertion piece (deformation imparting portion)
520 panel member (target member, predetermined position arrangement member)
4520 Panel member (third member, target member, predetermined position member)
4530 Top plate (third member, predetermined position member)
540, 3540 Interposed plate (third member, predetermined position member)
6540 slide plate (third member, predetermined position member)
560, 2560, 3560, 7560, 8560, 9560, 13560 lock member (operation member)
562b shaft (rotating shaft)
570, 3570 Lever member (displacement member)
3580 One-way clutch (prohibited means)
8710 Launch regulation member (game disabling means)
8713 Protruding member 9720 Handle protruding member (game disabling means)
9724 projecting member (predetermined member)
10740 Decorative member (predetermined member)
SP1 torsion spring (biasing member)
SP2 compression spring (biasing member)
SP3 compression spring (biasing member)
PE gaming area

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine comprising a first frame, a second frame attached to the first frame so as to be openable and closable, and a third member disposed on either the first frame or the second frame. , there is a gaming machine in which the third member is at least displaceable from a predetermined position (Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-100994 A

However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that the third member is forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing the third member from forgetting to return to a predetermined position.

In order to achieve this object, a game machine according to claim 1 comprises a first frame member, a second frame member attached to the first frame member so as to be openable and closable, and a third member disposed at a predetermined position on one of the members, the third member being formed to be at least displaceable from the predetermined position, and the second frame relative to the first frame member; An operation member is provided that is operable in at least a first position or a second position when the member is opened, and the third member is operated by operating the operation member from the first position to the second position. is allowed to displace at least from the predetermined position, and the third member is arranged at the predetermined position, so that the operation member can be operated from the second position to the first position, and the operation Closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is restricted at least in a state where the member is not operated to the first position.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, it is possible to prevent forgetting to return the third member to the predetermined position.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine; FIG. Fig. 4 is a front perspective view of the upper portion of the front door; Fig. 3 is a rear perspective view of the upper portion of the front door; Fig. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper portion of the front door; Fig. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper portion of the front door; It is an exploded front perspective view of a locking member. 11(a) is a front view of the rear member viewed in the direction of arrow XI in FIG. 8, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear member taken along line XIb-XIb in FIG. 11(a). 12(a) is a front view of the rear member viewed in the direction of arrow XI in FIG. 8, and (b) is a sectional view of the rear member taken along line XIIb-XIIb in FIG. 12(a). 13(a) is a front view of the rear member viewed in the direction of arrow XI in FIG. 8, and (b) is a sectional view of the rear member taken along line XIIIb-XIIIb in FIG. 13(a). 14(a) is a front view of the rear member viewed in the direction of arrow XI in FIG. 8, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear member taken along line XIVb-XIVb in FIG. 14(a). Fig. 3 is a rear perspective view of the upper portion of the front door; Fig. 3 is a rear perspective view of the upper portion of the front door; It is a top surface schematic diagram of the game machine main part. (a) is a top view of a locking member in a second embodiment, (b) is a side view of the locking member as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18 (a), and (c) is a 18(b) is a front view of the lock member as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIc, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the lock member taken along line XVIIId-XVIIId of FIG. 18(a). 19(a) is a front view of the rear member viewed in the direction of arrow XI in FIG. 8, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear member taken along line XIXb-XIXb in FIG. 19(a). (a) is a front view of the back member as viewed in the direction of arrow XI in FIG. 8, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back member taken along line XXb-XXb in FIG. 20(a). 21(a) is a front view of the rear member viewed in the direction of arrow XI in FIG. 8, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear member taken along line XXIb-XXIb in FIG. 21(a). 22(a) is a front view of the rear member viewed in the direction of arrow XI in FIG. 8, and (b) is a sectional view of the rear member taken along line XXIIb-XXIIb in FIG. 22(a). It is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the inner frame and the front door. (a) to (c) are top views of the inner frame and the front door for explaining state transitions when the front door is closed with respect to the inner frame. 24(a) to 24(c) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame and the front door along lines XXVa-XXVa to XXVc-XXVc of FIGS. 24(a) to 24(c). It is a top view of the game machine main part in 3rd Embodiment. (a) is a partial cross-sectional top view of the one-way clutch and the connecting member when the lock member is slid to the initial position; (b) is a one-way clutch and the connecting member when the lock member is slid to the release position; It is a partial cross-sectional top view of a connection member. (a) is a top view of the interposition plate, (b) is a side view of the interposition plate as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIIIb in FIG. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the interposed plate along line XXVIIIc-XXVIIIc; It is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front door. It is a partially enlarged top view of the front door. It is a top view of the game machine main part. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front door in a 4th embodiment. 33(a) is a rear view of the top plate as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIII in FIG. 32, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the top plate taken along line XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb in FIG. 33(a). (a) is a rear view of the top plate and the panel member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIII in FIG. 32, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the top plate and the panel member taken along line XXXIVb-XXXIVb of FIG. 34(a). 34(c) is a cross-sectional view of the top plate and the panel member taken along line XXXIVc-XXXIVc of FIG. 34(a). 35(a) is a front view of the back member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXV in FIG. 32, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back member taken along line XXXVb-XXXVb in FIG. 35(a). 36(a) is a front view of the rear member viewed in the direction of arrow XXXV in FIG. 32, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear member taken along line XXXVIb-XXXVIb in FIG. 36(a). 37(a) is a front view of the back member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXV in FIG. 32, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back member taken along line XXXVIIb-XXXVIIb in FIG. 37(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper part of the front door in 5th Embodiment. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the main part of the game machine in a state where the lock member is slid to the first position. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the gaming machine in a state where the lock member is slid to the first position; FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the gaming machine in a state where the lock member is slid to the first position; (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the main part of the game machine in a state where the lock member is slid to the second position. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the game machine in a state where the lock member is slid to the second position; FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the game machine in a state where the lock member is slid to the second position; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper part of the front door in 6th Embodiment. (a) is a top view of the slide plate, (b) is a side view of the slide plate viewed in the direction of the arrow XLVIb in FIG. 46(a), and (c) is a XLVIc- 46(d) is a cross-sectional view of the slide plate taken along line XLVIc, and FIG. 46(d) is a cross-sectional view of the slide plate taken along line XLVId-XLVId in FIG. 46(b). (a) is a top view of the front door in which the slide plate and the lock member are slid to the shielding position and the first position, respectively, and (b) is the slide plate and the lock member to the open position and the second position, respectively; Fig. 10 is a top view of the front door in a state of being slid to the right; Fig. 47(a) is a cross-sectional view of the front door taken along line XLVIII-XLVIII of Fig. 47(a); FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the front door in a state where the locking member has been slid to the second position from the state shown in FIG. 48; Fig. 47(b) is a cross-sectional view of the front door taken along line LI-LI of Fig. 47(b); It is a partial expanded sectional view of an inner frame and a front door in a 7th embodiment. FIG. 22 is an exploded front perspective view of the main part of the game machine in the eighth embodiment; (a) is a front view of the inner frame, and (b) is a sectional view of the inner frame taken along line LIIIb-LIIIb of FIG. 53(a). (a) is a front perspective exploded view of a lock member, (b) is a side view of the lock member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the lock member taken along line LIVc-LIVc in FIG. 54(b). be. (a) is a front perspective view of the outer frame, (b) is a front view of the outer frame, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the folding member taken along line LVc-LVc in FIG. 55(b). . (a) to (d) are top views of the pachinko machine in each state of the action of closing the main part of the gaming machine opened from the outer frame. (a) and (b) are sectional views of an inner frame. (a) is a front view of the main part of the gaming machine, and (b) is a sectional view of the main part of the gaming machine taken along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb of FIG. 58(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of the main part of the game machine in the ninth embodiment. (a) is a rear view of the main part of the gaming machine, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the gaming machine taken along line LXb-LXb of FIG. 60(a). (a) to (d) are top views of the main part of the game machine in each state of the operation of closing the front door opened from the inner frame. 61(a) is a rear view of the front door viewed in the direction of arrow VXIa in FIG. 61(b), and FIG. 61(b) is a rear view of the front door viewed in the direction of arrow VXIIb in FIG. 61(d). 62(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front door along line LXIIa-LXIIa in FIG. 62(a), and FIG. 62(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front door along line LXIIIb-LXIIIb in FIG. 62(b). (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the handle before the protruding member protrudes, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the handle after the protruding member protrudes. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the main part of the gaming machine in the tenth embodiment; (a) is a top view of the main part of the gaming machine, and (b) is a schematic side view of the main part of the gaming machine. FIG. 66(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view taken along line LXVII-LXVII of FIG. 66(a). (a) is a top view of the decorative member, (b) is a rear view of the decorative member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the decorative member taken along LXVIIIc-LXVIIIc in FIG. 68(b). (a) to (d) are top views of the main part of the game machine in each state of the operation of closing the front door opened from the inner frame. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the gaming machine along line LXXa-LXXa in FIG. 69(b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the gaming machine along line LXXb-LXXb in FIG. 69(d). be. It is a front view of the upper part of the front door in 11th Embodiment. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the upper portion of the front door; It is a top view of the game machine main part. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic views of the main part of the game machine taken along line LXXIVa-LXXIVa in FIG. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the main part of the gaming machine. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the main part of the gaming machine along line LXXVIa-LXXVIa in FIG. 75(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the main part of the gaming machine along line LXXVIb-LXXVIb in FIG. 75(b). It is a diagram. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the main part of the gaming machine. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the main part of the gaming machine in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 78(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the main part of the game machine taken along line LXXIX-LXXIX of FIG. 78(b). FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the upper portion of the front door in the thirteenth embodiment; It is a top view of the game machine main part. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the main part of the gaming machine along line LXXXIIa-LXXXIIa in FIG. 81, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the main part of the gaming machine along line LXXXIIb-LXXXIIb in FIG. 82(a). , (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the main part of the gaming machine taken along line LXXXIIc-LXXXIIc in FIG. 82(b). (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the main part of the gaming machine. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the main part of the gaming machine. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the main part of the gaming machine. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the upper portion of the front door in the fourteenth embodiment; (a) is a top view of the main part of the gaming machine, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the main part of the gaming machine taken along line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87(a). (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the main part of the gaming machine.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 70, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 1 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. and an inner frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided serves as an opening and closing axis. A frame 4 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 5 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported toward the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 8 is arranged on the back side of the front door 5, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16. - 特許庁

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front door 5 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front door 5 (for example, at corners). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 1, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The indicator lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of indicating whether prize balls are being dispensed and when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right side electric decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 5c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball is released in accordance with the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball into the front surface of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and a general winning prize. A mouth 63, a first winning mouth 64, a second winning mouth 640, a third winning mouth 82, a variable winning device 65, a first through gate 66, a second through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. The peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood by pasting together thin plate materials, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the third winning opening 82, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is placed inside the outer rail 77. An arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82. It is configured. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while the ball enters the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82. In this case, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the process of changing probability, shortening the working hours, or normal, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the process of changing by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, or blue), and by combining the emitted colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. can.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when any one of the first prize winning port 64, the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82 wins. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the type of the big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased, and the balls are likely to enter the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 and a game state in which the ball is likely to enter the third winning hole 82. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in normal mode, it means that the game is in a state where the probability is not variable or the time is short (the jackpot probability and the second symbol winning probability are not increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. The amount of time that the When the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are in an open state (open state), the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are closed (closed state). A ball is more likely to enter the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82 than in the case of . Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the balls are likely to enter the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or during the time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, or the opening In addition to changing the time, a change may be made to increase the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened per hit. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. At least one of the opening time and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened per time may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time when the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened, The number of times the electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82 are released may not be changed, and only the probability of winning the second symbol may be changed to be higher than in the normal state.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displayed with variable display triggered by winning (starting winning) of any one of the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the third winning port 82. A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display of the third pattern while synchronizing, and the spheres of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided, which is composed of an LED that variably displays the second pattern with passage as a trigger.

A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be constructed using a reel or the like.

Each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, the second symbol display device displays a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)). and are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time to perform a variable display. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the second symbol attached to the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82 The first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are configured to be in an operating state (released) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, the player is given more opportunities to open the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a of the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82.例文帳に追加be able to. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a for one hit, etc. When the state is such that the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole during time saving, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the first electric role product 640a and the second electric role product 82a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The first thru gate 66 is attached to the game board in the area on the left side of the variable display unit 80 , and the second thru gate 67 is attached to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80 . The first thru gate 66 and the second thru gate 67 are configured so that a part of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls launched to the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is held up to four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B and the second pattern is displayed. A holding lamp (not shown) is also illuminated. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). can be set to Also, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Also, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When the ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 640 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. A third prize winning port 82 is arranged on the right side of the first prize winning port 64 when viewed from the front. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second winning hole switch is turned on. As a result, the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) draws a lottery for a big win, and the first symbol display device 37B displays the result of the lottery.

Also, the first prize winning port 64, the second prize winning port 640, and the third prize winning port 82 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82 are the same, but the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82 are changed. A different number, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 is 3, and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82. may be configured as five.

A first electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning hole 640. - 特許庁The first electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. there is On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the first electric accessory 640a is displayed. It will be in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball will easily enter the second winning port 640 .

In addition, the third prize winning port 82 is accompanied by a second electric accessory 82a. The second electric accessory 82a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the second electric accessory 82a is in a closed state (reduced state), which makes it difficult for the ball to enter the third winning opening 82. ing. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the second through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the second electric accessory 82a is displayed. It will be in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball will easily enter the third prize winning port 82 .

As described above, during the probability variation and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short, so in the variation display of the second symbol "○ , and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened becomes longer than during the normal time during the variable probability or the time saving. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the balls are more likely to enter the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 during the variable probability or the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 and when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82, the probability of winning the jackpot is high even in a low probability state. state is the same. However, the probability of winning the 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82, and the ball enters the first prize winning port 64. It is set higher than if you win a prize. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a like the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82, and the ball can always win a prize. state.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessories associated with the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82 are often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640 and the third prize winning port 82. A ball is shot toward the first prize winning port 64 with no electric accessory so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called “left hitting”), and by winning the first prize winning port 64 It is advantageous for the player to get many chances of the big win lottery and to aim for the big win.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the second through gate 67, the second electric accessory 82a attached to the third winning port 82 is likely to be in an open state, and the third winning port 82 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is shot toward the third winning hole 82 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right hitting”), and is passed through the second through gate 67. It is advantageous for the player to set the second electric accessory 82a in an open state and to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the third prize winning opening 82.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

It should be noted that any of the first thru gate 66 and the second thru gate 67 may draw a winning lottery for a symbol other than the second symbol when the ball passes through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67. , the second electric accessory 82a associated with the third winning opening 82 or the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 may be displaced to the open state. In this case, since the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, the symbols to be drawn are different, so the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. will be selected one by one.

As a result, for example, when the second symbol is selected to win, the second electric accessory 82a is opened. When a win is selected in the lottery of two symbols, the second electric accessory 82a is opened, and when the ball is hit to the left and passed through the first through gate 66, a symbol different from the second symbol is drawn and the second symbol is selected. A game state in which the first electric accessory 640a is opened when winning is selected in a pattern different from the pattern can be set.

Therefore, if the game state is such that it is easy to win the lottery of the second symbol during the variable probability, and the game state is such that the symbol different from the second symbol is easy to win during the time saving, during the variable probability, the second through gate 67 is hit to the right. A game state in which the second electric accessory 82a is passed to open the second electric accessory 82a to easily win the ball, and during the time saving, the first electric accessory is released to open the first electric accessory to pass the first through gate 66 and win the ball. It is possible to make a game state that is easy to play. Therefore, since the game states during normal, during shortening of time, and during variable probability can be set to different game states, the player can enjoy each game state.

In addition, if the second electric accessory 82a is opened when a hit is selected for the second symbol, hitting the ball to the right to pass through the second through gate 67 will result in a different result from the second symbol. A pattern is drawn, and when a win is selected in the drawing of a pattern different from the second pattern, the first electric accessory 640a is opened, and when the ball is struck left and passed through the first through gate 66, the second pattern is obtained. is drawn and a game state in which the second electric accessory 82a is opened when a win is selected in the second symbol can be made.

In this case, when the ball passes through the second through gate 67 by striking to the right, the first electric accessory is opened and the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640 regardless of whether the probability is variable or the time is shortened. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 by striking to the left, the second electric accessory 82a is opened to make the game state in which the ball easily enters the third prize winning port 82.例文帳に追加Therefore, the player needs to change the way of hitting from right to left or from left to right. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because the way of hitting can be changed at any time.

A variable prize winning device 65 is provided on the right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of any one of the first prize winning port 64, the second prize winning port 64, and the third prize winning port 82 becomes a big win, a predetermined time (fluctuation time) is set. After the lapse of time, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is lit so as to become the stop symbol of the big win, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, thereby winning the big win. Occurrence is indicated. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the balls are likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of the specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged. , the left side of the variable display device unit 80 .

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out hole 71. be. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

Main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, display controller 114, payout controller 111, launch controller 112, power supply 115, and card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100-104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover unopenably by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132, which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In main controller 110, MPU 201 performs main processing of pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display in first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display result in second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like.

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, changes the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 1, showing a state in which the inner frame 4 and the front door 5 are opened with respect to the outer frame 2 (rotated forward). 5, the configuration inside the game area PE of the pachinko machine 1 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 5, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 (frame member) forming the outer shell of the pachinko machine 1 and a main part of the game machine attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be rotatable forward. 3. The outer frame 2 is formed by connecting wooden plates on four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. A pachinko machine 1 is installed in a game facility by fixing an outer frame 2 to an island facility.

The game machine main part 3 includes an inner frame 4 (back unit) as a base body, a front door 5 arranged in front of the inner frame 4, and a back pack unit 6 arranged behind the inner frame 4. I have. The inner frame 4 of the game machine main portion 3 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2 . Specifically, in a front view of the pachinko machine 1, the left side is the rotation base end side, the right side is the rotation tip side, and the inner frame 4 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 with the vertical direction of the rotation base end side as the rotation axis. It is rotatable forward.

A front door 5 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 4 . Specifically, the front door 5 rotates forward with respect to the inner frame 4 with the vertical direction of the rotation base end as a rotation axis, with the left side as the base end side of rotation and the right side as the front end side of rotation as viewed from the front. It is possible. A back pack unit 6 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 4, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

The front door 5 is provided so as to cover substantially the entire front side of the inner frame 4 . The front door 5 is formed with a window portion 5c through which substantially the entire game area PE, which will be described later, can be viewed from the front. The window portion 5c has a circular shape when viewed from the front, and is fitted with glass 8 having transparency.

More specifically, the front door 5 has a glass holder 9 provided so as to surround the window portion 5c. The glass holder 9 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the front door 5, and includes vertical holder portions 9a and 9b extending vertically along the left and right edges of the window portion 5c, and the lower ends of the vertical holder portions 9a and 9b. It has a horizontal holder portion 9c that connects and extends left and right. Each of the holders 9a to 9c is formed with two grooves arranged in parallel in the front and rear direction. The grooves of the vertical holder portions 9a and 9b are open upward and on the sides facing each other (that is, the central side of the window portion 5c), and the groove portion of the horizontal holder portion 9c is open upward, and both vertical holder portions 9a are open. , 9b, and the glass 8 is fitted into each of the grooves, so that the game area PE is covered with the inside and the outside in two layers.

A passage forming unit 160 is attached to the rear surface of the front door 5 . The passage forming unit 160 is molded of synthetic resin, and is formed with a front door side upper tray passage 161 leading to the upper tray 17 and a front door side lower tray passage 162 leading to the lower tray 50 . In the passage forming unit 160, a receptacle portion 163 that protrudes rearward and opens upward is formed at an upper corner portion thereof. A passage 161 and an entrance portion of a front door side lower tray passage 162 are formed. The upstream side of the front door side upper tray passage 161 and the front door side lower tray passage 162 communicates with a game ball distribution section (not shown), and the game balls entering the front door side upper tray passage 161 are guided to the upper tray 17. Then, the game ball entering the front door side lower tray passage 162 is guided to the lower tray 50. - 特許庁

A plurality of rearwardly extending hook members 166 (166a to 166c) are vertically arranged side by side on the front end of the rotation on the rear surface of the front door 5 (left side in FIG. 5). These hook members 166 are engaged with hook receiving members (not shown) provided on the inner frame 4 to constitute a locking mechanism for the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 . Hook receiving members 2a and 2b are provided on the upper and lower portions of the outer frame 2, respectively, on the right side of the outer frame 2, which faces the rotating tip side of the inner frame 4 (the right side in FIG. 5). These hook receiving members 2a and 2b constitute a locking mechanism of the inner frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. As shown in FIG.

The inner frame 4 is mainly composed of a resin base 140 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 2 . A game board accommodating portion 141 for accommodating the game board 13 is formed in substantially the central portion of the front surface of the resin base 140 . The game board housing portion 141 is recessed on the back side (rear) of the resin base 140 to define a housing space for housing the game board 13, and the game board 13 attached to the front door 5 is housed in the space. state. The game board 13 has a wooden plywood and a sheet member covering the front side of the plywood, and the front surface thereof is exposed to the front side of the resin base 140 . A game area PE in which game balls flow down is formed on the exposed portion, that is, the front surface of the game board 13 .

The game board 13 is router-processed to form a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in its own thickness direction (front-rear direction). Each opening is provided with a general winning opening, a variable winning device, an operating opening, a through gate, a variable display unit, and the like. When game balls enter the general winning opening, the variable winning device and the operating opening, the game balls are detected by a detection switch, and a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out based on the detection result. In addition, a first out port 71 is provided at the bottom of the game board 13, and game balls that do not enter various prize winning ports are discharged from the game area PE through the first out port 71.例文帳に追加

The game board 13 is also provided with a large number of nails for properly distributing and adjusting the flow paths of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills. Various configurations (not shown) such as these nails and windmills divide the flow path of the game ball, and are adjusted so that the above-described general prize winning openings and the like occur with an appropriate probability.

Here, a game ball shooting mechanism 142 for shooting a game ball to the game area PE based on the operation of the operation handle 51 is provided below the game board accommodating portion 141 in the resin base 140 . More specifically, a game ball shooting mechanism 143 for installing a game ball shooting mechanism 142 is formed below the game board accommodating portion 141 in the resin base 140 .

The game ball shooting mechanism 142 installed in the game ball shooting mechanism 143 is located near the tip of the inner frame 4 when rotating. The game ball launching mechanism 142 includes a solenoid for launching a game ball placed at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail for defining the launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid, and a game ball supplied to the launch standby position. and a base plate on which these various components are mounted. there is

A game ball launching mechanism 142 (specifically a solenoid) is electrically connected to a power supply and launch control device (not shown). Based on the output of electrical signals from the power supply and the launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid moves in the direction of expansion and contraction, that is, in the rail direction of the launch rail, and the game ball placed in the launch standby position is placed in the game area PE, in detail. is launched toward the guide rail 75 attached to the game board 13 .

The guide rail 75 is a member for guiding the game ball and partitioning the game area PE. The guide rail 75 forms a guide passage 75a for the game ball by an area sandwiched between two rails (an outer rail 77 and an inner rail 76) arranged to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. It is The guide passage 75a has an entrance portion 75b opened to the tip side of the launch rail (the lower end side of the game board 13) and an exit portion 75c located above the game area PE. The game ball fired from the game ball shooting mechanism 142 based on the operation of the solenoid moves in the order of the shooting rail (inner frame 4)→guide passage 75a (entrance portion 75b→outlet portion 75c), and is guided by the guide rail 75. It is guided to the game area PE of the game board 13 which is partitioned.

The launching rail (game ball launching mechanism 142) and the guide rail 75 arranged on the inner frame 4 are diagonally opposed to each other with the lower edge of the game board 13 sandwiched between the entrance portion 75b of the guide rail 75 and the leading end portion of the launching rail. are arranged to In other words, both rails are arranged such that the entrance portion 75b (specifically, the specific portion) of the guide rail 75 and the tip portion of the launch rail are laterally displaced near the lower edge of the game board 13 . As a result, both rails are brought closer to the lower edge of the game board 13, and a gap of a predetermined distance is formed between the entrance portion 75b of the guide rail 75 and the launch rail.

A foul ball passage 165 (see FIG. 2) is arranged below the gap thus formed. The foul ball passage 165 is formed integrally with the passage forming unit 160 of the front door 5 . If a game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 142 does not reach the game area PE and goes back in the guide passage 75a as a foul ball, the foul ball enters the foul ball passage 165 through the gap. becomes. The foul ball passage 165 communicates with the front door side lower tray passage 162, and the game ball entering the foul ball passage 165 is discharged to the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 1). This suppresses interference between the foul ball and the game ball to be launched next.

A passage forming portion 144 is provided on the left side of the firing rail in the resin base 140 so as to pass through the resin base 140 in the front-rear direction. The passage forming section 144 has a main body side upper tray passage and a main body side lower tray passage, and the upstream side of the main body side upper tray passage and the main body side lower tray passage communicates with the game ball distribution section. Further, a socket portion 163 of a passage forming unit 160 attached to the front door 5 is inserted below the passage forming portion 144, and a front door side upper tray passage 161 is arranged below the body side upper tray passage. A front door side lower tray passage 162 is arranged below the main body side lower tray passage.

On the inner frame 4 and the back surface of the game board 13, various control boards are arranged so as to be arranged vertically and horizontally or overlapped in the front and back, and a game ball supply device for supplying game balls. , a protective cover 35 made of synthetic resin, and the like are attached. That is, a tank 130 opened upward is provided at the top of the protective cover 150, and the tank 130 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island facility of the game facility. Then, the required number of game balls are appropriately paid out by a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor (not shown). Game balls paid out from the payout device are supplied to an upper tray 17 (see FIG. 1) through a payout passage or the like.

Hinge 18 is attached to the upper end and the lower end of the inner frame 4 on the front side of the rotation proximal end (left side in FIG. 2). The hinge 18 is provided with a pin 18d. On the other hand, on the front face of the outer frame 2 , a receiving metal fitting 25 is attached at a position facing the hinge 18 on the rotation proximal end side (left side in FIG. 2 ). A shaft hole 25c is formed in the bracket 25, and a pin 18d of the hinge 18 is inserted into the shaft hole 25c. (not shown). As a result, the inner frame 4 and the front door 5 are supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be able to be opened and closed, respectively, using the pin 18d as a pivot shaft.

Next, referring to FIGS. 6 to 17, a mechanism (hereinafter referred to as "suppression mechanism") for suppressing failure to return (forget to attach) the intervening plate 540 to the predetermined position (receiving portion 511) of the front door 5. ) will be explained.

First, the overall configuration of the suppression mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9. FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the upper portion of the front door 5, and FIG. 7 is a rear perspective view of the upper portion of the front door 5. FIG. 8 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper portion of the front door 5, and FIG. 9 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper portion of the front door 5. As shown in FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 6 to 9, the upper portion of the front door 5 includes a main body member 510 arranged on the front side, a panel member 520 accommodated in the main body member 510, and a panel member 520 arranged on the upper surface of the main body member 510. It mainly includes a top plate 530 and an intervening plate 540 provided, a back member 550 fixed to the back side of the main body member 510, and a lock member 560 and a lever member 570 arranged on the back member 550.

The main body member 510 is a member made of a light-transmitting material for constituting an electric decoration part on the front upper part of the pachinko machine 1, and a light emitting means such as an LED provided inside emits light at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. Lights up or blinks in response to changes in the game state in the game, and plays a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. On the front side of the main body member 510, at least a region corresponding to a panel member 520, which will be described later, is formed of a transparent material, and model information and the like displayed on the panel member 520 can be visually recognized through the transparent material portion. be done.

A housing portion 511 for disposing the top plate 530 and the interposition plate 540 is recessed in the upper surface of the main body member 510 . The recess depth of the accommodation portion 511 from the upper surface of the main body member 510 is the same as the upper surface of the main body member 510, the top plate 530, and the interposition plate when the top plate 530 and the interposition plate 540 are arranged in the accommodation portion 511. The depth is set so that the upper surface of 540 is flush with it.

In this case, slide grooves 511a are formed on left and right inner wall surfaces facing each other of the inner peripheral edge (inner wall surface) of the housing portion 511 . The slide groove 511a is a concave groove having a U-shaped cross section extending in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, and is engaged with the plate-like projecting pieces 531 projecting from the left and right edges of the top plate 530. As shown in FIG. As a result, the top plate 530 can be slid in the front-rear direction with respect to the body member 510, and the top plate 530 cannot be removed from the body member 510 when the back member 550 is disposed on the body member 510. Impossible.

The slide groove 511 a is also formed on the front inner wall surface of the inner peripheral edge (inner wall surface) of the accommodating portion 511 . That is, a slide groove 511a is also formed at a position extending in the left and right direction connecting the front end portions of the left and right slide grooves 511a in the inner peripheral edge of the housing portion 511. A plate-like protrusion 531 protruding from the front edge of 530 is engaged. Therefore, due to the engagement between the front slide groove 511a and the left and right slide grooves 511a and the projecting piece 531 of the top plate 530, a foreign object can be inserted through the gap between the main body member 510 and the top plate 530 to prevent fraud. can be suppressed.

A recessed portion 511c is formed in the housing portion 511 so as to be recessed downward from the bottom surface thereof. The concave portion 511c is a space for accommodating a plate-shaped panel member 520 on which information such as model information of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. It is formed. Therefore, when the panel member 520 is replaced or its position is adjusted, the top plate 530 needs to be slid rearward as described later.

Further, in the accommodating portion 511, an escape portion 511d is formed downwardly from the bottom surface thereof, and a holding portion 511e is formed on the front side of the escape portion 511d. The relief portion 511d is a concave portion for receiving the insertion tube portion 541 of the interposed plate 540 (see FIG. 12). The holding portion 511e is formed as a recess that is open on the side facing the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550, and the inner wall surface and the bottom surface of the recess hold the proximal end of the lock member 560 (base member 562) ( See Figure 11).

As described above, the top plate 530 is provided with plate-like projecting pieces 531 projecting from the edge thereof, and the left and right projecting pieces 531 are engaged with the slide grooves 511a of the main body member 510, whereby the pachinko machine can be played. A top plate 530 can be slidably displaced along the longitudinal direction of the machine 1 . In this case, the back member 550 arranged on the back surface of the main body member 510 is formed to have a height that allows interference (abutment) with the edge of the top plate 530 . As a result, when the top plate 530 is slid rearward, the top plate 530 interferes with the back member 550, and the top plate 530 cannot be removed.

The interposed plate 540 is a plate-like member interposed between the top plate 530 and the back member 550 , and is detachably arranged in the housing portion 511 of the main body member 510 . When the intervening plate 540 is removed, a space is formed between the top plate 530 and the back member 550, and the top plate 530 can be slid rearward (toward the back member 550) by the space. (See Figures 13, 14 and 16).

The intervening plate 540 is formed in a horizontally long plate shape, and an insertion tube portion 541 is formed on the bottom surface on one longitudinal end side thereof. The insertion tubular portion 541 is a portion into which the lock member 560 is inserted and removed, and is formed in a tubular shape with both ends opened. As will be described later, by inserting the lock member 560 into the insertion tube portion 541 , the interposition plate 540 can be in a state in which it cannot be removed from the main body member 510 , while the lock member 560 can be removed from the insertion tube portion 541 . Thus, a state in which the interposition plate 540 can be removed from the main body member 510 can be formed.

A plate-like protruding piece 542 protrudes from the edge portion of the interposition plate 540 on the other longitudinal end side (opposite side to the insertion tube portion 541 ). The portion 511 is engaged with the slide groove 511a. In the present embodiment, the plate thickness dimension of the projecting piece portion 542 is set to be smaller (thinner) than the plate thickness dimension of the projecting piece portion 531 of the top plate 530 . Therefore, not only is it possible to prevent a foreign object from being inserted through the gap between the main body member 510 and the interposition plate 540, and the interposition plate 540 is flipped up by the lever member 570, as will be described later. When forming a posture in which one end in the longitudinal direction is lifted (see FIGS. 12 and 15B), the projecting piece 542 can be used as a fulcrum. This stabilizes the posture of the intervening plate 540 when it is flipped up by the lever member 570 (prevents it from jumping out of the main body member 510 and falling off).

An insertion hole 551 is formed in the back member 550 at a position corresponding to the insertion tube portion 541 of the interposed plate 540, and a support shaft 552 is provided to protrude from the front side of the insertion hole 551. As shown in FIG. The insertion hole 551 is formed as a rectangular opening when viewed from the front, and the lock member 560 is inserted therethrough. A lever member 570 is rotatably supported on the support shaft 552 .

The opening dimensions (width and height dimensions) of insertion hole 551 are set smaller than the external dimensions (width and height dimensions) of projecting portion 562 a of lock member 560 . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the lock member 560 from being pulled out from the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550 to the back side.

A plate-like protruding piece 553 extending in the left-right direction is provided on the back member 550 so as to protrude from the front. The protruding piece 531 faces the bottom surface of the interposition plate 540 attached to the main body member 510, thereby preventing foreign matter from being inserted through the gap between the interposition plate 540 and the back member 550, thereby preventing tampering. can be suppressed.

The projecting piece 553 is formed at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 551 with a holding plate portion 553 a having a larger projecting dimension from the front surface of the back member 550 than other portions. The pressing plate portion 553a abuts on the upper surface of the locking member 560 when the locking member 560 is pushed to a first position, which will be described later, and protrudes to a position beyond the axis of the shaft portion 562b. Thereby, as will be described later, it is possible to prevent the locking member 560 from being bent at the first position (see FIG. 11(b)).

The locking member 560 is a rod-shaped member formed to be able to be inserted into the insertion tube portion 541 of the interposition plate 540 and the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550, and is formed to be bendable. Here, a detailed configuration of the lock member 560 will be described with reference to FIG. 10 .

10 is an exploded front perspective view of locking member 560. FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, the locking member 560 mainly includes a tip member 561 and a base member 562 connected to the base end of the tip member 561. The base member 562 has a plurality of ( In this embodiment, three projecting portions 562a are formed projecting from the outer surface.

The distal end member 561 has a reduced width on the base end side, and a shaft support hole 561a is formed in the reduced width portion. On the other hand, the base member 562 is divided into two parts in the width direction, and a shaft part 562b is protrudingly provided on the tip end side of one of the divided parts. The base member 562 is rotatably connected to the base end side of the distal end member 561 by fastening and fixing the two divided bodies with bolts BT in a state in which the shaft portion 562b is inserted into the shaft support hole 561a. . That is, the locking member 560 is formed bendable.

The protruding portions 562a are protrusions for making it impossible to pass through the insertion holes 551 of the back member 550, and are formed to protrude from the left and right side surfaces and bottom surface of the base member 562 on the base end side. That is, when the lock member 560 (tip member 561) is pulled out from the back side of the back member 550 by the operator, the projecting portion 562a is engaged with the front side of the back member 550 (see FIG. 12). (see FIG. 14), and removal of the lock member 560 can be restricted.

In a state in which the projecting portion 562a is engaged with the front surface of the back surface member 550, the lock member 560 (base member 562) is completely pulled out from the insertion tube portion 541 of the interposition plate 540, and the interposition plate 540 is detachable, and the shaft portion 562b is positioned outside the back surface of the back member 550, allowing the tip member 561 to be bent with respect to the base member 562.

In this case, the lock member 560 is disposed in a posture in which the axial direction of the shaft portion 562b and the axial support hole 561a is parallel to the horizontal direction (the direction orthogonal to the vertical direction) and the lateral direction of the front door 5. be. Therefore, when the locking member 560 (tip member 561) is pulled out from the back side of the back member 550 by an operator, the tip member 561 can be tilted downward by its own weight. That is, even if the operator does not bend the lock member 560, the lock member 560 can be bent by the action of gravity. Thereby, as will be described later, damage to the lever member 570 can be suppressed (see FIG. 17).

Returning to FIG. 6 to FIG. 9, description will be made. The lever member 570 has a shaft support hole 571 formed on its base end side, and this shaft support hole 571 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 552 of the back member 550 . It is arranged on the front side of the back member 550 in a posture facing the 551 side.

A metal torsion spring SP1 is interposed between the lever member 570 and the back member 550 in an elastically torsionally deformed state. It is always biased in the direction of rotation to lift upwards.

In this case, the lever member 570 protrudes from the bottom surface of the interposition plate 540 when the interposition plate 540 is accommodated in the accommodation portion 511 of the main body member 510 (the lock member 560 is inserted into the insertion tube portion 541). 12(b)) and is pushed downward (see FIG. 11). The tip side of the lever member 570 is flipped upward by the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP1. As a result, the interposition plate 540 can be pushed upward (see FIG. 12).

When the tip side of the lever member 570 is flipped upward, the tip side of the lever member 570 is arranged at a position facing the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550 (see FIGS. 12 to 14). As a result, the lever member 570 can restrict the movement of the lock member 560 in the pushing direction (the direction from the back side to the front side of the back member 550).

Next, the operation method of the suppression mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 11 to 14 are diagrams for explaining state transitions of the suppressing mechanism, and FIGS. 11(a) to 14(a) are front views of the back member 550 as viewed in the direction of arrow XI in FIG. 11(b) to 14(b) are cross-sectional views of the backing member 550 taken along lines XIb-XIb to XIVb-XIVb of FIGS. 11(a) to 14(a). 11(b) to 14(b), the lock member 560 is not shown in cross section, and the overall structure of the upper portion of the front door 5 is shown.

15 and 16 are rear perspective views of the upper portion of the front door 5. FIG. 15(a) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 11, the state shown in FIG. 15(b) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 12, the state shown in FIG. 16(a) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. The state shown in FIG. 16(b) corresponds to the state shown in FIG.

When replacing the panel member 520, the game machine main section 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, and the front door 5 is opened from the inner frame 4 of the game machine main section 3 (see FIG. 5). With the front door 5 opened, the lock member 560 is slid (pushed in or pulled out).

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 15(a), when the lock member 560 is pushed into the first position, the lock member 560 is inserted through the tubular insertion portion 541 of the interposed plate 540, and the tubular insertion portion 541 is inserted. The proximal end of the locking member 560 (base member 562) protruding from one end side is held in the holding portion 511e of the main body member 510, and the locking member 560 (tip member 561) protruding from the other end side of the insertion tube portion 541. is held in the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550 . Therefore, the intervening plate 540 cannot be removed from the housing portion 511 of the main body member 510 .

In this case, the upper surface and projecting portion 562a of the base member 562 of the lock member 560 are brought into contact with the inner wall surface of the holding portion 511e, thereby moving the lock member 560 vertically (vertical direction in FIG. 11) and laterally (FIG. 11). The movement of the lock member 560 in the pushing direction is restricted by the base end of the base member 562 of the lock member 560 coming into contact with the bottom surface of the holding portion 511e. . Further, the pressing plate portion 553a faces the upper surface of the lock member 560 and protrudes to a position beyond the axis of the shaft portion 562b of the lock member 560. As shown in FIG. As a result, even if the interposing plate 540 is forcibly lifted upward (upper side in FIG. 11(b)), it is possible to prevent the locking member 560 from being bent around the shaft portion 562b. That is, it is possible to prevent the intervening plate 540 from being illegally removed.

In addition, the lock member 560 is pulled out in the pull-out direction (the right side in FIG. 11(b)) until the front end (tip member 561) contacts the front surface of the inner frame 4 when the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4. so that the base end (base member 562) is held in the holding portion 511e when it is slid to the left, the length dimension thereof (the length dimension in the posture in which the tip member 561 and the base member 562 are on a straight line, Fig. 11(b) left-right dimension) is set. As a result, even when the lock member 560 is displaced in the direction of the slide operation, removal of the interposition plate 540 can be reliably restricted.

11 and 15, the locking member 560 is pulled out toward the back side of the back member 550, and when the projecting portion 562a reaches the second position where it is engaged with the front side of the back member 550, the locking member 560 is moved. is disabled from further withdrawal operations.

By this pull-out operation, the lock member 560 (base member 562) is pulled out from the insertion tube portion 541 of the interposition plate 540, and the end surface of the proximal end of the lock member 560 (base member 562) retreats to a position beyond the lever member 570. be done. That is, a space is formed above the lever member 570 .

As a result, the lever member 570 is rotated by the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP1, and the tip side thereof is flipped upward. In this case, since the contacted portion 543 of the interposing plate 540 is in contact with the upper surface of the tip side of the lever member 570, the contacted portion 543 is pushed upward by the lever member 570, thereby 12 and FIG. 15(b), one longitudinal end of the interposed plate 540 is lifted upward.

Here, when the lock member 560 is pushed into the first position, the upper surface of the interposition plate 540 is substantially flush with the upper surface of the main body member 510. On the other hand, when a worker removes the interposed plate 540 for exchanging the panel member 520, workability is deteriorated. Further, if a handle that can be gripped by the operator is provided on the upper surface of the interposed plate 540, the workability of the operator is improved, but it becomes possible to engage a jig or the like with the handle. Using the principle of leverage, the intervening plate 540 is lifted upward to facilitate the formation of a gap for fraud. Furthermore, the height of the handle reduces the space for arranging other devices (for example, a game data display device) above the main body member 510 .

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the lock member 560 is pushed into the first position, the upper surface of the intervening plate 540 is substantially flush with the upper surface of the main body member 510, thereby suppressing fraud. On the other hand, when the lock member 560 is pulled out to the second position, the one longitudinal end side of the interposition plate 540 can be lifted upward using the flip-up operation of the lever member 570 . That is, since the portion lifted upward can be grasped, the workability of removing the interposition plate 540 from the main body member 510 can be improved.

Further, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, in order to form a state in which the panel member 520 can be replaced, a plurality of operation steps (pulling out the lock member 560, removing the intervening plate 540, removing the top plate 530, and When the locking member 560 is pulled out, one longitudinal end of the interposition plate 540 is lifted, and the next operation step is to remove the interposition plate 540. can be recognized by the operator.

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 16(a), by removing the intervening plate 540 from the main body member 510, a space is created behind the top plate 530 (back side, between the top plate 530 and the back member 550). Since it is formed, the top plate 530 can be slid backward (retracted) by using this space. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 16(b), the front side (front side) of the top plate 530 is opened, and the panel member 520 can be replaced.

In the state shown in FIGS. 14 and 16(b), after the panel member 520 is replaced, the top plate 530, which has been slid backward (back side), is slid forward (front side). ). As a result, as shown in FIGS. 13 and 16A, a space is formed behind the top plate 530 (back side, between the top plate 530 and the back member 550). Install 540.

That is, the projecting piece 542 formed on the other longitudinal end of the interposition plate 540 is engaged (inserted) into the slide groove 511 a of the main body member 510 . As a result, the contacted portion 543 of the interposed plate 540 is brought into contact with (placed on) the upper surface of the lever member 570, so that the interposed plate 540 is It is disposed in the housing portion 511 of the main body member 510 in a posture in which one end in the longitudinal direction is lifted upward.

From this state (the state shown in FIGS. 12 and 15(b)), when one longitudinal end of the interposition plate 540 is pushed downward, the lever member 570 is pushed against the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP1. It is pushed downward by the contact portion 543 . When the upper surface of the interposition plate 540 is pushed down to a position where it is substantially flush with the upper surfaces of the main body member 510 and the top plate 530, the tip side of the lever member 570 is arranged below the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550. , the position where the insertion tube portion 541 of the interposition plate 540 is aligned with the holding portion 511e of the main body member 510 and the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550 (that is, the openings at both ends of the insertion tube portion 541 are aligned with the holding portion 511e and the insertion hole 551). ) are placed facing each other).

Therefore, by pushing the lock member 560 at the second position toward the first position, the base end side (base member 562) of the lock member 560 is moved to the insertion tube portion 541 of the interposed plate 540 and the main body member. The holding portions 511e of 510 are sequentially inserted to form the state shown in FIGS. 11 and 15(a). That is, a state in which the interposition plate 540 (and the top plate 530) cannot be removed from the main body member 510 is created.

When the lock member 560 is pushed to the first position, the front end face (the right face in FIG. 11(b)) is positioned closer to the front side (the left side in FIG. 11(b)) than the rear face of the back member 550. be located. Therefore, when the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 , the lock member 560 is accommodated inside the main body member 510 and the back member 550 , and the back side of the back member 550 is opened by the inner frame 4 . Since it is closed, it is impossible to operate the lock member 560 from the outside.

Next, a description will be given of the operation of suppressing the failure to return (forget to attach) the interposition plate 540 to the predetermined position (accommodating portion 511) by the suppression mechanism. In this case, reference is made to FIG. 17 in addition to FIGS. FIG. 17 is a schematic top view of the main part 3 of the game machine, in which the inner frame 4 is schematically illustrated.

Here, according to the present embodiment, the panel member 520 can be replaced by removing the intervening plate 540 and sliding the top plate 530 rearward. In this case, if the interposition plate 540 is forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position, the upper surface (accommodating portion 511) of the main body member 510 is partially opened, and there is a risk that the opened portion may be used to commit fraud.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the interposition plate 540 is removed, the lock member 560 is placed at the second position by the pullout operation, and when the lock member 560 is placed at the second position, , the locking member 560 (tip member 561 ) protrudes from the rear surface of the rear surface member 550 . Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 17( a ) and 17 ( b ), a lock member 560 is interposed between the front surface of the inner frame 4 and the back surface of the front door 5 to prevent the inner frame 4 from moving forward. Door 5 cannot be closed. This makes it possible for the operator to recognize that he/she has forgotten to return the interposition plate 540 .

In this state (a state in which the interposing plate 540 is forgotten to be returned), the tip end of the lever member 570 bounces upward to a position facing the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550 due to the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP1. The lock member 560 is raised, and the operation of pushing the lock member 560 to the first position is restricted. In order to push the lock member 560 to the first position (that is, to create a state in which the front door 5 can be closed with respect to the inner frame 4), the intervening plate 540 must be moved to a predetermined position (accommodating portion 511). (behind the top plate 530 in )), and push down the tip side of the lever member 570 below the insertion hole 551 . That is, unless the interposition plate 540 is returned to the predetermined position, the lock member 560 cannot be pushed into the first position (close the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4). Forgetfulness can be suppressed.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to form a state in which one end side in the longitudinal direction of the interposition plate 540 is lifted (see FIG. 12). Improvements are being made. On the other hand, in such a state where one end in the longitudinal direction is only lifted, the operator may misunderstand that the interposition plate 540 has been properly returned to the predetermined position.

For example, in order to remove the interposition plate 540, the locking member 560 is pulled out from the state shown in FIG. 12 is formed by engaging (inserting) the projecting piece 542 with the slide groove 511a of the main body member 510, and if the worker leaves the site for some reason, another worker , the front door 5 may be closed with respect to the inner frame 4 by erroneously recognizing that the interposition plate 540 has been properly returned to the predetermined position. In such a configuration, the interposer plate 540 becomes removable, and there is a risk of tampering.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even when one longitudinal end of the interposed plate 540 is lifted, the tip of the lever member 570 can be lifted as shown in FIGS. It is possible to restrict the operation of pushing the lock member 560 to the first position by flipping it up to a position facing the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550 . That is, even when the interposing plate 540 is not completely removed from the predetermined position (it is arranged in the accommodating portion 511 with one end side in the longitudinal direction being lifted), the locking member 560 is pushed into the first position. Operation can be restricted. Therefore, for example, even if another operator erroneously recognizes that the interposed plate 540 has been properly returned to the predetermined position, the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4. can be avoided.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by pulling out the locking member 560 from the first position to the second position (see FIGS. 11 and 12), removal of the interposition plate 540 is permitted. When the lock member 560 is positioned at the second position (see FIGS. 12 to 14), closing the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 is restricted (see FIG. 17), and the lock member 560 is moved to the second position. In order to push from the position to the first position, it is necessary to place the interposed plate 540 at a predetermined position (receiving portion 511) (see FIG. 11). It is possible to suppress forgetting to return.

That is, in order to remove the interposing plate 540 from the predetermined position (accommodating portion 511), it is necessary to pull out the locking member 560 from the first position to the second position. When the lock member 560 is pulled out from the second position to the first position, the lock member 560 protrudes from the back surface of the back member 550 and restricts the closing of the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 . It is possible to make the operator always perform the operation of pushing into the position as an essential work. For this essential operation (the operation of pushing the lock member 560 from the second position to the first position), it is necessary to push the lever member 570 downward. Therefore, forgetting to return the interposed plate 540 to the predetermined position can be reliably suppressed.

According to the present embodiment, the lock member 560 is interposed between the inner frame 4 and the front door 5 to restrict the closing of the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4, thereby reducing the product cost. be able to. That is, since the locking member 560 has a role of switching between regulation and permission of removal of the interposition plate 540 from the main body member 510 and a role of regulating the closing of the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4, the latter It is possible to eliminate the need to separately provide a member for the role of Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the lock member 560 is formed to be bendable (the tip member 561 is rotatable with respect to the base member 562), and when pulled out to the second position, the bent tip end side (tip member 561) is sandwiched between the inner frame 4 and the front door 5, so when the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4, the lock member 560 is in the first position (the lever member 570 You can avoid being pushed toward the back). As a result, damage to the lever member 570 and the portion interfering with it can be suppressed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the locking member 560 is pulled out to the second position, the bottom surface of the bent distal end side (tip member 561) is in surface contact with the rear surface of the front door 5. The axial position of the portion 562b and the thickness dimension of the tip member 561 are set (see FIG. 12(b)). As a result, the surface pressure when sandwiched between the inner frame 4 and the front door 5 can be reduced, and damage can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lock member 560 is disposed in a posture in which the axial direction of the shaft portion 562b and the shaft support hole 561a is aligned with the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the tip member 561 can be tilted downward by its own weight (see FIG. 12(b)). That is, even if the operator does not bend the lock member 560, the lock member 560 can be bent by the action of gravity. As a result, when the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4, it is possible to prevent the lock member 560 from being pushed toward the first position (the rear surface of the lever member 570), thereby avoiding interference with the lever member 570 or this. It is possible to suppress the damage of the part to be covered.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 25. FIG. In the first embodiment, the lock member 560 is bendable, but the lock member 2560 of the second embodiment is stretchable. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

18(a) is a top view of the locking member 2560 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 18(b) is a side view of the locking member 2560 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18(a). 18(c) is a front view of the lock member 2560 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIc in FIG. 18(b), and FIG. 18(d) is a cross-sectional view of the lock member 2560 taken along line XVIIId-XVIIId in FIG. 18(a). be.

As shown in FIG. 18, the lock member 2560 in the second embodiment includes a tip member 2561, a base member 2562 that holds the tip member 2561 so as to be retractable, and a compression spring SP2 housed inside the base member 2562. and

The distal end member 2561 includes a rod-shaped portion 2561a formed as a rod-shaped body having a circular cross section, and a disk-shaped piston portion 2561b formed to protrude radially outward from the proximal end portion of the rod-shaped portion 2561a.

Inside the base member 2562, a slide guide portion 2562b having a circular cross-section is formed for slidably holding the piston portion 2561b of the tip member 2561 in the axial direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 18(d)).

The outer shape (width dimension and height dimension) of the base member 2562 is set to substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the base member 562 in the first embodiment. An opening through which the rod-shaped portion 2561a of the tip member 2561 is slidably inserted is formed in the end face of the sliding guide portion 2562b on the distal end side, and the opening on the proximal end side is sealed.

The compression spring SP2 is a coil spring made of metal, and is accommodated in the sliding guide portion 2562b of the base member 2562 in an elastically compressed and deformed state. Therefore, in the lock member 2560, the elastic recovery force of the compression spring SP2 urges the tip member 2561 in the protruding direction, and due to this urging, the lock member 2560 is maintained in the maximum extended state with the maximum length in the unloaded state. As the tip member 2561 is pushed axially, the overall length is shortened.

Next, a method of operating the suppression mechanism in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22. FIG. FIGS. 19 to 22 are diagrams for explaining state transitions of the suppressing mechanism, and FIGS. 19(a) to 22(a) correspond to front views of the rear member 550 as viewed in the direction of arrow XIa in FIG. 19(b) to 22(b) are cross-sectional views of the rear member 550 taken along line XIXb-XIXb to XXIIb-XXIIb of FIGS. 19(a) to 22(a). 19(b) to 22(b) show the overall structure of the upper portion of the front door 5. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 19, when the lock member 2560 is pushed into the first position, the lock member 2560 (base member 2562) is inserted through the tubular insertion portion 541 of the interposition plate 540, and one end of the tubular insertion portion 541 is pushed. The proximal end of the base member 2562 protruding from the side is held in the holding portion 511 e of the main body member 510 , and the distal end of the base member 2562 protruding from the other end side of the insertion tube portion 541 is inserted into the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550 . retained. Therefore, the intervening plate 540 cannot be removed from the housing portion 511 of the main body member 510 .

In this case, the distal end member 2561 (bar-shaped portion 2561a) protrudes from the rear surface of the rear surface member 550 toward the rear surface by the dimension L1. Therefore, when the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4, the bar-shaped portion 2561a in contact with the front surface of the inner frame 4 is pushed in the direction of compressing and deforming the compression spring SP2. Therefore, since the rod-shaped portion 2561a is urged in the protruding direction by the elastic recovery force of the compression spring SP2, when the front door 5 is opened from the inner frame 4, as will be described later, the rod-shaped portion 2561a is pushed inside. The frame 4 can be pushed out to assist the force required for the opening action.

The lock member 2560 is slidably displaced in the pull-out direction to a position where the front end of the base member 2562 contacts the front surface of the inner frame 4 when the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 23). The length dimension (horizontal direction dimension in FIG. 19(b)) is set so that the base end of the base member 2562 is held in the holding portion 511e when the base member 2562 is held. Accordingly, even when the lock member 2560 is displaced in the direction of the slide operation, removal of the interposition plate 540 can be reliably restricted.

From the state shown in FIG. 19, the lock member 2560 is pulled out toward the back side of the back member 550 and reaches the second position where the projecting portion 562a is engaged with the front side of the back member 550. is disabled. As a result, as in the case of the first embodiment, the lever member 570 is rotated by the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP1, and the distal end side thereof is flipped upward, so that the intervening plate 540 as shown in FIG. One longitudinal end side of the is lifted upward.

As shown in FIG. 20, when the lock member 2560 is pulled out to the second position, the base member 2562 protrudes from the rear surface of the rear surface member 550 by the dimension L2. Therefore, the lock member 560 (base member 2562 ) is interposed between the front surface of the inner frame 4 and the rear surface of the front door 5 , so that the front door 5 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 4 . This makes it possible for the operator to recognize that he/she has forgotten to return the interposition plate 540 .

In this case, the lock member 2560 is in a state in which the rod-shaped portion 2561a of the tip member 2561 protrudes from the base member 2562. Therefore, as will be described later, when the interposition plate 540 is forgotten to be returned, When the front door 5 is closed by pressing, the tip member 2561 (rod-shaped portion 2561a) is first brought into contact with the front surface of the inner frame 4, and when the rod-shaped portion 2561a is pushed in, the compression spring SP2 is elastically compressed and deformed. Therefore, the force of the collision can be weakened by the buffer effect, and damage to the lever member 570 can be suppressed.

After removing the intervening plate 540 from the main body member 510, the top plate 530 is slid rearward to replace the panel member 520, and after the panel member 520 is replaced, the top plate 530 is slid forward. The operation of mounting the interposition plate 540 (see FIGS. 20, 21, and 22) is the same as in the first embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 20, after the interposition plate 540 is placed in the accommodation portion 511 of the main body member 510 with one end side in the longitudinal direction being lifted upward, as in the case of the first embodiment, One longitudinal end of the interposed plate 540 is pushed downward, and the lock member 2560 is pushed toward the first position while the lever member 570 is pushed downward by the contacted portion 543 . As a result, the base end side (base member 2562) of the lock member 2560 is sequentially inserted through the insertion tube portion 541 of the interposition plate 540 and the holding portion 511e of the main body member 510, resulting in the state shown in FIG. 19 (the interposition plate 540 ( and the top plate 530) cannot be removed from the main body member 510).

The operation of pushing the lock member 2560 to the first position is performed by pushing the rod-shaped portion 2561a of the tip member 2561, thereby compressing the compression spring SP2 and allowing the base member 2562 to move toward the holding portion 511e via the compression spring SP2. by advancing it to a position where it is held at

When the lock member 2560 is pushed to the first position, the rod-like portion 2561a protrudes from the rear surface of the rear member 550 by the length L1 as described above. is closed, the rod-shaped portion 2561a is accommodated inside the back member 550, and the opening of the back surface of the back member 550 is closed by the inner frame 4, so that the lock member 2560 (the rod-shaped portion 2561a) is closed. cannot be manipulated from the outside.

Next, the operation of opening the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 23 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the inner frame 4 and the front door 5. FIG. A cross section of the front door 5 corresponds to FIG. 19(b).

As described above, when the lock member 2560 is pushed to the first position, the tip of the tip member 2561 (the bar-shaped portion 2561a) is projected from the back surface of the back surface member 550 by the dimension L1 toward the back side. form (see FIG. 19).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 23, when the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4, the rod-shaped portion 2561a in contact with the front surface of the inner frame 4 is moved to the front side (the left side in FIG. 23) by the dimension L1. ) to further compress and deform the compression spring SP2. That is, the locking member 2560 is in a state in which the distal end member 2561 is always urged in the protruding direction (rightward direction in FIG. 23) by the elastic recovery force of the compression spring SP2.

Therefore, when the front door 5 is opened with respect to the inner frame 4, the front end member 2561 projected by the biasing force of the compression spring SP2 moves the inner frame 4 in the opening direction (the direction away from the front door 5, right in FIG. 23). ), and the front door 5 can also be pushed out in the opening direction (the direction away from the inner frame 4, leftward in FIG. 23) due to the reaction. As a result, the force required to open the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 is assisted, and the burden on the operator can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25, a structure for preventing breakage of the lever member 570 when the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 with the interposing plate 540 forgotten to be returned will be described.

FIGS. 24(a) to 24(c) are top views of the inner frame 4 and the front door 5 for explaining state transitions when the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4. FIG. ) to FIG. 25(c) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame 4 and the front door 5 taken along lines XXVa-XXVa to XXVc-XXVc of FIGS. 24(a) to 24(c).

As described above, when the lock member 2560 is pulled out to the second position, the base member 2562 protrudes from the back surface of the back member 550 by the length L2, and the tip member 2561 (bar-shaped portion) protrudes from the base member 2562. 2561a) is projected to the maximum (see FIG. 20).

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, when the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 with the lock member 2560 at the second position (that is, when the interposed plate 540 is forgotten to be returned). First, the tip member 2561 (bar-shaped portion 2561 a ) can be brought into contact with the front surface of the inner frame 4 . As a result, when the bar-shaped portion 2561a is pushed in, the compression spring SP2 is elastically compressed and deformed, and the impact force can be weakened by the cushioning effect. As a result, damage to the lever member 570 can be suppressed.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 31. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the front door 5 can be opened/closed (rotated) with respect to the inner frame 4 in a state where the interposed plate 540 is not arranged at a predetermined position has been described. , the front door 5 is restricted from opening and closing (rotating) with respect to the inner frame 4 when the interposition plate 3540 is not arranged at a predetermined position. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 26 is a top view of the main part 3 of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment, showing only the main components.

As shown in FIG. 26, the suppression mechanism in the third embodiment includes a lock member 3560 operated by an operator, a lever member 3570 that regulates the operation of the lock member 3560, and a gap between the inner frame 4 and the front door 5. It mainly comprises a one-way clutch 3580 interposed (between the rotating shaft and the bearing) and a connecting member 3590 connecting the one-way clutch 3580 and the lock member 3560 .

The lock member 3560 includes an operating portion 3561 whose one end side (lower side in FIG. 26) protrudes from the rear surface of the back member 3550 so as to be operable, and a lateral side (FIG. 26 Left side) and an engaging portion 3562 projecting toward the left side), and formed from these portions 3561 and 3562 as a substantially L-shaped member when viewed from above.

The lock member 3560 is slidable in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 26) along a guide portion 3554 (see FIG. 29) formed in the back member 3550, and is slidable in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 26). is maintained at the initial position shown in . When the locking member 3560 is slid toward the release position (rightward in FIG. 26) against the biasing force of the biasing spring, the sliding displacement is transmitted to the one-way clutch 3580 via the connecting member 3590. The one-way clutch 3580 is driven, and the engagement by the engaging portion 3562 is released, so that the interposed plate 3540 can be removed from the main body member 3510 .

Here, the one-way clutch 3580 and the interposed plate 3540 will be described in order with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG.

FIG. 27(a) is a partial cross-sectional top view of the one-way clutch 3580 and the connecting member 3590 with the lock member 3560 slid to the initial position, and FIG. 27(b) is a top view of the lock member 3560 slid to the release position. FIG. 35 is a partial cross-sectional top view of one-way clutch 3580 and coupling member 3590 in an operated state;

As shown in FIGS. 27(a) and 27(b), the one-way clutch 3580 is connected to a pin 18d projecting from a hinge 18 (see FIG. 26) attached to the upper end side of the inner frame 4. An inner ring 3581, an outer ring 3582 connected to a mounting plate 3555 fixed to the back member 3550, a plurality of rollers 3583 arranged on each cam surface of the inner ring 3581, and a retainer 3584 holding each roller 3583. , and a switching plate 3585 connected to a retainer 3584 to switch the phase of the roller 3583 with respect to the cam surface.

One end of the coupling member 3590 is rotatably supported by the lock member 3560 (see FIG. 26), and the other end is rotatably supported by the switching plate 3585 of the one-way clutch 3580, so that the lock member 3560 can be slid. Transmits to switching plate 3585 .

As shown in FIG. 27(a), when the locking member 3560 is placed at the initial position (the interposed plate 3540 is irremovably placed at a predetermined position, see FIG. 26), the switching plate 3585 is tilted toward the lock member 3560 side, the roller 3583 is arranged at the neutral position of the cam surface and separated from the meshing space between the inner ring 3581 and the outer ring 3582 . As a result, the one-way clutch 3580 is brought into a neutral idling state (a state in which the outer ring 3582 is idling with respect to the inner ring 3581). As a result, the opening/closing (rotation) of the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 is permitted.

As shown in FIG. 27(b), the lock member 3560 is in the unlocked position (the interposition plate 3540 is detachable or removed, see FIGS. 29(b) and 29(c)). , the switching plate 3585 is set up in a direction away from the lock member 3560, so that the roller 3583 is arranged at the end of the cam surface and engaged with the wedge formed between the inner ring 3581 and the outer ring 3582. be taken in. As a result, the one-way clutch 3580 is brought into a driven state (a state in which the rotation of the outer ring 3582 in one direction with respect to the inner ring 3581 is restricted). As a result, the rotation of the front door 5 relative to the inner frame 4 in the opening direction is restricted.

In this state, rotation of the outer ring 3582 in the other direction with respect to the inner ring 3581 is permitted. That is, the front door 5 can be allowed to rotate relative to the inner frame 4 in the opening direction.

28(a) is a top view of the interposition plate 3540, FIG. 28(b) is a side view of the interposition plate 3540 viewed in the direction of arrow XXVIIIb in FIG. 28(a), and FIG. 28(c). 28(b) is a cross-sectional view of the interposition plate 3540 taken along line XXVIIIc-XXVIIIc of FIG. 28(b). In addition, in FIG. 28, the illustration of the projecting piece portion 542 is omitted in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIG. 28, the interposition plate 3540 is formed in a horizontally long plate shape, and an insertion tube portion 3541 and a contacted portion 3543 are formed on the bottom surface on the other longitudinal end side thereof. The insertion tubular portion 3541 is a portion into which the engaging portion 3562 of the lock member 3560 is inserted and removed, and is formed in a tubular shape with both ends opened. By inserting the engaging portion 3562 of the lock member 3560 into the insertion tube portion 3541, the interposition plate 3540 can be formed in a state in which it cannot be removed from the main body member 3510 (see FIG. 29A). By extracting the engaging portion 3562 of the locking member 3560 from the main member 3510, the interposition plate 3540 can be detached from the main body member 3510 (see FIG. 29(b)).

The abutted portion 3543 is a portion that abuts on the upper surface of the lever member 3570. When the interposition plate 3540 is attached to the main body member 3510 (receiving portion 511), the abutted portion 3543 pushes the lever member 3570. can be pushed downward (see FIG. 29(a)), and when the lever member 3570 is flipped upward, the intervening plate 3540 can be pushed upward via the abutted portion 3543. (See FIG. 29(b)).

Returning to FIG. 26, description will be made. The lever member 3570 is provided with a shaft support hole 3571 on the base end side, and this shaft support hole 3571 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 3512 of the main body member 3510 (see FIG. 29). The support shaft 3512 is formed so that its axial center extends along the horizontal direction of the main body member 3510 (horizontal direction in FIG. 26). Therefore, the lever member 3570 is disposed in a posture in which the tip side faces the front side of the main body member 3510 (upper side in FIG. 26).

A metal torsion spring (not shown) is interposed between the lever member 3570 and the main body member 3510 in an elastically torsionally deformed state. It is always biased in the direction of rotation that lifts the tip side upward.

In this case, when the interposition plate 3540 is accommodated in the accommodation portion 511 of the main body member 3510 (in a state where the engagement portion 3562 of the lock member 3560 is inserted into the insertion tube portion 3541), the lever member 3570 is positioned so that the interposition plate 29(a)), and when the engaging portion 3562 of the locking member 3560 is pulled out from the insertion cylindrical portion 3541 of the interposition plate 3540, The tip side of the lever member 3570 is flipped upward by the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring. As a result, the interposition plate 3540 can be pushed upward (see FIG. 29(b)).

When the tip side of the lever member 3570 is flipped upward, the tip side of the lever member 3570 is arranged at a position facing the tip of the engaging portion 3562 of the lock member 3560 (FIGS. 29(c) and 30). (c)). As a result, the lever member 570 can prevent the lock member 3560 from being slid to the initial position (that is, the one-way clutch 3580 to be in the neutral state).

Next, a method of operating the suppression mechanism in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. FIG.

29 to 31 are diagrams for explaining the state transition of the suppression mechanism, FIG. 29 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the front door 5, and FIG. 30 is a partially enlarged top view of the front door 5. 31 is a top view of the main part 3 of the gaming machine.

29(a) is in the state shown in FIGS. 30(a) and 31(a), and FIG. 29(b) is in the state shown in FIGS. 30(b) and 31(b). (c) corresponds to the states shown in FIGS. 30(c) and 31(c), respectively. 30(a) and 30(b), the insertion tube portion 3541 and the abutted portion 3543 of the interposed plate 3540 are schematically illustrated by dashed lines.

When removing the intervening plate 3540 in order to replace the panel member 520 (see FIG. 9) or the like, first, as shown in FIGS. By opening the front door 5 with respect to the frame 4, a state in which the lock member 3560 can be slid from the back side of the back member 3550 is created.

The lock member 3560 slides from the initial position shown in FIGS. 29(a), 30(a), and 31(a) toward the unlocked position (backward in FIG. 29(a), rightward in FIG. 30(a)). When operated, the engaging portion 3562 of the locking member 3560 is pulled out from the insertion tube portion 3541 of the interposition plate 3540 and retracted to the side of the lever member 3570 . As a result, the lever member 3570 is rotated by the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring, and the distal end side (opposite side to the shaft support hole 3571) is flipped upward, thereby pushing the abutted portion 3543 upward. As shown in 29(b), FIG. 30(b) and FIG. 31(b), one longitudinal end of the interposition plate 3540 is lifted upward.

This allows the interposition plate 3540 to be removed from the body member 3510 as shown in FIGS. 29(c), 30(c) and 31(c). After removing the intervening plate 3540 from the main body member 3510, the top plate 530 is slid rearward to replace the panel member 520, and after the panel member 520 is replaced, the top plate 530 is slid forward. The operation of mounting the interposition plate 3540 is the same as in the case of the first embodiment, so the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 29(b), 30(b), and 31(b), when the lock member 3560 is slid to the unlocked position, as described above, the slide operation of the lock member 3560 causes the connecting member to slide. 3590 to the one-way clutch 3580, and the one-way clutch 3580 is switched to the driving state. As a result, it is possible to restrict the rotation of the front door 5 relative to the inner frame 4 in the opening direction (direction of arrow A in FIGS. 31(b) and 31(c)). It is possible to recognize that the plate 3540 has been forgotten to be returned.

After the panel member 520 has been replaced, etc., as shown in FIGS. After being placed in the accommodation portion 511 of the main body member 3510, the interposing plate 3540 is pushed downward, and the lock member 3560 is directed to the initial position while the lever member 3570 is pushed downward by the contacted portion 3543. to slide. As a result, the engagement portion 3562 of the lock member 3560 is inserted into the insertion cylinder portion 3541 of the interposition plate 3540, and the state shown in FIGS. (and the top plate 530) cannot be removed from the main body member 3510).

Further, when the lock member 3560 is slid to the initial position, the slide operation of the lock member 3560 is transmitted to the one-way clutch 3580 via the connecting member 3590 as described above, and the one-way clutch 3580 is switched to the neutral state. be done. Thereby, the opening/closing (rotation) of the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 is permitted. That is, the front door 5 can be opened with respect to the inner frame 4 .

As described above, according to this embodiment, by opening the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4, the lock member 3560 can be slid, and as a result, the intervening plate 3540 can be removed. In addition, since the front door 5 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 4 when the interposition plate 3540 is not placed in the predetermined position (accommodating portion 511), the interposition plate 3540 is returned to the predetermined position. You can prevent forgetting.

That is, in order to remove the interposition plate 3540 from the predetermined position, it is necessary to open the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4. Therefore, when the interposition plate 3540 is removed from the predetermined position, the inner The operator can always perform the operation of closing the front door 5 with respect to the frame 4 as an essential work. In this case, unless the interposition plate 3540 is returned to the predetermined position, the front door 5 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 4, and a state in which a game can be played cannot be formed. can be reliably suppressed.

In this case, in the present embodiment, after the front door 5 is opened with respect to the inner frame 4, when the intervening plate 3540 is removed from the predetermined position, the opening position Since the displacement of the front door 5 in the closing direction with respect to the inner frame 4 from the position shown in FIG. .

That is, for example, as in the case of the first embodiment, the back surface of the front door 5 is superimposed on the front surface of the inner frame 4, and the lock member 560 (tip member 561) is interposed therebetween to close the door. can not be formed (that is, a structure that allows the front door 5 to be displaced in the closing direction with respect to the inner frame 4 until the rotation position where the front surface of the inner frame 4 abuts on the lock member 560). Even if the closed state is not formed, the rear surface of the front door 5 overlaps the front surface of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 17(b)), and the operator may erroneously recognize that the closed state is formed. There is Further, if the closing operation is performed with a large force, the front door 5 collides with the inner frame 4 while sandwiching the lock member 560, which may cause damage.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the interposition plate 3540 is removed from the predetermined position, the displacement of the front door 5 relative to the inner frame 4 in the closing direction can be restricted. As long as the 3540 is not returned to the predetermined position, the front door 5 is kept open with respect to the inner frame 4, so that it is possible to prevent the operator from erroneously recognizing that the closed state has been established. In addition, since the displacement itself in the closing direction can be restricted, it is possible to avoid damage to the member due to a collision that accompanies the closing operation.

In this embodiment, the lock member 3560 is arranged on the side (right side in FIG. 26) closer to the rotation shaft (pin 18d) than the center in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 26) of the front door 5 . Therefore, when opening the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 in order to slide the lock member 3560 from the initial position to the release position, it is necessary to open the front door 5 to a relatively large opening angle. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operator from erroneously recognizing that the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 .

Here, in this embodiment, when the intervening plate 3540 is removed from the predetermined position (that is, when the one-way clutch 3580 is driven), the front door 5 is displaced relative to the inner frame 4 in the closing direction. However, the displacement of the front door 5 in the opening direction with respect to the inner frame 4 is allowed. As a result, when the front door 5 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 4 because the installation plate 3540 has been forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position, the operator can alternately move the front door 5 in the closing direction and the opening direction. , the opening angle of the front door 5 can be gradually increased. This makes it easier for the operator to recognize that the interposed plate 3540 has not been returned to the predetermined position. In addition, since it is possible to form an operation that is different from a malfunction of the rotating shaft (pin 18d) or a foreign matter being caught, the operator is made to recognize that the interposition plate 3540 has not been returned to the predetermined position. It can be done easily.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 37. FIG. In the first embodiment, the front door 5 can be closed with respect to the inner frame 4 by arranging the interposition plate 540 at a predetermined position regardless of the presence or absence of the panel member 520 (to be replaced). In the fourth embodiment, the front door 5 can be closed with respect to the inner frame 4 when the panel member 4520 is provided in addition to the top plate 4530 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the front door 5 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 32 , the suppression mechanism in the fourth embodiment has the panel member 4520 fastened and fixed to the top plate 4530 , and the top plate 4530 with the panel member 4520 fastened and fixed is placed on the upper surface of the main body member 510 (accommodated). 511). Here, the panel member 4520 and the top plate 4530 are described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34. FIG.

33(a) is a rear view of the top plate 4530 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIII in FIG. 32, and FIG. 33(b) is a cross-sectional view of the top plate 4530 taken along line XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb in FIG. 33(a). .

34(a) is a rear view of the top plate 4530 and the panel member 4520 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIII in FIG. 32, and FIG. 34(c) is a cross-sectional view of the top plate 4530 and the panel member 4520 along line XXXIVc-XXXIVc of FIG. 34(a).

As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the top plate 4530 integrates the top plate 530 and the intervening plate 540 in the first embodiment, and has projecting pieces 531 and 542 projecting from the left and right edges. It is formed as an omitted plate-like body. That is, the top plate 4530 is formed with a projecting piece 531 on the edge on the front side thereof, and the projecting piece 531 can be engaged (inserted) into the slide groove 511 a of the main body member 510 . Further, an insertion tube portion 541 is formed on the bottom surface of the top plate 4530, through which the lock member 560 can be inserted.

A contact member 4532 is arranged on the bottom surface of the top plate 4530 . The abutting member 4532 is a long plate-like member, and is arranged in a posture in which its longitudinal direction is along the front-rear direction of the front door 5 (horizontal direction in FIG. is rotatably supported by a support shaft 4533 on the bottom surface of the top plate 4530 .

In this case, a torsion spring (not shown) is interposed between the top plate 4530 and the contact member 4532 in an elastically torsionally deformed state, and the contact member 4532 receives the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring. 33(b), the bottom surface of the top plate 4530 is urged in the rotational direction. That is, the contact member 4532 is maintained in the state shown in FIG. 33(b) when the panel member 4520 is not fastened and fixed.

On the bottom surface of the top plate 4530, a recessed groove 4534 is recessed along a region facing the upper surface of the contact member 4532 on the other longitudinal end side (left side in FIG. 33(b)), and the internal space of the recessed groove 4534. The other end in the longitudinal direction of the contact member 4532 can be received. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34 , when the panel member 4520 is fastened and fixed to the bottom surface of the top plate 4530 , the panel member 4520 pushes the other longitudinal end of the contact member 4532 into the recessed groove 4534 . , the one end in the longitudinal direction of the contact member 4532 can be separated from the bottom surface of the top plate 4530 .

That is, as will be described later, when the panel member 4520 is not attached (fastened and fixed) to the top plate 4530, one longitudinal end side of the contact member 4532 is positioned upward (bottom side of the top plate 4530) (Fig. 33(b)), when the top plate 4530 is arranged in the main body member 510 (receiving portion 511), it is possible to disable downward pressing of the lever member 570 by one longitudinal end side of the contact member 4532. On the other hand, when the panel member 4520 is attached (fastened and fixed) to the top plate 4530, one longitudinal end side of the contact member 4532 is positioned downward (the side away from the bottom surface of the top plate 4530). When arranged in the body member 510 (accommodating portion 511 ), the lever member 570 can be pushed downward by one longitudinal end of the contact member 4532 . As a result, as will be described later, forgetting to attach the panel member 4520 can be suppressed.

The recess dimension (depth dimension) of the recess 511c (the space for storing the panel member 4520) recessed in the housing portion 511 is equal to the height dimension of the panel member 4520 (vertical dimension in FIG. 34(b)). ) is set to a dimension sufficiently larger than

Therefore, when the panel member 4520 is housed in the concave portion 511c without being fastened and fixed to the top plate 4530, and the top plate 4530 is arranged in the housing portion 511 (that is, the panel member 4520 and the top plate 4530 are attached separately) ), the upper surface of the panel member 4520 is separated from the bottom surface of the top plate 4530 (the other end in the longitudinal direction of the contact member 4532), so that the other end in the longitudinal direction of the contact member 4532 is recessed by the panel member 4520. The state of being pushed into the groove 4534 cannot be formed, and the one longitudinal end side of the contact member 4532 cannot be separated from the bottom surface of the top plate 4530 (the state of FIG. 34(b) can be formed). Therefore, downward pressing of the lever member 570 by the one longitudinal end side of the contact member 4532 can be disabled.

That is, for example, in order to simplify the process of exchanging the panel member 4520, the operator does not intentionally fasten and fix the panel member 4520 to the top plate 4530, or it is necessary to fasten and fix the panel member 4520. If the panel member 4520 and the top plate 4530 are separately arranged on the main body member 510 without knowing this, the lever member 570 cannot be pushed down. That is, the front door 5 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 4, and a playable state cannot be formed. This makes it difficult for a foreign object to be inserted through the gap between the top surface of the panel member 4520 and the bottom surface of the top plate 4530, thereby making it easier to suppress fraud.

Next, a method of operating the suppression mechanism in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37. FIG. 35 to 37 are diagrams for explaining the state transition of the suppressing mechanism, and FIGS. 35(a) to 37(a) are front views of the back member 550 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXV in FIG. 35(b) to 37(b) are cross-sectional views of the back member 550 taken along lines XXXVb-XXXVb to XXXVIIb-XXXVIIb of FIGS. 35(a) to 37(a).

In addition, in FIG.35(a) and FIG.36(b), the top plate 4530 is shown sectional view. 35(b) to 37(b), the lock member 560 is shown without cross-sectional view, and the overall structure of the upper portion of the front door 5 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 35 , when the lock member 560 is pushed to the first position, the lock member 560 is inserted through the insertion tube portion 541 of the top plate 4530 , and the top plate 4530 is moved from the accommodation portion 511 of the main body member 510 . Not removable.

From the state shown in FIG. 35, the lock member 560 is pulled out toward the back side of the back member 550 and reaches the second position. , the lock member 560 (base member 562 ) is retracted to a position where the proximal end surface of the lock member 560 (base member 562 ) exceeds the lever member 570 .

As a result, the lever member 570 is rotated by the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP1, and the tip side thereof is flipped upward. In this case, one longitudinal end side of the contact member 4532 of the top plate 4530 is in contact with the upper surface of the lever member 570, so that the contact member 4532 is pushed upward by the lever member 570, so that the contact member 4532 shown in FIG. As shown, the rear side of the top plate 4530 (the side opposite to the protrusion 531) is lifted upward. Therefore, the portion lifted upward can be gripped, and as shown in FIG. 37, workability in removing the top plate 4530 from the body member 510 can be improved.

After removing the panel member 4520 from the removed top plate 4530 and replacing it with another panel member 4520, as shown in FIG. is attached to the housing portion 511 of the . In this case, the protrusion 531 formed on the front side of the top plate 4530 is engaged (inserted) into the slide groove 511 a of the main body member 510 . As a result, one longitudinal end side of the contact member 4532 of the top plate 4530 is brought into contact with (placed on) the upper surface of the lever member 570, and as shown in FIG. It is arranged in the accommodating portion 511 of the main body member 510 in a posture in which the piece portion 531 and the opposite end thereof are lifted upward.

When the rear side of the top plate 4530 is pushed downward from this state (the state shown in FIG. 36), the lever member 570 is pushed downward by the one longitudinal end side of the contact member 4532 while resisting the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP1. , the tip end of the lever member 570 is arranged below the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550, and the insertion cylinder portion 541 of the top plate 4530 is pushed down to the holding portion 511e of the main body member 510 and the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550. (that is, the positions where the openings at both ends of the insertion tube portion 541 face the holding portion 511e and the insertion hole 551).

Therefore, by pushing the lock member 560 in the second position toward the first position, the base end side (base member 562) of the lock member 560 can be inserted into the insertion tube portion 541 of the top plate 4530 and the main body member 510. , and the state shown in FIG. 35 is formed. That is, a state is created in which the top plate 4530 cannot be removed from the main body member 510 .

On the other hand, when the panel member 4520 is removed from the removed top plate 4530, but the replacement with another panel member 4520 (attaching (fastening and fixing) another panel member 4520 to the top plate 4530) is forgotten. , even if the top plate 4530 is attached to the housing portion 511 of the main body member 510, the one longitudinal end side of the contact member 4532 is positioned above (the bottom side of the top plate 4530) (see FIG. 33(b)). One longitudinal end of the contact member 4532 cannot push the lever member 570 downward. That is, the tip side of the lever member 570 is maintained facing the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550, and the state in which the lock member 560 at the second position is pushed toward the first position is restricted. Therefore, the front door 5 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 4.例文帳に追加

Here, for example, in the case of the first embodiment, the front door 5 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 4 unless the interposition plate 540 is disposed at a predetermined position. can be suppressed. However, in this case, whether or not the front door 5 can be closed depends only on the intervening plate 540, not on the panel member 520. That is, even if the panel member 520 is forgotten to be attached, the front door 5 can be closed, so forgetting to attach the panel member 520 cannot be suppressed.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the panel member 4520 is not attached (fastened and fixed) to the top plate 4530, even if the top plate 4530 is arranged at a predetermined position (accommodating portion 511), the second The locking member 560 in the position cannot be pushed toward the first position, and the state in which the locking member 560 is interposed between the front surface of the inner frame 4 and the rear surface of the front door 5 is maintained. A state in which the front door 5 cannot be closed with respect to the frame 4 can be formed. This allows the operator to recognize that the panel member 4520 has been left unattached.

On the other hand, a member (abutment member 4532) for pushing down the lever member 570 is arranged on the top plate 4530, and the posture of the abutment member 4532 is determined by whether or not the panel member 4520 is attached (fastened and fixed). Since it is a switching structure, even if only the panel member 4520 is arranged at a predetermined position (recessed portion 511c) of the main body member 510 and the top plate 4530 is forgotten to be arranged at a predetermined position (accommodating portion 511) of the main body member 510 , a state in which the front door 5 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 4 can be formed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the worker from forgetting to attach the top plate 4530 .

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 44. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the front door 5 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 4 by interposing (sandwiching) the lock member 560 has been described. By disabling locking, the front door 5 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 4.例文帳に追加In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 38 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper portion of the front door 5 in the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 38, illustration of some of the various members (for example, one of the pair of speakers) disposed on the front surface of the back member 5550 is omitted, and illustration of the lower end side of the lifting member 5565 is omitted. .

As shown in FIG. 38, the front door 5 according to the fifth embodiment includes a rotary plate 5563 rotatably supported by a support shaft 5556 of a back member 5550, and an upper end side of the rotary plate 5563 as a base of the lock member 560. It comprises a connecting rod 5564 connected to the member 562 and an elevating member 5565 arranged in a guide groove (not shown) extending in the vertical direction and raised and lowered as the rotary plate 5563 rotates.

The connecting rod 5564 is a rod-shaped member for transmitting the displacement associated with the sliding operation of the locking member 560 to the rotating plate 5563, and is connected to one end side connected to the locking member 560 or the other end side connected to the rotating plate 5563. At least one of them is rotatably supported by the locking member 560 or the rotating plate 5563 .

The rotation plate 5563 has a shaft support hole 5563a at the center in the longitudinal direction, and a projecting pin 5563b projecting from the side surface on the lower end side. The shaft support hole 5563a is a hole through which the support shaft 5556 of the back member 5550 is inserted. movable grooves). Therefore, when the sliding operation of the locking member 560 is transmitted to the upper end side of the rotating plate 5563 via the connecting rod 5564, the supporting shaft 5556 slides relatively within the shaft support hole 5563a, thereby causing the rotating plate 5563 to slide. is rotated while changing the height position (see FIGS. 40 and 43).

The elevating member 5565 has an elongated sliding groove 5565a extending parallel to the direction in which the locking member 560 is slid, and has a plurality of (three in this embodiment) pushers from the side surface. A lowering pin 5565b is projected. A projecting pin 5563b of the rotary plate 5563 is slidably inserted into the sliding groove 5565a.

Therefore, when the rotary plate 5563 is rotated while changing the height position, the change in the height position of the rotary plate 5563 is transmitted to the lifting member 5565 via the projecting pin 5563b and the sliding groove 5564a. The lifting member 5565 is lifted (FIGS. 40 and 43).

Each push-down pin 5565b is a part for pushing down the rear end side of each of the hook members 166a to 166c (see FIG. 5). They are placed side by side while being separated from each other.

The hook members 166a to 166c are rotatably supported by the support shaft 5557, and are arranged on the back member 5550 in such a manner that the tip end side thereof protrudes from the back face of the back member 5550. is engaged with the hook receiving member 167 of the inner frame 4 to constitute a locking mechanism of the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 (see FIGS. 40 and 41).

Next, a suppression mechanism in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 44. FIG.

39(a) and 39(b) are cross-sectional views of the gaming machine main section 3 in a state where the lock member 560 is slid to the first position, corresponding to the cross-sectional view taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. do. 40 and 41 are cross-sectional views of the gaming machine main section 3 in a state where the lock member 560 is slid to the first position, and correspond to the cross-sectional view taken along line XL-XL in FIG. 39(a) and 40, the front door 5 is opened with respect to the inner frame 4. In FIGS. 39(b) and 41, the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4. Each state is illustrated.

42(a) and 42(b) are cross-sectional views of the gaming machine main section 3 in a state where the lock member 560 is slid to the second position, corresponding to the cross-sectional view taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. do. 43 and 44 are cross-sectional views of the gaming machine main section 3 in a state where the lock member 560 is slid to the second position, and correspond to the cross-sectional view taken along line XL-XL in FIG. 42(a) and 43 show a state in which the front door 5 is opened with respect to the inner frame 4, and in FIGS. 42(b) and 44, the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4. Each state is illustrated.

Here, in the inner frame 4, a receiving plate 5028 is arranged behind the hook receiving member 167 (on the right side in FIG. 40). The receiving plate 5028 is biased toward the hook receiving member 167 by the elastic recovery force of the compression spring SP3 that has been elastically compressed and deformed.

Further, in the inner frame 4 in this embodiment, an escape portion 5004a is recessed in a region facing the lock member 560. As shown in FIG. When the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 with the lock member 560 being slid to the second position, the escape portion 5004a has the lock member 560 (tip member 561) (that is, the size that allows the locking member 560 and the inner frame 4 to be non-interfering).

As shown in FIGS. 39 to 41, when the lock member 560 is slid to the first position, the gap between the connecting rod 5564 and the support shaft 5556 is increased as the lock member 560 is slid to the first position. is increased, the rotating plate 5563 and the lifting member 5565 are lifted upward.

As a result, the push-down pin 5565b of the lifting member 5565 is positioned above the upper surface of the rear end side of the hook member 166a. Therefore, the hook member 166a for engaging with the hook receiving member 28 is allowed to rotate around the support shaft 557, so that the inner frame 4 is moved forward from the state shown in FIGS. When the door 5 is closed, as shown in FIGS. 39(b) and 41, the engaging portion of the hook member 166a is engaged with the hook receiving member 167 to form a locked state.

In this case, since the receiving plate 5028 is pushed backward by the hook member 166a, when the engagement between the hook member 166a and the hook receiving member 167 is released (unlocked), the elastic recovery force of the compression spring SP3 can push back the hook member 166a. That is, when opening the front door 5 from the closed state with respect to the inner frame 4, the force required for the opening can be assisted by the elastic recovery force of the compression spring SP3. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the operator when opening the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 42 to 44, when the lock member 560 is slid to the second position, the connecting rod 5564 and the support shaft 5556 are disengaged as the lock member 560 is slid to the second position. Since the distance between is reduced, rotating plate 5563 and lifting member 5565 are pushed downward.

As a result, the push-down pin 5565b of the lifting member 5565 pushes down the upper surface of the rear end side of the hook member 166a, and the hook member 166a is placed in a posture in which the engaging portion on the front end side is lifted upward, that is, , the hook-receiving member 167 can be in an unengageable posture.

Therefore, when the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 from the state shown in FIGS. 42(b) and 44, the engaging portion of the hook member 166a is not engaged with the hook receiving member 167, thereby preventing the locked state from being formed. That is, in a state where the interposition plate 540 is not arranged at a predetermined position, the locking can be restricted and the unlocked state can be maintained, so that the front door 5 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 4. can be formed. As a result, the operator can be made to recognize that the interposition plate 540 is not arranged. In addition, it is possible to suppress the action of intentionally not arranging the interposition plate 540 at a predetermined position.

In this case, when the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4, if the front door 5 is not locked, the front door 5 overlaps the front of the inner frame 4, so that the closed state is formed. There is a risk that the user may misunderstand.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the receiving plate 5028 and the compression spring SP3 are provided behind the hook receiving member 167, the hook member 166a lifts up the engaging portion on the tip side thereof, and the hook receiving member When the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 in a state in which it cannot be engaged with 167, as shown in FIG. The compression spring SP3 can be further compressed.

As a result, the elastic recovery force of the compression spring SP3 pushes back the hook member 166a forward (to the left in FIG. 44), displacing the front door 5 relative to the inner frame 4 in the opening direction. That is, even if the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4, the front door 5 is opened, so that it is possible to prevent the operator from erroneously recognizing that a closed state has been established. As a result, the worker can easily recognize that the interposition plate 540 is not provided.

Further, when closing the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 in this manner, the receiving plate 5028 can be pushed backward by the hook member 166a, and the compression spring SP3 can be compressed and deformed. can absorb impact and prevent damage.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the relief portion 5004a is recessed in the inner frame 4, it is possible to suppress damage due to impact when the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4. FIG. That is, for example, in the case of the first embodiment, if the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 without returning the interposed plate 540 to the predetermined position, the lock member is pulled between the inner frame 4 and the front door 5 . 560 (tip member 561) is partially interposed (sandwiched), and the force at the time of collision concentrates around the lock member 560, so the surface pressure increases and the lock member 560 is easily damaged.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, even if the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 without returning the interposition plate 540 to the predetermined position, as shown in FIGS. Since the lock member 560 (tip member 561) is received in the relief portion 5004a, the lock member 560 is not partially interposed (caught) between the inner frame 4 and the front door 5, and the front and front sides of the inner frame 4 are separated. The back surface of the door 5 can be brought into contact (collision) with the entire surface. As a result, the force at the time of collision can be distributed over the entire surface, the surface pressure can be reduced, and damage can be suppressed.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 50. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the operation of sliding the lock member 560 from the first position to the second position was restricted by the lever member 570 was described. A sliding operation to the second position is restricted by the slide plate 6540 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 45 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper portion of the front door 5 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 45, an accommodating portion 6511 for slidably arranging a slide plate 6540 is recessed in the upper surface of the main body member 510, and a working space 6511a is provided in a part of the accommodating portion 6511. recessed. Predetermined members (equipment) are accommodated in the work space 6511a.

The slide plate 6540 can be slid between a shielding position (see FIG. 47(a)) that shields the work space 6511a and an open position (see FIG. 47(b)) that opens the work space 6511a. . That is, normally, the slide plate 6540 is arranged at the shielding position, and when performing replacement, maintenance (adjustment), setting change/switching, switch operation, etc. of predetermined members housed in the work space 6511a, the slide plate 6540 is slid from the closed position to the open position. Here, slide plate 6540 will be described with reference to FIG.

46(a) is a top view of the slide plate 6540, FIG. 46(b) is a side view of the slide plate 6540 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLVIb in FIG. 46(a), and FIG. FIG. 46(b) is a cross-sectional view of slide plate 6540 taken along line XLVIc-XLVIc, and FIG. 46(d) is a cross-sectional view of slide plate 6540 taken along line XLVId-XLVId of FIG. 46(b).

As shown in FIG. 46, the slide plate 6540 includes a long plate-like top plate 6541 and a rectangular parallelepiped box-like shape protruding from the bottom surface of the top plate 6541 at one end in the longitudinal direction (the right side in FIG. 46(b)). and a portion 6542 .

The upper surface plate 6541 has plate-like projecting pieces 6541a protruding from the edges along the longitudinal direction. (See FIG. 48, respectively), so that the slide plate 6540 cannot be removed from the housing portion 6511 .

The top plate 6541 is placed on the bottom surface opposite to the working space 6511a of the housing part 6511 (the bottom surface that is one step higher than the bottom surface in which the working space 6511a is recessed), and is slid on the bottom surface. be.

The box-shaped portion 6542 is formed with an insertion hole 6542a through which the lock member 560 can be inserted. That is, when the slide plate 6540 is placed at the shielding position (see FIG. 47), the insertion hole 6542a is aligned with the holding portion 511e of the main body member 6510 and the insertion hole 551 of the back member 6550 (that is, Both end openings of the insertion hole 6542a are arranged at positions facing the holding portion 511e and the insertion hole 551 (see FIG. 48).

The box-shaped part 6542 is placed on the bottom surface of the accommodating part 6511 in which the work space 6511a is recessed, and is slid on the bottom surface. In this case, the longitudinal end surface of the box-shaped part 6542 (the left side in FIG. 46(b)) is the difference in level between the bottom surface of the housing part 6511 (the bottom surface on which the top plate 6541 is placed and the bottom surface on which the box-shaped part 6542 is placed). 6511, the slide plate 6540 cannot be removed from the accommodating portion 6511, and the slide plate 6540 is arranged at the open position.

Returning to FIG. 45, description will be made. A holding portion 511e is formed or provided in the main body member 6510, and an insertion hole 551 and a locking member 560 are formed or arranged in the back member 6550, respectively. The holding portion 511e of the main body member 6510, the insertion hole 551 of the rear member 6550, and the lock member 560 are arranged at the same positions as the holding portion 511e of the main body member 510, the insertion hole 551 of the rear member 550, and the lock member 560 in the first embodiment. Since the other configurations are substantially the same except for the point that is different, the same reference numerals are attached and the description thereof is omitted.

Next, a method of operating the suppression mechanism in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. FIG.

FIG. 47(a) is a top view of the front door 5 with the slide plate 6540 and the lock member 560 slid to the shielding position and the first position, respectively, and FIG. 47(b) is a top view of the slide plate 6540 and the lock member. 560 is a top view of the front door 5 in a state in which the door 560 is slid to the open position and the second position, respectively.

48 is a cross-sectional view of the front door 5 taken along line XLVIII-XLVIII in FIG. 47(a), and FIG. 49 shows a state in which the lock member 560 has been slid from the state shown in FIG. 48 to the second position. 50 is a cross-sectional view of the front door 5, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view of the front door 5 taken along line LI-LI in FIG. 47(b).

When performing replacement or maintenance of predetermined members in the work space 6511a, first, the front door 5 is opened with respect to the inner frame 4 in order to allow the lock member 560 to be slid (pushed in or pulled out).

As shown in FIGS. 47(a) and 48, when the lock member 560 is pushed into the first position, the lock member 560 is inserted through the insertion hole 6542a of the slide plate 6540, and the lock member 560 is inserted from one end of the insertion hole 6542a. The proximal end of the protruding locking member 560 (base member 562) is held in the holding portion 511e of the main body member 6510, and the distal end of the locking member 560 (distal member 561) protruding from the other end side of the insertion hole 6542a is the rear surface. It is held in the insertion hole 551 of the member 6550 . Therefore, the slide plate 6540 cannot be slid and is held at the shielding position (predetermined position).

47(a) and 48, the locking member 560 is pulled out to the rear side of the rear member 6550 and reaches the second position, as shown in FIG. 49, the locking member 560 (base member 562). is extracted from the insertion hole 6542a of the slide plate 6540. This allows the slide plate 6540 to be slid from the covering position to the releasing position.

As shown in FIGS. 47(b) and 50, when the slide plate 6540 is placed at the open position, the work space 6511a is opened, so that the replacement and maintenance of predetermined members accommodated in the work space 6511a can be performed. work is possible.

When the slide plate 6540 is placed at the open position, the lock member 560 is placed at the second position by the pullout operation. The lock member 560 (tip member 561) protrudes from.

Therefore, as described above, the lock member 560 is interposed between the front surface of the inner frame 4 and the rear surface of the front door 5 , so that the front door 5 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 4 . This makes it possible for the operator to recognize that the slide plate 6540 has forgotten to be returned to the shielding position (predetermined position).

Further, in this embodiment, when the slide plate 6540 is arranged at the open position, the slide plate 6540 can be projected from the front door 5 . This makes it possible for the operator to recognize that the slide plate 6540 has not been returned to the shielding position.

In particular, the slide plate 6540 protrudes toward the side of the leading end of the front door 5 (the side opposite to the center of rotation), and this slide plate 6540 hinders the operator's movement to open and close the front door 5. Therefore, the operator can be reminded that the slide plate 6540 has not been returned to the shielding position. On the other hand, since the slide plate 6540 protrudes to the side of the front door, even if the operator inadvertently closes the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 with the slide plate 6540 protruding, the slide plate 6540 does not slide. By avoiding interference between the plate 6540 and the inner frame 4, damage thereof can be suppressed.

In addition, in this state (state in which the slide plate 6540 is forgotten to be returned to the blocking position), the rear surface (rear end surface) of the box-shaped portion 6542 of the slide plate 6540 faces the proximal end of the base member 652 of the lock member 560. This restricts the pushing operation of the lock member 560 to the first position. In order to push the lock member 560 to the first position (that is, to create a state in which the front door 5 can be closed with respect to the inner frame 4), the slide plate 6540 is placed at a predetermined position (shielding position). There is a need to. That is, unless the slide plate 6540 is returned to the predetermined position, the lock member 560 cannot be pushed into the first position (close the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4). can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, after the locking member 560 is placed at the second position, the pushing operation of the locking member 560 to the first position is performed on the rear surface (rear end surface) of the box-shaped portion 6542 of the slide plate 6540 . can be regulated by That is, since it is not necessary to provide the lever member 570 as in the case of the first embodiment, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a seventh embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, the case where the compression spring SP2 is pushed in the axial direction by the tip member 2561 and is compressed and deformed in the state where the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 has been described (see FIG. 23). The compression spring SP2 in the seventh embodiment is pushed axially and compressed and deformed not only by the tip member 2561 but also by the insertion piece 7511f of the holding portion 511e. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 51 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the inner frame 4 and the front door 5 in the seventh embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. As shown in FIG. 51, at the rear end of the base member 7562 of the lock member 7560, a region including at least the upper surface (the upper surface in FIG. 51) and the rear end surface (the left surface in FIG. 51) of the base member 7562 is cut out. An opening is formed as a result, and the opening serves as the notch portion 7562f.

On the other hand, in the holding portion 511e of the body member 510, an insertion piece 7511f protruding from the inner wall surface and the bottom surface of the recess is formed at a position corresponding to the notch portion 7562f of the lock member 7560. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when the base end of the lock member 7560 (base member 7562) is held by the holding portion 511e, the insertion piece 7511f is inserted from the notch portion 7562f of the base member 7562 into the sliding guide portion 2562b, thereby displacing the compression spring SP2. Compressive deformation.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4, the rod-shaped portion 2561a in contact with the front surface of the inner frame 4 extends from the above-described dimension L1 (see FIG. 19). In addition to compressively deforming the compression spring SP2 by being pushed into the sliding guide portion 2562b by the amount of , the insertion piece 7511f of the holding portion 511e is inserted into the sliding guide portion 2562b, thereby compressing the compression spring SP2. can be further compressed and deformed. That is, compared with the case of the second embodiment (see FIG. 23), the amount of compressive deformation of the compression spring SP2 is increased to increase the biasing force that biases the tip member 2561 in the protruding direction (rightward direction in FIG. 51). can.

Therefore, when the front door 5 is opened with respect to the inner frame 4, the tip member 2561 can be protruded with a stronger force by the biasing force of the compression spring SP2. 51), and the reaction pushes the front door 5 in the opening direction (away from the inner frame 4, leftward in FIG. 51). As a result, even when the weight of the front door 5 is relatively large, the front door 5 can be easily opened from the inner frame 4, and the burden on the operator can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the lock member 7560 is slid (pulled out) to the second position (for example, see FIGS. 20 and 21), the insertion piece 7511f of the holding portion 511e is removed from the notch 7562f. Thus, the compression spring SP2 can be compressed and deformed between the rear end surface of the base member 7562 (sliding guide portion 2562b) and the piston portion 2561b of the tip member 2561. As shown in FIG.

In other words, since the insertion piece 7511f is not inserted, the amount of possible stroke in the pushing direction (leftward direction in FIGS. 20 and 21) of the tip member 2561 can be ensured, so that the state where the lock member 7560 is in the second position (that is, , the installation plate 540 has been forgotten), and when the front door 5 is closed against the inner frame 4 (see FIGS. 24 and 25), the compression spring SP2 exerts a cushioning effect due to elastic compression deformation. You can make it easier. As a result, the momentum of the collision can be weakened, and breakage of the lever member 570 can be suppressed.

Next, the suppressing mechanism in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 58. FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the gaming machine main section 8003 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG. FIG. 52 is an exploded front perspective view of the gaming machine main section 8003 in the eighth embodiment. 53(a) is a front view of the inner frame 8004, and FIG. 53(b) is a cross-sectional view of the inner frame 8004 along line LIIIb--LIIIb in FIG. 53(a). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, in the inner frame 8004 of the eighth embodiment, a projecting member 8713, which will be described later, projects between an insertion hole 8004a for inserting a locking member 8560, which will be described later, and the guide rail 75. An opening 8004b is formed through from the front surface to the rear surface.

The insertion hole 8004a is formed above the rotating shaft side of the inner frame 8004 (the left side in FIG. 53(a)), and is formed to have substantially the same or larger outer shape than the lock member 8560 when viewed from the front. is inserted.

The opening 8004b is formed between the guide rails 75 and has substantially the same or larger outer shape than the protruding member 8713 when viewed from the front, and the protruding member 8713 is inserted through the opening 8004b.

A hitting restricting member 8710 is arranged on the back surface of the inner frame 8004 . The ejection restricting member 8710 includes a pushing member 8711 arranged on the right side of the through hole 8004a in front view, a slide piece 8712 arranged below the pushing member 8711, and a projecting member 8713 arranged below the slide piece 8712. Mainly provide

The pushing member 8711 is a member that slides in the front-rear direction by being pressed by the lock member 8560, and is arranged so that at least a part thereof overlaps with the lock member 8560 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 53(a)). . In addition, the pushing member 8711 is formed in a trapezoidal shape when viewed from the side, and is tapered so that the thickness in the vertical direction becomes smaller (thinner) toward the tip. That is, the pressing member 8711 is formed with an inclined surface 8711a whose lower surface side is inclined upward toward the tip (front).

The slide piece 8712 is formed in a side view shape in which two tips on the short sides of an L-shape are connected point-symmetrically, and is formed to have a predetermined thickness in the left-right direction. In addition, inclined surfaces 8712a and 8712b inclined toward the center are formed at both upper and lower end portions of the slide piece 8712. As shown in FIG. That is, the inclined surfaces 8712a and 8712b are inclined upward toward the front.

The inclined surface 8712a is a surface that abuts against the inclined surface 8711a of the pushing member 8711, and its inclination angle is set substantially perpendicular to the inclination angle of the inclined surface 8711a of the pushing member 8711. In addition, the inclined surface 8712b is a surface formed on the lower end side, and is disposed in contact with an inclined surface 8713c of the protruding member 8713, which will be described later.

The protruding member 8713 is a member that protrudes from the opening 8004b described above, and the left and right side surfaces (the left and right sides in FIG. be. The protruding member 8713 is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the side, and has a protruding surface 8713a formed substantially parallel to the plane of the game board on the front end surface, and an inclined surface 8713b inclined downward toward the tip on the rear side. , and a plate-like protruding wall 8713c that is connected to the base of the inclined surface 8713b and protrudes upward.

The inclined surface 8713b is a surface that abuts on the inclined surface 8712b of the slide piece 8712 described above, and the inclination angle thereof is formed substantially perpendicular to the inclination angle of the inclined surface 8712b of the slide piece 8712.

A compression spring SP4 is arranged in front of the projecting wall 8713c. The compression spring SP4 is arranged between the projecting wall 8713c and the game board 13 so as to be contracted by a predetermined amount, and the projecting member 8713 is always urged rearward by the urging force of the compression spring SP4. be. Further, the projecting wall 8713c is arranged in contact with the front surface of the slide piece 8712 when the projecting member 8713 is positioned rearward. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protruding member 8713 from being pulled in beyond the predetermined position by the compression spring SP4.

It should be noted that the projecting surface 8713a is flush with the front surface of the game board 13 when the projecting member 8713c is retracted rearward by the biasing force of the compression spring SP4. As a result, the protruding surface 8713a does not affect the game balls (passing between the guide rails 75) launched into the game area PE.

Next, referring to FIG. 54, lock member 8560 will be described. FIG. 54(a) is a front perspective exploded view of the locking member 8560, FIG. 54(b) is a side view of the locking member 8560, and FIG. 54(c) is LIVc-LIVc of FIG. 8560 is a cross-sectional view of locking member 8560 at line.

As shown in FIGS. 54( a ) to 54 ( c ), the locking member 8560 mainly includes a tip member 8561 and a base member 8562 connected to the proximal end of the tip member 8561 . A plurality of protruding portions 562a are protrudingly formed on the proximal end side of.

The distal end member 8561 has a reduced thickness on the base end side, and a shaft support hole 8561a is formed in the reduced thickness. On the other hand, the base member 8562 is divided into two in the thickness direction, and a shaft portion 8562b is protrudingly provided on the tip end side of one divided body. With the shaft portion 8562b inserted through the torsion spring SP5 and the shaft support hole 8561a, the two divided bodies are fastened and fixed by bolts BT to be integrated, so that the base member 8562 can rotate toward the proximal end of the tip member 8561. connected to That is, the locking member 8560 is formed bendable.

In addition, in a state in which the extending directions of the tip member 8561 and the base member 8562 are arranged in the same direction (on a straight line), on one side of the tip member 8561 on the proximal side (upper side in FIG. 54(c)), A contact surface 8561b that contacts the base member 8562 is formed, and the surface on the other side (lower side in FIG. 54(c)) is formed in an arc shape having the same axis as the shaft support hole 8561a. It has a curved surface 8561c.

Thereby, the rotation of the tip member 8561 with respect to the base member 8562 is restricted in only one direction (clockwise in FIG. 53(c)). That is, when the distal end member 8561 and the base member 8562 are arranged in the same extending direction, the contact surface 8561b of the distal end member 8561 is arranged in contact with the base member 8562 . Therefore, the tip member 8561 cannot rotate in one side direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 53(c)) with respect to the base member 8562 . On the other hand, for rotation in the other direction, the curved surface 8561c ensures the space required for the rotation of the tip member 8561, so that the tip member 8561 can be rotated.

Here, as described above, the torsion spring SP5 is arranged on the shaft portion of the base member 8562 . As shown in FIG. 54(b), the torsion spring SP5 has an end extending toward one end biasing the tip member 8561 toward one side, and an end extending toward the other end biases the base member 8562 to one side. placed in a directionally biased manner.

As a result, the lock member 8560 is biased by the torsion spring SP5 so that the extending directions of the tip member 8561 and the base member 8562 are always the same. As a result, even if an external force acting in the other direction acts on the tip member 8561 and the tip member 8561 rotates with respect to the base member 8562, the external force acting in the other direction is released, so that the tip member 8561 becomes a torsion spring. By rotating with the biasing force of SP5, the tip member 8561 and the base member 8562 can extend in the same direction (the state before the external force acts).

Next, the outer frame 8002 will be described with reference to FIG. 55(a) is a front perspective view of the outer frame 8002, FIG. 55(b) is a front view of the outer frame 8002, and FIG. 55(c) is the line LVc-LVc of FIG. 55(b). is a sectional view of the folding member 8002a in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b), the outer frame 8002 is formed with a folded portion 8002a protruding inward. The folding part 8002a is a member that rotates the tip member 8561 of the locking member 8560 with respect to the base member 8562 when the locking member 8560 abuts thereon, and is arranged behind the locking member 8560 .

Further, referring to FIG. 55(c), the folded portion 8002a includes a first folded portion 8002a1 that has a substantially triangular cross section and protrudes forward, and a second folded portion 8002a1 that is connected to the base end side of the first folded portion 8002a1. It is mainly formed with a folded portion 8002a2.

Next, referring to FIG. 56, the operation of lock member 8560 will be described. FIGS. 56(a) to 56(d) are top views of the pachinko machine 1 in each state of closing the game machine main section 8003 opened from the outer frame 8002. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 56(a) and 56(b), the main part 8003 of the gaming machine is rotated from the outer frame 8002 around one end, whereby the lock member 8560 is operably exposed on the back surface of the inner frame 8004. be.

When the lock member 8560 is pulled backward from the inner frame 8004 in a state in which the game machine main portion 8003 is rotated about one end from the outer frame 8002, the tip side of the lever member 570 moves upward as in the first embodiment. and pushes the intervening plate 540 upward. Also, the tip side of the lever member 570 is arranged at a position facing the insertion hole 8551 of the back member 8550 . This restricts the movement of the lock member 8560 in the pushing direction.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 56(c) and 56(d), a description will be given of a case in which the main part 8003 of the game machine is rotated with respect to the outer frame 8002 and closed with the interposition plate 540 removed. . When the lock member 8560 is pulled out rearward from the inner frame 8004 , the tip member 8561 is arranged in a state protruding from the inner frame 8004 . When the gaming machine main portion 8003 is closed to the outer frame 8002 with the tip member 8561 protruding from the inner frame 8004, the tip member 8561 of the lock member 8560 comes into contact with the folded portion 8002a of the outer frame 8002.

In this case, the tip member 8561 first contacts the first folded portion 8002a1 of the folded portion 8002a. As described above, the first folded portion 8002a1 is inclined to have a substantially triangular cross-section. An external force that rotates the 8561 can be applied.

Furthermore, when the tip member 8561 is rotated by the base member 8562 by the first folded portion 8002a, the end of the tip member 8561 reaches the connection portion between the first folded portion 8002a1 and the second folded portion 8002a2, 2 The side surface of the folded portion 8002a2 is slidably displaced. As a result, an external force for rotating the distal end member 8561 with respect to the base member 8562 can be applied, and the rotational distance can be ensured.

Further, referring to FIG. 56(d), the tip member 8561 rotated with respect to the base member 8562 abuts the back surface of the pushing member 8711 arranged adjacently on its side surface. Therefore, as the distal end member 8561 rotates relative to the base member 8562, the pushing member 8711 can be pushed forward.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the operation of the launch restricting member 8710 will be described. 57(a) and 57(b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame 8004, corresponding to the cross-section taken along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 53(a).

As described above, when the distal end member 8561 of the locking member 8560 is rotated with respect to the base member 8562, its side surface presses the rear surface of the pushing member 8711. As shown in FIG. This allows the pushing member 8711 to be displaced forward.

When the pushing member 8711 is displaced forward, the inclined surface 8711a of the pushing member 8711 slides on the inclined surface 8712a of the slide piece 8712 . As a result, the displacement when the pushing member 8711 is pushed becomes an operation for displacing the slide piece 8712 downward. Further, when the slide piece 8712 slides downward due to the displacement of the pushing member 8711 described above, the inclined surface 8712b of the slide piece 8712 slides on the inclined surface 8713b of the protruding member 8713 . Therefore, the protrusion member 8713 can be pushed forward by the displacement of the slide piece 8712 displaced by the pushing member 8711 .

That is, when the game machine main section 8003 is rotated with the lock member 8560 pulled out backward (the interposition plate 540 is removed) and arranged inside the outer frame 8002, the pushing member 8711 pushes the tip member 8561 to rotate. , and the protruding member 8713 is pushed forward.

As a result, when the operator forgets to return the interposition plate 540 and the interposition plate 540 is not arranged on the main body member, the game machine main part 8003 is rotated and placed inside the outer frame 8002. A member 8713 protrudes from between the guide rails 75 . As a result, the operator can be made to recognize that the interposed plate 540 has been left unattached.

Next, referring to FIG. 58, the relationship between the projecting member 8713 and the game ball will be described. FIG. 58(a) is a front view of the gaming machine main section 8003, and FIG. 58(b) is a sectional view of the gaming machine main section 8003 along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb of FIG. 58(a). In addition, in FIG. 58(b), the glass 8 is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line.

The distance L1 between the protruding member 8713 and the outer rail 77 (guide rail 75) is set smaller than the diameter L2 of the game ball T and larger than half the diameter L2 of the game ball (L2/2<L1< L2). Further, the distance L3 from the projecting surface 8713a of the projecting member 8713 to the glass 8 is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball L2 (L3<L2).

Therefore, since the interval L1 is set to be smaller than the diameter L2 of the game ball T, the ball hit to the guide rail 75 cannot pass between the guide rails 75, so that the game ball T is placed in the game area PE It is possible to regulate that it is emitted (flowed) into.

That is, the protruding member 8713 protrudes from between the guide rails 75 to restrict the flow of the game ball T into the game area PE, thereby making it impossible to play the game. It is possible to prevent the game from being played with cheating by avoiding the ball from entering the entrance of the ball. In addition, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is not involved in a fraudulent act to recognize that it is impossible to play a game when playing the game unintentionally.

Furthermore, since the protruding member 8713 protrudes between the guide paths 75 from which the game ball T is launched, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the game cannot be played. In this case, even if a player who is not involved in the fraudulent act cannot recognize that the game cannot be played, the shot ball is restricted from being shot to the play area PE. The ball can be returned to the lower tray 50. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to avoid giving disadvantage to the player.

It should be noted that the projecting member 8583 is preferably arranged in the vicinity of the return preventing member 68 . As a result, it is possible to make the presence of the projecting member 8713 more easily recognized by the player watching the direction of the game ball shot from the shooting means.

Also, in this case, the retracting operation of the protruding member 8713 can be released by attaching the intervening plate 540 to a predetermined position and returning the locking member 8560 to the first position. That is, if the interposed plate 540 is not returned to a predetermined position, the protruding member 8713 is positioned forward and the game cannot be played.

Here, if the protruding member 8713 protrudes between the guide paths 42 to prevent the game ball T from being shot into the game area PE, in a normal game state in which the protruding member 8713 is retracted, the protruding member Due to variations in the retracted position of the 8713 and the gap between the projecting member 8713 and the opening 8004b, a load is applied to the game ball passing through the guide path 42, and there is a risk that the game ball T cannot be shot into the game area PE at a stable speed. be. In addition, there is a risk that the jumping game ball T will collide with the glass 8 and damage it due to the step caused by the variations and gaps described above.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the distance L1 between the protruding member 8713 and the guide rail 75 is formed larger than half the diameter L2 of the game ball T, as described above. Therefore, the game ball T to be shot is guided to the game area PE while contacting the outer guide rail 75 by the centrifugal force of the shot. is arranged (a gap larger than the radius of the game ball T is formed between the protruding member 8713 and the inlet portion 75b), so that the guidance of the game ball T in the normal game state is not loaded. , the game ball T can be shot to the game area PE at a stable speed. In addition, it is possible to suppress the breakage of the glass 8 by suppressing the jumping of the game ball T on the steps.

In addition, as described above, even if the retracted position of the protruding member 8713 varies, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied to the guidance of the game ball T. No need to consider. Therefore, the manufacturing of parts can be simplified, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, a suppressing mechanism in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 63. FIG.

FIG. 59 is an exploded front perspective view of the gaming machine main section 9003 in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 60(a) is a rear view of the gaming machine main section 9003, and FIG. 60(b) is a sectional view of the gaming machine main section 9003 along line LXb-LXb of FIG. 60(a). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, the front door 9005 in the ninth embodiment is provided with a handle projecting member 9720 on the far side (handle side) from the rotation axis. The handle protruding member 9720 includes a slide member 9721 arranged adjacent to the left side of the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550 when viewed from the back, and a connecting member 9722 having one end connected below the slide member 9721 and extending vertically. , a rotation transmission member 9723 having one end connected to the other end of the connection member 9722, and a protruding member 9724 arranged in the center of the operation handle 51 and connected to the rotation transmission member 9723 on the rear side.

The slide member 9721 is formed in a trapezoidal shape when viewed from the side. The slide member 9721 has an inclined surface 9721a extending to the tip and inclined downward on the side surface on the back side (the right side in FIG. 60(b)), and the bottom surface (the lower surface in FIG. 60(b)), which will be described later. A hole-shaped connecting hole 9721b having a predetermined depth into which one end of the connecting member 9722 is inserted is formed.

The inclined surface 9721a is a surface against which a tip member 8561 of a lock member 9560 described later abuts and is pressed. The slide member 9721 is arranged so as to be displaceable downward by the pressing force when the inclined surface 9721a is pressed in the horizontal direction.

The connecting hole 9721b is a hole to which one end of the connecting member 9722 is connected, and is formed to have a diameter substantially equal to or smaller than the diameter of the connecting member 9722 . As a result, one end of the connecting member 952 is press-fitted into the connecting hole 9721b, and the slide member 9721 and the connecting member 9722 are connected.

The connecting member 9722 is formed of a metal member and a round bar having a predetermined diameter, and extends vertically from the front door 9005 . One end of the connecting member 9722 is inserted into the connecting hole 9721b of the slide member 9721 as described above. On the other hand, the other end of the connecting member 9722 is provided with a bent portion 9722a that is bent in the direction opposite to the rotational axis of the front door 9005 .

The rotation transmitting member 9723 is formed in an elliptical shape when viewed from the side, and has a through hole 9723a formed at one end thereof into which the bent portion 9722a of the connecting member 9722 is inserted. A protrusion 9723b is formed on the other end of the rotation transmission member 9723 so as to protrude toward the rotation shaft side of the front door 9005 (left side in FIG. 2(a)).

The through-hole 9723a is a hole into which the bent portion 9722a of the connecting member 9722 is inserted, as described above. As a result, the rotation transmission member 9723 is rotatably arranged around the bent portion 9722a of the connecting member 9722 as an axis.

The protrusion 9723b is inserted through a sliding groove 9005a that is elongated in the front-rear direction, and is inserted through an engaging hole 9724a formed at one end of the protruding member 9724. As shown in FIG.

Here, the rotation transmission member 9723 has the through hole 9723a arranged above the projection 9723b. Therefore, when the rotation transmitting member 9723 rotates about the axis of the bent portion 9722a of the connecting member 9722, the projection 9723b can slide inside the sliding groove 9005a.

A torsion spring (not shown) is arranged between the bent portion 9722a of the connecting member 9722 and the through hole 9723a of the rotation transmitting member 9723. As shown in FIG. The torsion spring biases the projection 9723b side rearward about the rotation shaft 9593a of the rotation transmission member 9723 (in FIG. 60(b), the rotation transmission member 9723 is biased clockwise about the through hole 9723a). state). As a result, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member 9723 due to the gravity of the slide member 9721 and the connecting member 9722 can be suppressed.

The protruding member 9724 is a member that is formed in a columnar shape and arranged in the central portion of the operation handle 51 with its extending direction being the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 60(b)). The protruding member 9724 is arranged so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and its front surface is arranged so as to be substantially the same as the front surface of the operation handle 51 when positioned rearward (see FIG. 60(b)). In addition, the protruding member 9724 has a hole-shaped engaging hole 9724a penetrating in the left-right direction in a front view (the left-right direction in FIG. 60(a)) at the end on the back side.

The projection 9723b of the rotation transmission member 9723 described above is inserted into the engagement hole 9724a. As a result, when the rotation transmitting member 9723 rotates about the axis of the bent portion 9722a of the connecting member 9722 and the projection 9723b slides inside the sliding groove 9005a, the sliding of the projection 9723b interlocks with the sliding. The projecting member 9724 can be slid forward and backward.

The lock member 9560 differs from the base member 8562 of the eighth embodiment only in the length dimension in the extension direction, and the other configurations are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The game board accommodating portion 141 of the inner frame 9004 is formed with a folding portion 8002a on the inner surface thereof. The folded portion 8002a is a member that rotates the distal end member 8561 of the locking member 9560 with respect to the base member 9562 when the locking member 9560 abuts thereon, and is arranged behind the locking member 9560 .

Next, referring to FIG. 61, the operation of lock member 9560 will be described. 61(a) to (d) are top views of the game machine main section 9003 in each state of the operation of closing the front door 9005 opened from the inner frame 9004. FIG. 61(a) to 61(d), the locking member 9560 and the folded portion 8002a are illustrated by dashed lines.

As shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), the lock member 9560 is arranged to be operable from the front side of the inner frame 9003 by rotating the front door 9005 around one end of the inner frame 9004. be done.

With the front door 9005 rotated around one end of the inner frame 9004, when the lock member 9560 is pulled out rearward from the back member 550, the tip side of the lever member 570 is moved upward as in the first embodiment. The interposition plate 540 is pushed upward by being flipped up. Further, the tip side of the lever member 570 is arranged at a position facing the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550 . This restricts the movement of the lock member 9560 in the pushing direction.

Next, referring to FIGS. 61(c) and 61(d), the front door 9005 is rotated with respect to the inner frame 9004 with the interposition plate 540 removed (lock member 9560 pulled out rearward). I will explain what happens when the When the lock member 9560 is pulled out rearward from the back member 550 , the tip member 8561 is arranged in a state of protruding from the inner frame 8004 . When the front door 9005 is closed to the inner frame 9004 in this state (the tip member 8561 protrudes from the back member 550), the tip member 8561 of the lock member 9560 comes into contact with the folded portion 8002a of the inner frame 9004.

Here, since the operation of the tip member 8561 of the lock member 9560 after the tip member 8561 of the lock member 9560 abuts against the folded portion 8002a is the same as in the eighth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the handle projection member 9720 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63. FIG. 62(a) is a rear view of the front door 9005 viewed in the direction of arrow VXIIa in FIG. 61(b), and FIG. 62(b) is a rear view of the front door 9005 viewed in the direction of arrow VXIIb in FIG. 61(d). It is a diagram. FIG. 63(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front door 9005 taken along line LXIIIa-LXIIIa in FIG. 62(a), and FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. 62 and 63, illustration of the inner frame 9004 is omitted.

When the tip member 8561 of the lock member 9560 is rotated with respect to the base member 9562, the side surface of the tip member 8561 presses the inclined surface 9721a of the slide member 9721. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the slide member 9721 can be slid downward.

When the front door 9005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 9004 (the state shown in FIG. 61(d)), at least part of the bottom surface of the tip member 8561 of the lock member 9560 contacts the top surface of the slide member 9721. . As a result, when the protruding member 9724, which will be described later, is positioned in a protruding state, the pressing force of the protruding member 9724 can be received by the surfaces of the bottom surface of the locking member 9560 and the top surface of the distal end member 8561. As a result, damage to the lock member 9560 can be suppressed.

When the slide member 9721 is displaced downward, the connecting member 9722 connected to the slide member 9721 is similarly displaced downward. As a result, the rotation transmitting member 9723 to which the connecting member 9722 is connected is pushed downward.

When the through hole 9723a is pushed downward, the rotation transmitting member 9723 slides forward while rotating about the through hole 9723a. Accordingly, the protruding member 9724 engaged with the projection 9723b of the rotation transmission member 9723 is pushed forward, and the front surface of the protruding member 9724 protrudes from the central portion of the operation handle 51. As shown in FIG.

That is, when the operator forgets to return the interposition plate 540 and the interposition plate 540 is not arranged on the main body member 510 and the front door 9003 is closed to the inner frame 9004 , the protruding member 9724 moves to the central portion of the operation handle 51 . protrude from As a result, the operator can be made to recognize that the interposed plate 540 has been left unattached.

In this case, even if the operator does not recognize the projection of the projecting member 9724, the projecting member 9724 projects forward of the handle 51, so that the player cannot operate the handle 51. are restricted to be launched. The projection distance of the projecting member 9724 is preferably set larger than the radius of the handle 51 with respect to the handle 51, more preferably larger than the diameter of the handle 51.

That is, the protrusion member 9724 protrudes with respect to the handle 51 by a dimension larger than the radius of the handle 51 , thereby suppressing the player from grasping the handle 51 . Accordingly, when the lock member 9560 is not arranged at the first position, the projecting member 9724 can disable the playing of the game, thereby suppressing the playing of the game involving cheating. can.

Moreover, since the projection of the projecting member 9724 from the operating handle 51 is started during the operation of closing the front door 9005 to the inner frame 9004, the projection of the projecting member 9724 can be easily recognized by the operator. For example, when the protruding member 9724 protrudes from the operation handle 51 or the front door 9005 after the front door 9005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 9004, the worker's consciousness is already focused on the next work at that time. It is difficult to recognize that the protruding member 9724 protrudes from the operating handle 51 or the front door 9003 because it faces the front door 9003 . On the other hand, during the closing operation, there is a high possibility that the worker's consciousness is directed toward the front door 9003, so that at least the worker can easily recognize that the protrusion member 9724 has started to protrude.

Further, since the operation handle 51 is arranged on the side opposite to the rotation axis of the front door 9005, it is easily brought into contact with the operator when the operator closes the front door 9005 with respect to the inner frame 9004. can do. That is, when the front door 9005 is to be closed, the operator operates (pushes by hand) the other side in the width direction of the front door 9005 opposite to the side on which the inner frame 9004 is supported. By arranging the protruding member 9724 , the protruding member 9724 protruding from the front door 9005 can be easily recognized by the operator. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the operator to recognize that the interposing plate 540 has been forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position.

In this case, while the operator is likely to close the front door 9005 to the inner frame 9004 while gripping the operation handle 51, the operation handle 51 may be closed if the interposition plate 540 is forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position. Since the protruding member 9724 protrudes from the tip of the protruding member 9724, the tip of the protruding member 9724 can be easily pressed against the operator's hand. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the operator to recognize that the interposing plate 540 has been forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position.

Next, referring to FIG. 64, a state in which the protruding member 9724 protrudes from the operating handle 51 will be described. 64(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating handle 51 before the projecting member 9724 is projected, and FIG. 64(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating handle 51 after the projecting member 9724 is projected.

The operating handle 51 is formed with a rotating member that is rotated so that the player can hit the game ball T into the game area. Note that illustration of the rotating member is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 64, a projecting member 9724 inserted into the center of the operating handle 51 is formed with a projection 9724b. The protrusion 9724 b is a member that protrudes radially outward from the protruding member 9724 and is arranged in the space inside the operating handle 51 .

Here, when the protruding member 9724 protrudes forward, the protrusion 9724b formed on the protruding member 9724 is similarly displaced forward. When the projection 9724b is displaced forward, it engages with a rotating member provided on the operating handle 51. As shown in FIG. As a result, when the projecting member 9724 is projected, the rotating member of the operating handle 51 cannot be operated.

Therefore, since the operation of the rotating member of the operation handle 51 is disabled and the game is disabled, the game ball T is prevented from entering the ball entrance of the game area PE, which is accompanied by cheating. It is possible to suppress the game from being performed. In addition, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is not involved in a fraudulent act to recognize that it is impossible to play a game when playing the game unintentionally.

In this case, even if a player who is not involved in the fraudulent act cannot recognize that he or she is unable to play the game, shooting the game ball T is restricted, so that the player is not disadvantaged. You can avoid giving

Next, the suppression mechanism in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 70. FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the suppression mechanism in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. FIG. FIG. 65 is an exploded front perspective view of the gaming machine main section 10003 in the tenth embodiment. 66(a) is a top view of the gaming machine main section 10003, and FIG. 66(b) is a schematic side view of the gaming machine main section 10003. FIG. FIG. 67 is a schematic cross-sectional view along line LXVII-LXVII of FIG. 66(a). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the front door 10005 according to the tenth embodiment is provided with a rotation restricting member 10730 on the rear surface of the front door 10005 on the far side from the rotation axis that rotates with respect to the inner frame 9004 . On the other hand, a decorative member 10740 having a rotary shaft 10750 below is arranged on the front side on the right side of the front door 10005 when viewed from the front. An opening 10005b into which the projection 10742 of the decorative member 10740 is inserted is formed through the front door 10005 at a position facing the projection 10742 .

The rotation restricting member 10730 includes a slide member 9721 arranged adjacent to the left side of the insertion hole 551 of the back member 550 in the rear view, and a connecting member 10592 having one end connected to the lower side of the slide member 9721 and extending vertically. , and an engaging member 10731 whose one end is connected to the other end of the connecting member 10592 .

Since the connecting member 10722 differs from the connecting member 9722 in the ninth embodiment only in extension length dimension, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the connecting member 10722 is formed to have a length dimension shorter than that of the connecting member 9722 of the ninth embodiment.

The engaging member 10731 is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side and has a predetermined thickness. The engaging member 10731 has a through hole 10731c that penetrates in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 66(a)) at the end of the long side (one side) of the engaging member 10731 formed in a substantially L shape when viewed from the side. At the same time, a rotating shaft 10731b projecting in both left and right directions is formed at the approximate center of the long side (one side). On the other hand, the short side (the other side) formed in a substantially L-shape in side view is formed as an engagement piece 10731a that engages with a decorative member 10740, which will be described later.

The rotating shaft 10731b is a shaft portion for rotating with respect to the front door 10005 when the engaging member 10731 is arranged on the rear surface of the front door 10005. Formed in a columnar shape.

The through-hole 10731c is a hole into which the bent portion 9722a of the connecting member 10722 is inserted. It is formed in the shape of an elongated hole. Accordingly, when the connecting member 10722 is displaced in the extension direction, the bent portion 9722a of the connecting member 10722 can slide inside the through hole 9723a. As a result, the engaging member 10731 can be rotationally displaced about the rotating shaft 10731b as the connecting member 10722 is displaced without changing the position of the rotating shaft 10731b.

The engaging piece 10731a is a member that prevents the decorative member 10740 from being displaced by being fitted inside a concave groove 10742a of the decorative member 10740, which will be described later. It is set to be the same as the axis of 10731b. As a result, when the engaging member 10731 is rotationally displaced around the rotary shaft 10731b, the cross-sectional area of the decorative member 10740 fitted inside the groove 10742a can be kept constant. As a result, it is not necessary to consider the shape of the groove 10742a of the decorative member 10740 so as not to interfere with the rotational displacement of the engaging member 10731, and the width of the groove 10742a can be minimized.

A torsion spring (not shown) is arranged on the rotating shaft 10731b of the engaging member 10731 . The torsion spring is arranged in a state of always biasing the rotating shaft 10731b of the engaging member 10731 in a forward rotating direction. Thereby, the engaging member 10731 can be prevented from rotating due to the gravity of the slide member 9721 and the connecting member 10722 .

Next, the decorative member 10740 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 68(a) is a top view of the decorative member 10740, FIG. 68(b) is a rear view of the decorative member 10740, and FIG. 68(c) is the decoration in LXVIIIc-LXVIIIc of FIG. 68(a). 10740 is a cross-sectional view of member 10740. FIG.

The decorative member 10740 is formed in a substantially U shape when viewed from above, and is arranged on the front door 10005 with the curved surface positioned on the front side of the front door 10005 . In addition, the decorative member 10740 is a member made of a transparent material, and is configured so that lighting or blinking of light emitting means such as an LED provided inside can be visually recognized by the player. (right side in front view) (see FIGS. 65 to 67).

The decorative member 10740 includes a main body portion 10743 formed in a substantially U shape when viewed from the top, a cover portion 10741 through which a rotating shaft 10750 for rotation is inserted, and a protrusion with which an engaging piece 10601b of the engaging member 10731 engages. A part 10742 is mainly provided.

The body portion 10743 is formed in a substantially U shape having a predetermined thickness when viewed from the top, and has a notch 10743a formed in an arc shape on the lower rear surface side. The notch 10743a is formed with substantially the same axis as the shaft hole 10741a described later.

The cover portion 10741 is a portion that protrudes from the outer surface of the notch 10743 a of the body portion 10743 and is formed to have a smaller thickness than the body portion 10743 . Further, the cover portion 10741 is formed with a shaft hole 10741a penetrating in the left-right direction. The shaft hole 10741a is a hole through which a rotating shaft 10750 described later is inserted, and is formed to have a diameter substantially equal to or larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 10750 . Therefore, since the shaft hole 10741a is formed on the back side of the body portion 10743, when the decorative member 10740 is arranged with its longitudinal direction vertical, a load can be applied to the decorative member 10740 in a forward tilting direction.

The protruding portion 10742 is a portion that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the main body portion 10743, and is a portion that is inserted into the opening 10005b formed in the front door 10005 when the decorative member 10740 is arranged on the front door 10005. The protruding portion 10742 is formed in a fan shape when viewed from the side, and its curvature is formed from an axis that is substantially the same as the axis of the shaft hole 10741a. In addition, the inner curved surface formed in a fan-like shape when viewed from the side is formed continuously with the curved surface of the notch 10743a.

As a result, when the decorative member 10740 is tilted forward about the axial center of the shaft hole 10741a, the cross section of the projecting portion 10742 inserted through the opening 10005a of the front door 10005 can be kept constant. That is, the radial dimension L1 about the axis of the shaft hole 10741a can be kept constant. As a result, the formation of a gap between the opening 10005a and the decorative member 10740 can be suppressed.

Further, the protruding portion 10742 is formed with a protrusion 10742b protruding upward in the axial direction from the tip thereof. The projection 10742b is a member that functions as a stopper when the decorative member 10740 is tilted forward about the axial center of the shaft hole 10741a. A radial dimension L2 is formed larger than the opening 10005a. Thus, when the decorative member 10740 tilts forward about the axial center of the shaft hole 10741a, the projection 10742b can regulate the amount of tilting rotation.

Further, the projecting portion 10742 is formed with a groove 10742a into which the engaging piece 10731a of the engaging member 10731 is inserted. The recessed groove 10742a is a groove curved in a fan shape in a side view with the axis of the rotating shaft 10731b of the engaging member as the axis. Further, as described above, since the engagement piece 10731a is inserted into the inner surface of the groove 10742a, the groove width of the groove 10742a is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the engagement piece 10731a.

Returning to FIG. 67, the arrangement of the decorative member 10740 will be explained. Referring to FIG. 67, the upper plate 17 on which the decorative member 10740 is arranged is formed with a projecting portion 17a that curves and protrudes upward.

A shaft support hole 17b into which the rotating shaft 10750 is inserted is formed through the protrusion 17a at the center in a side view. The decorative member 10740 is arranged on the front door 10005 so as to surround the outer peripheral surface of the protrusion 17a. be mounted.

Moreover, the protrusion 17a is formed in substantially the same shape as the curved shape of the notch 10743a of the decorative member 10740, and its arc length is set larger than that of the notch 10743a. This allows the decorative member 10740 to tilt forward about the shaft hole 10741a.

Therefore, when the decorative member 10740 is arranged on the front door 10005, the gap formed between the protrusion 17a and the notch 10743a is minimized, and even when the decorative member 10740 is tilted, the gap is large. can prevent it from becoming As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap on the front side of the game machine, thereby suppressing fraud by inserting a casting into the gap.

Next, referring to FIG. 69, the operation of lock member 9560 will be described. 69(a) to 69(d) are top views of the gaming machine main section 10003 in each state of the operation of closing the front door 10005 opened from the inner frame 9004. FIG. 69(a) to 69(d), the locking member 9560 and the folded portion 8002a are illustrated by dashed lines.

Here, description of each state of the operation of closing the front door 10005 opened from the inner frame 9004 shown in FIG. 69 is the same as that of the ninth embodiment except for the shape of the front door 10005. Therefore, its description is omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 70, the operation of rotation restricting member 10730 will be described. 70(a) is a sectional view of the gaming machine main section 10003 along line LXXa-LXXa in FIG. 69(b), and FIG. 70(b) is a gaming machine main section along line LXXb-LXXb in FIG. 10003 is a cross-sectional view of the portion 10003. FIG.

When the tip member 8561 of the lock member 9560 is rotated with respect to the base member 9562, the side surface of the tip member 8561 presses the inclined surface 9721a of the slide member 9721. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the slide member 9721 can be slid downward.

When the slide member 9721 is displaced downward, the connecting member 10722 connected to the slide member 9721 is similarly displaced downward. As a result, the engaging member 10731 to which the connecting member 10722 is connected is rotationally displaced around the rotating shaft 10731b.

When the through hole 10731c side of the engaging member 10731 is displaced downward, the engaging piece 10731a side is displaced upward. As a result, the engaging piece 10731a is pulled out from the inner surface of the groove 10742a of the decorative member 10740. As shown in FIG. Accordingly, the engagement between the decorative member 10740 and the engaging member 10731 is released, and the decorative member 10740 tilts forward about the shaft hole 10741a. As a result, even if the operator forgets to return the interposition plate 540 after removing the interposition plate 540, the decorative member 10740 disposed on the front surface of the front door 10005 can be tilted forward. The worker can be made to recognize that the installation plate 540 has been forgotten.

In addition, since the tilting of the decorative member 10740 is started during the operation of closing the front door 10005 to the inner frame 9004, the tilting of the decorative member 10740 can be easily recognized by the operator.

Furthermore, since the decorative member 10740 is arranged on the side opposite to the rotational axis of the front door 10005, it is easily brought into contact with the worker when the worker closes the front door 10005 with respect to the inner frame 9004. be able to. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the operator to recognize that the interposing plate 540 has been forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position.

In addition, in the case of the tenth embodiment, the decorative member 10740 that tilts from the front door 10005 is a member that extends in the vertical direction. The tilted distance can be sufficiently secured. As a result, the decorative member 10740 can be reliably brought into contact with the worker working in front of the front door 10005 . As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the operator to recognize that the interposing plate 540 has been forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position.

Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 77. FIG. In the first embodiment described above, when the lock member 560 is placed in the second position (the position removed from the insertion tube portion 541), the closing of the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 is restricted. In the eleventh embodiment, the panel member 520 is displaced when the front door 11005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 with the lock member 560 arranged at the second position. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

Further, the first position of the locking member 560 described below means that the locking member 560 is inserted through the tubular insertion portion 541 of the interposition plate 540 and protrudes from one end side of the tubular insertion portion 541, as in the first embodiment. The proximal end of the locking member 560 (base member 562) is held in the holding portion 511e of the main body member 11510, and the distal end of the locking member 560 (distal member 561) protruding from the other end side of the insertion tube portion 541 is the rear surface. The second position is a state in which the member 550 is held in the insertion hole 551 , and the lock member 560 is pulled out to the back side of the back member 550 and the projecting portion 562 a is engaged with the front side of the back member 550 . state.

Furthermore, in the following description, as in the first embodiment, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. ), the horizontal direction of the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 is defined as the horizontal direction, and the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG.

First, referring to FIGS. 71 to 74, the overall configuration of the upper portion of front door 11005 will be described. FIG. 71 is a front view of the upper portion of the front door 11005 in the eleventh embodiment. 72 is an exploded perspective view of the upper portion of the front door 11005. FIG. FIG. 73 is a top view of the main part 11003 of the gaming machine. 74(a) and 74(b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the main part 11003 of the gaming machine taken along line LXXIVa-LXXIVa in FIG.

In FIG. 71, a transparent region R1 and an opaque region R2, which will be described later, are shown surrounded by two-dot chain lines, and the outer shape of the panel member 11520 arranged on the back side of the transparent region R1 is shown by chain lines. be. 73 shows a state in which the top plate 530 and the interposition plate 540 are removed (seeing through), and FIGS. 74(a) and 74(b) show the top plate 530 and the interposition plate 540 is shown attached. Further, in FIG. 74(a), the front door 11005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4, and in FIG. Positioned states are illustrated respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 71 to 74, the upper portion of the front door 11005 in the eleventh embodiment includes a main body member 11510 arranged on the front side, a panel member 11520 housed in the main body member 11510, and a main body member 11520. A rotating member 11810 that is accommodated in 11510 and arranged in a rotatable state, a connecting member 11820 that is connected to the rotating member 11810, a top plate 530 that is arranged on the upper surface of the main body member 11510, and an intervening plate. 540 , a rear member 11550 fastened to the rear side of the main body member 11510 , and a lock member 560 and a lever member 570 disposed on the rear member 11550 .

The main body member 11510 is a member made of a light-transmitting material for constituting the electric decoration part on the front upper part of the pachinko machine 1, and the light emitting means such as LED provided inside emits light at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. Lighting up or blinking according to the change of the game state plays a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. Further, the body member 11510 has a transparent region R1 (see FIG. 74(a)) formed of a transparent material in a region corresponding to the panel member 11520 to be described later on the front side. model information, etc., displayed in the .

Further, on the back side of the panel member 11520, an abnormality display member 11518 made of a transparent material is arranged at a position spaced apart from the panel member 11520 by a small distance. An LED board 11519 on which an LED capable of emitting light is mounted is arranged on the rear side of the abnormality display member 11518 . As a result, the light emitted from the LED board 11519 enters the panel member 11520 via the abnormality display member 11518, then exits from the panel member 11520 and is emitted (emitted) to the transparent region R1.

The abnormality display device 11518 is a member that displays an abnormality on the front side when there is an abnormality in the closing operation of the front door 11005 with respect to the inner frame 4, which will be described later. A shape such as a figure is formed. Therefore, when the panel member 11520 is not arranged in front (on the front side) of the abnormality display device 11518, the light emitted from the LED board 11520 through the transparent region of the abnormality display device 11518 is blocked from closing the front door 11005. It can be visually recognized by the operator who has operated. As a result, the operator can recognize characters and figures formed in the transparent area of the abnormality display device 11518, and can grasp that the pachinko machine 1 has an abnormality.

In this embodiment, the side surface of the panel member 11520 on the back side (the side of the error display device 11518) is processed to have a plurality of unevenness. This makes it easier to diffuse the light partially entering the panel member 11520 through the transparent region of the abnormality display device 11518 . Therefore, light can be easily emitted from the entire front side of the panel member 11520 .

Further, the body member 11510 comprises an opaque region R2 (see FIG. 74(a)) formed from an opaque material below the transparent region R1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the players from viewing the constituent materials such as the light-emitting member and the speaker disposed inside the main body member 11510 . That is, since the opaque region R2 can be used to dispose the constituent materials such as the light emitting member and the speaker, it is possible to easily dispose the panel member 11520 by securing the space on the back side of the transparent region R1. It is possible to secure a space for arranging constituent materials such as a light-emitting member and a speaker arranged in the main body member 11510 .

In addition, the front side of the main body 11510 (the side on which the transparent region R1 and the opaque region R2 are formed) is formed into a curved surface that curves downward toward the rear side in a side view (see FIG. 74(a)). . As a result, when the main body 11510 is viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the visible area in the vertical direction of the transparent area R1 (the vertical direction in FIG. The visible region of the direction can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the area where the inner space of the main body 11510 can be visually recognized from the player side (front side) through the transparent area R1. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the panel member 11520 through the transparent region R1.

Further, the front side of the main body portion 11510 is formed in a curved shape projecting from the left and right ends to the center portion toward the front side when viewed from above (see FIG. 73). Further, as will be described later, the panel member 11520 is curved along the internal space of the main body portion 11510, so that a region where the panel member 11520 can be visually recognized from the outside of the main body portion 11510 in the horizontal direction through the transparent region R1 is formed. You can make it bigger.

A housing portion 511 for disposing the top plate 530 and the interposition plate 540 is recessed in the upper surface of the main body member 11510 . The accommodating portion 511 is recessed downward from the bottom surface with slide grooves 511a formed in the mutually opposing left and right inner wall surfaces (left and right in FIG. 73) of the inner peripheral edge (inner wall surface) of the accommodating portion 511. A recessed portion 511c and an escape portion 511d, a holding portion 511e formed on the front side of the escaped portion 511d, and a holding portion 511e formed in the front side of the escape portion 511d. ) and second receiving grooves 11514 recessed on both sides of the receiving groove 11513 .

The housing groove 11513 is a space for housing a rotating member 11810, which will be described later, and is sized to allow the rotating member 11810 to rotate. A pair of accommodation grooves 11513 are formed at positions spaced apart from the opposing left and right inner wall surfaces of the inner peripheral edge of the accommodation portion 511 , and a pair of rotating members 11810 , which will be described later, are arranged in each of the accommodation grooves 11513 .

The second housing groove 11514 is a space for housing the connecting member 11820 that is connected to the rotating member 11810, and is located on the side where the connecting member 11820 is arranged (in this embodiment, the inner side in the facing direction of the pair of rotating members 11810). It is formed continuously on the side surface of the accommodation groove 11513 . Thereby, a connecting member 11820 to be described later can be arranged inside the main body member 11510 .

Further, in the housing groove 11513 and the second housing groove 11514, a groove 11513a is recessed downward from the bottom surface of the housing portion 511 and the bottom surface of the second housing groove 11514. As shown in FIG. The concave groove 11513a is a space in which the shaft portion 11811 of the rotating member 11810 is arranged, and the separation distance (groove width) between the opposing side surfaces is set slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 11811 . Thereby, the shaft portion 11811 can be disposed inside the concave groove 11513a to hold the rotating member 11810 in a rotatable state.

In this embodiment, when the shaft portion 11811 is arranged in the groove 11513a, a space is formed above the shaft portion 11811, but the shaft portion 11811 does not come out of the groove 11513a. A member that closes the space above the shaft portion 11811 may be provided in the groove 11513a so as not to move.

The rotating member 11810 is made of a resin material and formed of a plate-like body that bends in a substantially L shape when viewed from the side. Further, the rotating member 11810 has a through hole penetrating in the plate pressure direction at a bent portion in a side view, and a columnar shaft portion 11811 made of a metal material is fitted in the through hole.

The rotating member 11810 has a circular recessed portion 11812 to be fastened on the outer peripheral surface of one end thereof. The to-be-fastened portion 11812 is a female screw for fastening and fixing a panel member 11520 to be described later. Can be fastened and fixed.

One of the rotating members 11810 formed in a pair (the side on which the connecting member 11820 is arranged) is formed with an elongated hole-shaped sliding groove 11813 through which the insertion portion 11821 of the connecting member 11820 described later is inserted. be done. Accordingly, when the connecting member 11820 is displaced, the displacement of the connecting member 11820 is transmitted to the rotating member 11810 via the sliding groove 11813, and the rotating member 11810 is rotated about the shaft portion 11811 as an axis.

The slide groove 11813 is formed in one of the pair of rotating members 11810, but may be formed in both of the pair of rotating members 11810. FIG. In this case, the parts of the rotating member 11810 can be shared, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, if the sliding groove 11813 is damaged after being introduced into the store, by reversing the arrangement of the pair of rotating members 11810, a new sliding groove 11813 can be used, which reduces the cost of parts replacement. can be reduced.

The connecting member 11820 is made of a resin material and has a rectangular plate shape when viewed from the side. In addition, the connecting member 11820 is formed to extend from one end of the body member 11510 to the other end of the back member 11550, and is fitted in a through-hole extending through the one end in the plate thickness direction. It has an insertion portion 11821 and a bulging portion 11822 that bulges out on both sides in the plate thickness direction on the other end side.

The bulging portion 11822 has the other contact surface 11822b on the side of the body member 11510 (the other end of the connecting member 11820) and the one contact surface 11822a on the side of the back member 11550 (one end of the connecting member 11820). and

The one-side contact surface 11822a is a surface against which the lock member 560 abuts when the front door 11005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 with the lock member 560 arranged at the second position. The width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 73) dimension is set to be substantially the same as the width direction dimension of the member 560 (rotational axis direction of the lock member 560). As a result, the contact area when the lock member 560 comes into contact with the one-side contact surface 11822a can be maximized, so that the impact when the lock member 560 comes into contact with the connecting member 11820 can be dispersed. It is possible to suppress damage to the one-side contact surface 11822a (connecting member 11820).

Further, below the one-side contact surface 11822a, a restriction portion 11822c is recessed toward the other-side contact surface 11822b. The restricting portion 11822c is a member that restricts the displacement of the connecting member 11820 toward the back surface member 11550 (back surface side), and is formed at a position facing a contact portion 11558a described later. Displacement of the connecting member 11820 to the rear side is restricted.

The other-side contact surface 11822b is a surface against which a coil spring SP6, which will be described later, is brought into contact and the biasing force of the coil spring SP6 is applied. As a result, the connecting member 11820 is biased by the biasing force of the coil spring SP6, and the restricting portion 11822c is biased toward the contact portion 11558a.

The coil spring SP6 is a spring member that is spirally turned a plurality of times, and its axial direction (turning direction) is set in the pull-out direction of the lock member 560 (horizontal direction in FIG. 74(a)). In addition, the coil spring SP6 is arranged in a slightly compressed state between the covering member 11830 fastened and fixed to the back member 11550 and the opposing contact surface 11822b on the other side. Therefore, the biasing force of the coil spring SP6 can always bias the other side contact surface 11822b (connecting member 11820) toward the back side with respect to the back member 11550. FIG.

The covering member 11830 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper side and the back member 11550 open, and standing walls 11831 standing outward are provided at the ends of the two opposing sides on the side of the back member 11550 . It is formed. A plurality of circular through-holes are formed in the standing wall 11831, and screws are fastened to the rear member 11550 through the through-holes, thereby fastening the covering member 11830 to the rear member 11550. Fixed.

The rear surface member 11550 is provided with an insertion hole 551 at a position corresponding to the insertion cylindrical portion 541 of the interposition plate 540, and a second insertion hole 11558 below the insertion hole 551 and an intermediate plate 11559, which will be described later. is perforated.

The second insertion hole 11558 is a hole in which the bulging portion 11822 of the connecting member 11820 is arranged, and is formed to have an inner edge shape slightly larger than the outer dimensions (width and height) of the bulging portion 11822. be. In addition, the second insertion hole 11558 has a contact portion 11558a protruding upward from the lower surface of the end portion of the back member 11550 on the back side (inner frame 4 side).

The abutting portion 11558a is a portion to which the regulating portion 11822c of the connecting member 11820 abuts as described above, and the projecting dimension thereof is the width of the recess in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 74(a)) of the regulating portion 11822c. is set smaller than Thereby, the restricting portion 11822c can be brought into contact with the contact portion 11558a.

In addition, the dimension of the contact portion 11558a in the thickness direction (the direction from the front surface to the back surface (horizontal direction in FIG. 74(a))) is the same as the recessed dimension of the restricting portion 11822c (the dimension in the lateral direction in FIG. 74(a)). They are set to be approximately the same. As a result, in a state where the connecting member 11820 is biased by the coil spring SP6 and the restricting portion 11822c is in contact with the contact portion 11558a, the one side contact surface 11822a is the back surface of the back member 11550 on the inner frame 4 side (Fig. 74(a) right side). Thereby, when the lock member 560 is in the second position, the base member 562 of the lock member 560 can be brought into contact with the one-side contact surface 11822a.

Further, the contact portion 11558a has a separation distance from the projecting tip to the upper end surface of the insertion hole 551 larger than the dimension in the extension direction of the tip member 561 of the lock member 560 (horizontal direction in FIG. 74(a)). position. As a result, when the lock member 560 is in the second position, the one-side contact surface 11822a can be the only portion that the tip member 561 of the lock member 560 contacts. That is, it is possible to prevent the tip member 561 from contacting the contact portion 11558a.

The intermediate plate 11559 has an upper surface formed from a portion of the inner surface of the insertion hole 551 and a lower surface formed from a portion of the second insertion hole 11558 . In addition, the intermediate plate 11559 is formed continuously from the side surface (front surface) on the front side (body member 11510 side) of the back member 11550, and from the side surface (back surface) on the back side (inner frame 4 side) of the back member 11550. , are spaced apart by a distance larger than the width of the tip member 561 of the locking member 560 in the thickness direction (vertical direction in FIG. 74(a)).

As described above, when the lock member 560 is at the second position, the contact of the tip member 561 with the contact portion 11558a is suppressed. The member 561 can be inserted inside the insertion hole 551 and the second insertion hole 11558 . Therefore, when the front door 11005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 when the lock member 560 is in the second position, the rear side (inner frame 4 side) of the tip member 561 contacts the inner frame 4 and the front side is closed. (Body member 11510 side), and the tip member 561 is inserted inside the insertion hole 551 and the second insertion hole 11558 .

The panel member 11520 is formed of a resin material in a curved shape along the inner space of the recessed portion 511c of the main body member 11510, and the curved axis is at substantially the same position as the axis of the shaft portion 11811 when viewed in the axial direction of the shaft portion 11811. set. As a result, when rotating member 11810 is rotated to displace panel member 11520, the area of the displacement trajectory of panel member 11520 can be minimized. As a result, the internal space of the recess 511c can be easily used as a space for arranging other members.

In addition, the panel member 11520 has fastening portions 11521 projecting in the left-right direction below both end portions in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 73), and is inserted through the through holes formed in the fastening portions 11521. The screw is screwed into the fastened portion 11812 of the rotating member 11810 to fasten to the rotating member 11810 .

Next, a procedure for exchanging the panel member 11520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIG. 75(a) and 75(b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the main part 11003 of the gaming machine. 74(a) to 75(a), FIG. 74(a), FIG. 74(b), and FIG. 75(a) are illustrated in order when the panel member 11520 is replaced. FIG. 75(b) shows a state in which the front door 11005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 without the locking member 560 being returned to the first position (remaining in the second position). Further, FIGS. 75(a) and 75(b) correspond to FIG. 74(a).

As shown in FIG. 74(a), when the lock member 560 is pushed into the first position, the lock member 560 is inserted through the insertion tube portion 541 of the interposed plate 540 in the same manner as in the first embodiment. The proximal end of the locking member 560 (base member 562) protruding from one end side of the tubular insertion portion 541 is held inside the holding portion 511e of the main body member 11510, and the locking member 560 protruding from the other end side of the tubular insertion portion 541. The tip of (the tip member 561 ) is held in the insertion hole 551 of the back member 11550 . Therefore, the intervening plate 540 cannot be removed from the housing portion 511 of the main body member 11510 .

As shown in FIG. 74(b), the locking member 560 is pulled out from the state shown in FIG. Further withdrawal of locking member 560 is disabled upon reaching the second mated position.

By this pull-out operation, the lock member 560 (base member 562) is pulled out from the insertion tube portion 541 of the interposition plate 540, and the end surface of the proximal end of the lock member 560 (base member 562) retreats to a position exceeding the lever member 570. be done. That is, a space is formed above the lever member 570 . As a result, the lever member 570 is rotated by the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP1, and the tip side thereof is flipped upward. In this case, since the contacted portion 543 of the interposing plate 540 is in contact with the upper surface of the tip side of the lever member 570, the contacted portion 543 is pushed upward by the lever member 570, thereby One end in the longitudinal direction of the installation plate 540 (the side on which the lever member 570 is arranged) is lifted upward. Accordingly, the operator who replaces the panel member 11520 can remove the interposed plate 540 by holding one longitudinal end of the interposed plate 540 (the left side in the left-right direction in FIG. 73).

As shown in FIG. 75(a), the intervening plate 540 is removed from the main body member 11510 from the state shown in FIG. Since the space is formed, the top plate 530 can be slid backward (retracted) using the space. As a result, the front of the top plate 530 is opened and the panel member 11520 can be replaced. The replacement of the panel member 11520 is performed by inserting a screwdriver or the like from the open space in front of the top plate 530 and removing the screw fastening the panel member 11520 and the rotating member 11810 . On the other hand, after replacing the panel member 11520, the panel member 11520 can be returned to the state shown in FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 75(b), after the operator replaces the panel member 11520, the operator forgets to return the lock member 560 from the second position to the first position. A description will be given of the case where the

As shown in FIG. 75(b), when the worker pushes the interposition plate 540 downward to close the front door 11005 with respect to the inner frame 4 with the lock member 560 arranged at the second position, , the tip member 561 of the locking member 560 is pushed forward by the front surface (front surface) of the inner frame 4 . That is, the tip member 561 of the lock member 560 is inserted inside the insertion hole 551 and the second insertion hole 11558 of the back member 11550 .

As described above, when the lock member 560 is arranged at the second position, the tip member 561 of the lock member 560 is brought into contact with the one side contact surface 11822a of the connecting member 11820 . Therefore, when the lock member 560 is pushed forward by the inner frame 4 , the coupling member 11820 is slid forward by the displacement of the lock member 560 .

Further, when the connecting member 11820 is slid forward, the insertion portion 11821 of the connecting member 11820 pushes the inner surface of the sliding groove 11813 forward. Thereby, the rotating member 11810 can be rotated around the shaft portion 11811 . As a result, the portion to be fastened 11812 of the rotating member 11810 can be displaced downward. As a result, the panel member 11520 fastened to the fastened portion 11812 is displaced downward.

Here, as described above, the abnormality display member 11518 is arranged on the rear side (rear) of the transparent region R1. Therefore, by displacing the panel member 11520 downward (toward the rear side of the opaque region R2), the display of the abnormality display member 11518 can be visually recognized from the front side. This makes it easier for the operator who replaces the panel member 11520 to recognize that there is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (forgetting to return the lock member 560). The display contents of the abnormality display member 11518 include, for example, character display such as "abnormal" or "please call a staff member (operator)", or graphic display such as "x".

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, on the front side of the main body member 11510, a region (transparent region R1) corresponding to the panel member 11520 before movement is formed of a transparent material, and is after movement. A region corresponding to the panel member 11520 (opaque region R2) is formed from an opaque material. Therefore, when the panel member 11520 is in a moved state, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the panel member 11520 through the body member 11510 . As a result, the operator can be made aware that the lock member 560 has been forgotten to be returned.

Furthermore, as described above, the inner frame 4 and the front door 11005 are connected by the hinge 18, and the front door 11005 is opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 4 with the hinge 18 as the rotation axis. Therefore, the operator who opens and closes the front door 11005 with respect to the inner frame 4 is often positioned on the side opposite to the hinge 18 side. As described above, the front side of the main body portion 11510 is formed in a curved shape projecting from the left and right ends to the center portion toward the front side when viewed from above, so that the panel member 11520 can be visually recognized through the transparent region R1. is magnified. Therefore, the operator who closes the front door 11005 with respect to the inner frame 4 can easily see the panel member 11520 . Therefore, the operator who closes the front door 11005 with respect to the inner frame 4 can easily recognize the movement of the panel b diagram 11520 visually. As a result, the operator can be made aware that the lock member 560 has been forgotten to be returned.

Here, in the eighth to tenth embodiments described above, when the operator forgets to return the lock members 8560, 9560, 10560 and closes the front door 11005 with respect to the inner frame 4, members other than the panel member 520 is displaced to make the operator aware that the lock members 8560, 9560, and 10560 have forgotten to be returned.

However, in the eighth to tenth embodiments described above, it is necessary for the operator to recognize that the lock members 8560, 9560, and 10560 have not been returned. , the handle 51). Therefore, when the operator does not notice the displacement of the displaced member, the player is put in a state where it is difficult for the player to play, or a state where the player cannot actually play the game although it looks playable at first glance. Therefore, there is a risk that the interest of the player will be greatly spoiled.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the player plays the pachinko machine 1, the panel member 11520, which is not directly involved in the game, is displaced. In addition, even if the operator does not notice the displacement of the panel member 11520 when the front door 11005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4, the player's game is prevented from being hindered (the game becomes difficult to play). can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the panel member 11520 to be replaced by the operator is displaced. Therefore, when the operator normally checks whether the replacement object (panel member 11520) is arranged in an appropriate state and position after the replacement work, the pachinko machine 1 becomes abnormal due to the displacement of the replacement object. This makes it easier for the operator to recognize that there is (forgetting to return the lock member 560).

Furthermore, since the replacement target (panel member 11520) is arranged on the back side of the opaque region of the main body member 11510 after the movement, when the worker confirms the replacement target panel member 11520 after replacement, the operator cannot confirm the panel member. 11520 can be made difficult to see. Therefore, it is not necessary for the operator to judge the abnormality after the replacement of the panel member 11520 by its arrangement position, and the operator can easily recognize that the replacement target is not in an appropriate position. As a result, the operator can easily recognize that there is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (the locking member 560 has been forgotten to be returned).

Further, as described above, the coil spring SP6 is arranged so as to be able to expand and contract in the moving direction of the lock member 560 . Therefore, when the tip member 561 of the lock member 560 is displaced forward by the inner frame 4, the lock member 560 can be braked by the biasing force of the coil spring SP6. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lock member 560 from changing at a high speed, and to suppress the breakage of the lock member 560 .

When the operator closes the front door 11005 to the inner frame 4 without attaching the interposition plate 540 (forgetting to put it back) and without pushing the interposition plate 540 downward, the lock member 560 The sliding displacement of the lock member 560 is restricted by the contact of the tip of the base member 562 with the side surface of the lever member 570 . As a result, the front end member 561 of the lock member 560 is interposed between the front surface of the inner frame 4 and the back surface of the front door 11005 , thereby restricting the closing of the front door 11005 with respect to the inner frame 4 . As a result, it is possible to make the operator aware that the interposing plate 540 has been forgotten to be returned.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77, the case of returning the lock member 560 from the state shown in FIG. 75(b) to the first position will be described. FIG. 76(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the main part 11003 of the gaming machine along line LXXVIa-LXXVIa of FIG. 75(a). FIG. 76(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the main part 11003 of the game machine along line LXXVIb-LXXVIb of FIG. 75(b). 77(a) and 77(b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the main part 11003 of the gaming machine.

76(a) and 76(b), illustrations other than the lock member 560, the inner frame 4 and the back member 11550 are omitted. 77(a) shows a state in which the front door 11005 is opened with respect to the inner frame 4 from the state shown in FIG. 75(b), and FIG. 77(b) shows the state shown in FIG. , respectively, the state in which the front door 11005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 is illustrated.

First, the base member 562 of the lock member 560 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the base member 562 of the eleventh embodiment, protruding portions 11562c having U-shaped openings are formed on both side surfaces in the axial direction of the shaft portion 562b.

The projecting portion 11562c is formed so that the shaft portion 562b side is connected to the outer surface, and extends toward the base end side (front side (left side in FIG. 76(a))) of the base member 561 . Further, the projecting portion 11562c is formed with an engaging portion 11562c1 that bulges outward in a semicircular shape in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 76(a)) of the shaft portion 562b of the projecting portion 11562c.

The maximum separation distance L4 (see FIG. 76(b)) between the engaging portions 11562c1 of the pair of projecting portions 11562c is longer than the dimension L5 (see FIG. 76(b)) between the insertion holes 551 facing each other in the horizontal direction. It is set large (L4>L5). In addition, the separation distance L6 (see FIG. 76(b)) from the proximal end of the engaging portion 11562c1 of the locking member 560 (see FIG. 76(b)) to the back surface of the lock member 560 (see FIG. 76(b)) at the second position is the thickness of the back member 11550. It is set to be substantially the same as the dimension L7 (see FIG. 76(b)) (L6=L7).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 76A, when the panel member 11520 is replaced (the lock member 11561 is pulled out to the rear side), the engagement portion 11562c1 of the lock member 560 is inserted into the insertion hole 551 of the rear member 11550. inserted inside the In this case, the protruding portion 11562c has a U-shaped opening at its periphery, so that it is allowed to bend in the axial direction of the pivot hole 561a. Therefore, the engaging portion 11562c1, which is set to the separation distance L4 that is larger than the dimension L5 between the opposing portions, is arranged inside the insertion hole 551 in a bent state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76(b), when the lock member 560 is forgotten to be returned to the first position and the front door 11005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4, it is locked to the front surface of the inner frame 4 as described above. Base member 562 of member 560 is extruded. As a result, the engaging portion 11562 c 1 protrudes forward of the back member 11550 from the insertion hole 551 . Therefore, when the lock member 560 is displaced rearward, the engaging portion 11562c1 can be brought into contact with the front end portion of the insertion hole 551, thereby making it difficult for the lock member 560 to be slid rearward.

Also, when the operator pulls out the lock member 560 rearward from the first position, the engagement portion 11562c1 can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the insertion hole 551 at the end position of the displacement of the lock member 560 . Therefore, the displacement of the lock member 560 can be braked by increasing the sliding resistance at the end position of the displacement of the lock member 560 . As a result, when the operator vigorously pulls out the lock member 560, the stopping speed can be slowed down, so that the lock member 560 can be prevented from being damaged. Further, by increasing the resistance of the lock member 560, it is possible to make it easier for the operator to recognize the end position of the displacement. As a result, the operator can reduce the displacement speed at the end position of the displacement, thereby suppressing damage to the lock member 560 .

Next, description will be made with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 77(a), when the front door 11005 is opened from the state in which the front door 11005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 for the first time with the lock member 560 arranged at the second position, the connecting member 11820 is displaced to the rear side by the biasing force of the coil spring SP6. As a result, the base member 562 of the lock member 560 is pushed out to the one-side contact surface 11822a of the connecting member 11820 toward the rear side. As a result, the base member 562 is rotated about the shaft portion 562b, and the end opposite to the shaft portion 562b is flipped upward.

Here, since lock member 560 is slidably displaceable, there is a possibility that the entire lock member 560 will be pushed out to the rear side by the sliding displacement of connecting member 11820 . On the other hand, as described above, when the tip member 561 of the lock member 560 is arranged inside the insertion hole 551, the engaging portion 11562c1 is positioned in front of the insertion hole 551 (extended from the insertion hole 551). ) state, the base member 562 of the lock member 560 is less likely to be slid to the rear side, and only the distal end member 561 can be easily displaced. As a result, the connecting member 11820 can rotationally displace only the distal end member 561 by pushing out the distal end member 561 . In this case, the rotation angle of the distal end member 561 is preferably 45 degrees or more, and is set to about 70 degrees in this embodiment. As a result, the locking member 560 can be easily arranged at the first position by the closing operation of the inner frame 4, which will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), when the front door 11005 is closed again from the state where the front door 11005 is opened with respect to the inner frame 4, the connecting member 11820 is The front surface of the inner frame 4 is brought into contact with the end surface on the opposite side (rear side) of the shaft portion 562b of the tip member 561 rotated by the one-side contact surface 11822a. As a result, the distal end member 561 and the base member 562 (locking member 560) are slid forward. As a result, locking member 560 is placed in the first position.

That is, in the eleventh embodiment, if the operator forgets to place the lock member 560 at the first position after replacing the panel member 11520, the operator is forced to open the front door 11005 again with respect to the inner frame 4. The locking member 560 can then be placed in the first position and the panel member 11520 placed behind the opaque region R2 of the body member can be placed behind the transparent region R1 by closing afterward.

Therefore, for example, when the operator notices an abnormality after closing the front door 11005 with respect to the inner frame 4 for the first time after replacing the panel member 11520 and opens the front door 11005 again, even if the cause of the abnormality is unknown, Also, by closing the front door 11005 with respect to the inner frame 4 again, the lock member 560 and the panel member 11520 can be placed in their normal positions.

Furthermore, since the lock member 560 and the panel member 11520 can be arranged in the normal position without the operator operating the lock member 560, the work process of the operator when he/she forgets to return the lock member 560 can be reduced. can be done.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 and 79. FIG. In the eleventh embodiment, the panel member 11520 as a whole is made of a single resin material, but in the twelfth embodiment, the panel member 12520 is made up of a plurality of split plates. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

78(a) and 78(b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the gaming machine main section 12003 in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 79 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the main part 12003 of the game machine along line LXXIX-LXXIX in FIG. 78(b). 78(a) corresponds to FIG. 74(a), and FIG. 78(b) corresponds to FIG. 75(b).

As shown in FIG. 78(a), the panel member 12520 in the twelfth embodiment is formed of a plurality of divided plate members, and the respective plate members are displaced in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, the panel member 12520 is formed of four plate members, each of which is a first split plate 12520a, a second split plate 12520b, a second split plate 12520c, and a fourth split plate 12520d. A sign is given.

Further, the rotating member 12810 in the twelfth embodiment is made of a resin material and is made of a plate-like body that bends in a substantially L shape when viewed from the side. Also, the rotating member 12810 has a shaft portion 11811 at its bent portion. The connecting member 12820 connected to the rotating member 12810 is the connecting member 11820 in the eleventh embodiment (the connecting member 12820 in the twelfth embodiment) and the rotating member 11810 (the rotating member 12810 in the twelfth embodiment). The only difference is the connection position of the , and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The rotating member 12810 has a circular recessed portion 11812 to be fastened on the outer peripheral surface of one end. In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, the panel member 12520 is connected to the bottom surface of the rotating member 12810 on the tip side. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, the part to be fastened 11812 is formed on the bottom surface of the rotating member 12810 on the tip side.

The first dividing plate 12520a to the fourth dividing plate 12520d are formed in a curved shape centering on the rotating shaft (shaft portion 11811) of the rotating member 12810, and are displaced in the front-rear direction. Also, when the first dividing plate 12520a to the fourth dividing plate 12520d are displaced in the vertical direction (in the state of FIG. 78(a)), the decorations on the front surfaces of the respective plates can be seen in a row. decorations (patterns and characters) are displayed. In the twelfth embodiment, when the panel member 12520 displays 1 decoration (the first division plate 12520a to the fourth division plate 12520d are displaced in the vertical direction), the fourth division plate 12520d is arranged on the rear side of the opaque region R2 of the body member 11510, and the third dividing plate 12520c is arranged on the rear side of the transparent region R1.

Further, each of the first divided plate 12520a to the fourth divided plate 12520d is configured to be rotatable around the rotation shaft (shaft portion 11811). The manner of displacement from the first split plate 12520a to the fourth split plate 12520d will be described later.

A lower wall portion 12522 protrudes rearward from the lower end surface of each of the first division plate 12520a to the third division plate 12520c. Further, upper wall portions 12523 protrude from the upper end surfaces of the second to fourth division plates 12520b to 12520d.

The lower wall portion 12522 and the upper wall portion 12523 are portions that regulate the amount of displacement in the circumferential direction from the first dividing plate 12520a to the fourth dividing plate 12520d. The upper wall portion 12523 of the plate 12520b abuts to restrict the displacement of the second split plate 12520b. Displacement of the third divided plate 12520c is restricted, and the upper wall portion 12523 of the fourth divided plate 12520d comes into contact with the lower wall portion 12522 of the third divided plate 12520c, thereby restricting the displacement of the fourth divided plate 12520d.

Further, as shown in FIG. 79, a locking portion 12524 having a substantially L-shaped cross section protrudes from the rear surface of the first dividing plate 12520a to the third dividing plate 12520c. The locking portion 12524 is formed of a first locking portion 12524a projecting rearward and a second locking portion 12524b bending from the first split plate 12520a toward the center in the extending direction of the third split plate 12520c. be.

The first locking portion 12524a is a divided plate (one of the second divided plate 12520b to the fourth divided plate 12520d) arranged behind one divided plate (the first divided plate 12520a to the third divided plate 12520c). is formed outside in the extending direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 79). In addition, the projecting tip of the first locking portion 12524a is positioned rearward (lower in FIG. 79) than the rearwardly disposed split plate. As a result, it is possible to prevent the split plate arranged behind the one split plate from being displaced in its extending direction.

The second locking portion 12524b is formed by bending from the protruding distal end portion of the first locking portion 12524a toward the central side in the extending direction of each divided plate (first divided plate 12520a to third divided plate 12520c). As a result, it is possible to prevent the division plate arranged behind the one division plate from being displaced toward the rear side with respect to the one division plate.

According to the panel member 12520 of the twelfth embodiment configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 78(b), after the operator replaces the panel member 12520, the lock member 560 is moved from the second position to the first position. If you forget to put them back in place, the split plates can be stacked in the front-rear direction.

More specifically, similarly to the eleventh embodiment, when the lock member 560 arranged at the second position is pushed forward by the rear member 11560, the connecting member 12820 is slid forward, and the rotary member 12510 is moved. It is rotated around the shaft portion 11511 . As a result, the distal end side (fastened portion 11812 side) of the rotating member 12810 is displaced downward, and the panel member 12520 fastened to the distal end side of the rotating member 12510 is displaced downward.

When the panel member 12520 is displaced downward, the fourth dividing plate 12520d of the panel member 12520 comes into contact with the contact surface 12511c1 of the bottom surface of the concave portion 511c, thereby restricting further displacement of the fourth dividing plate 12520d. be done. Therefore, when the rotary member 12510 continues to rotate, the other split plates (from the first split plate 12520a to the third split plate 12520c) are displaced with respect to the fourth split plate 12520d. The third split plate 12520c is arranged in front of the fourth split plate 12520d and contacts the contact surface 12511c. In this way, each of the divided plates can be arranged in a state of being overlapped in the front-rear direction by being brought into contact with the contact surface 12511c in order from the lower divided plates.

The panel members 12520 stacked in the longitudinal direction are arranged behind the opaque region R2 of the body member 11510 . This makes it difficult for the worker to visually recognize the panel member 12520 when the worker checks the panel member 12520 to be replaced after the replacement. Therefore, it is not necessary for the operator to judge the abnormality after the replacement of the panel member 12520 by its arrangement position, and the operator can easily recognize that the replacement target is not in an appropriate position. As a result, the operator can easily recognize that there is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (the locking member 560 has been forgotten to be returned).

Also, the panel member 12520 to be replaced by the operator is displaced. Therefore, when the operator normally checks whether the replacement object (panel member 12520) is arranged in an appropriate state and position after the replacement work, the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions due to the displacement of the replacement object. This makes it easier for the operator to recognize that there is (forgetting to return the lock member 560).

Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment, since the panel members 12520 are arranged inside the main body member 11510 in a state of being superimposed in the front-rear direction, a space for displacing the panel members 12520 is provided in the main body member as in the eleventh embodiment. 11510 does not need to be provided inside. As a result, the internal space of the main body member 11510 can be used as a space for arranging other members (for example, a light emitting device such as an LED), and the internal space of the main body member 11510 can be efficiently used.

In addition, since the panel members 12520 can be stacked in the front-rear direction, the volume required for packaging can be reduced when only the panel members 12520 are sold. Therefore, the panel member 12520 can be easily packed. As a result, packaging costs can be reduced.

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 84. FIG. In the first embodiment described above, when the lock member 560 is placed in the second position (the position removed from the insertion tube portion 541), the closing of the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 is restricted. In the thirteenth embodiment, the panel member 13520 is displaced when the front door 13005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 with the lock member 13560 arranged at the second position. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the upper portion of the front door 13005 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. FIG. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the upper portion of the front door 13005 in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 81 is a top view of the main part 13003 of the gaming machine. 82(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the gaming machine main section 13003 along line LXXXIIa-LXXXIIa in FIG. 81, and FIG. 82(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of gaming machine main section 13003 along line LXXXIIb-LXXXIIb in FIG. 82(a). FIG. 82(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the main part 13003 of the game machine taken along line LXXXIIc-LXXXIIc in FIG. 82(b).

81 shows a state in which the top plate 13530 and the intervening plate 540 are removed (seeing transparently), and FIG. 82(a) shows a state in which the top plate 13530 and the intervening plate 540 are attached. illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 80 to 82, the upper portion of the front door 13005 in the thirteenth embodiment includes a main body member 13510 arranged on the front side, a panel member 13520 housed in the main body member 13510, and a main body member 13520. Rotating member 13810 housed in 13510 and arranged in a rotatable state, engaging member 13850 arranged adjacent to rotating member 13810, and top plate arranged on upper surface of body member 13510 530 , an intervening plate 13540 , a rear member 11550 fixed to the rear side of the main body member 13510 , and a lock member 13560 and a lever member 570 arranged on the rear member 11550 .

The main body member 13510 is a member made of a light-transmitting material for constituting the electric decoration part in the upper front part of the pachinko machine 1, and a light emitting means such as an LED provided inside emits light at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach. Lighting up or blinking according to the change of the game state plays a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. In addition, on the front side of the main body member 13510, a region corresponding to the panel member 13520 is formed from a transparent material, and model information and the like displayed on the panel member 13520 can be visually recognized through the transparent material portion.

A housing portion 511 for disposing the top plate 530 and the interposition plate 540 is recessed in the upper surface of the main body member 13510 . The accommodation portion 511 includes slide grooves 511a formed on the left and right inner wall surfaces facing each other of the inner peripheral edge (inner wall surface) of the accommodation portion 511, recesses 511c recessed downward from the bottom surface, and relief portions. 511d, a holding portion 511e formed on the front side of the relief portion 511d, and a holding portion 511e that is recessed downward from the bottom surface, one end of which is connected to the recessed portion 511c and the other end of which is open to the back side (back member 11550 side). and second accommodation grooves 13514 recessed on both side surfaces of the accommodation groove 13513 .

The housing groove 13513 is a space for housing a rotating member 13810, which will be described later, and is formed in a size that allows the rotating member 13810 to rotate. A pair of accommodation grooves 13513 are formed at positions spaced apart from the opposing left and right inner wall surfaces of the inner peripheral edge of the accommodation portion 511 , and a pair of rotating members 13810 to be described later are arranged in each of the accommodation grooves 13513 .

The second housing groove 13514 is a space for housing the engaging member 13850 arranged next to the rotating member 13810, and is located on the side where the engaging member 13850 is arranged (in this embodiment, the pair of rotating members 13810 facing each other). It is formed continuously with the side surface of the housing groove 13513 on the direction outside). As a result, an engaging member 13850, which will be described later, can be displaced and brought into contact with the rotating member 13810. As shown in FIG.

Further, in the accommodation groove 13513 and the second accommodation groove 13514 , a concave groove 11513 a is provided downward from the bottom surface of the accommodation portion 511 . The concave groove 11513a is a space in which the shaft portion 11811 of the rotating member 13810 is arranged, and the separation distance (groove width) between the opposing side surfaces is set slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 11811 . Thereby, the shaft portion 11811 can be arranged inside the concave groove 11513a to hold the rotating member 13810 in a rotatable state.

The rotating member 13810 is made of a resin material and formed of a rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the side. The rotating member 13810 has a recessed portion 11812 to be fastened on the outer peripheral surface of one end in the longitudinal direction, and a contact portion 13814 that protrudes in a semicircular shape on the outer peripheral surface of the other end in the longitudinal direction. A concave portion 13815 is provided in the surface on which the engaging member 13850 is disposed, and a columnar shaft portion 11811 is fitted in a through hole penetrating in the plate thickness direction.

Further, a biasing means (such as a spring) is interposed between the rotating member 13810 and the main body member 13510 . As a result, a biasing force is applied to the rotating member 13810 to displace the other longitudinal end side (the fastened portion 11812 side) upward. Therefore, when no external force acts on the rotating member 13810 , the other end in the longitudinal direction is rotationally displaced upward about the shaft portion 11811 .

The concave portion 13815 is a portion into which a projection 13853 of an engaging member 13850 described later is inserted, and the insertion of the projection 13853 can restrict the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 13810 . A detailed description of the state of engagement between the recess 13815 and the projection 13853 will be given later.

The abutting portion 13814 is such that when the protrusion 13853 of the engaging member 13850 is extracted from the recess 13815, the engaging member 13850 intersects with the rotating member 13810 in top view (the position where the engaging member 13850 exceeds the rotating member 13810). 11811 of the rotating member 13810, and is formed in a fan shape coaxial with the axis of the shaft portion 11811 of the rotating member 13810. As shown in FIG.

The panel member 13520 is formed in a curved shape along the internal space of the recess 511c of the main body member 13510 . In addition, the bending axis of the panel member 13520 is set at substantially the same position as the axis of the shaft portion 11811 when viewed in the axial direction of the shaft portion 11811 . As a result, the region of the displacement trajectory of the panel member 13520 when the panel member 13520 is displaced by rotating the rotating member 13810 can be minimized. As a result, the internal space of the concave portion 511c can be easily used as a space for arranging other members.

In addition, the panel member 13520 includes fastening portions 11521 below both ends in the left-right direction, and bulging portions 13522 bulging in the front-rear direction at the upper end. In addition, the panel member 13520 has its upper end (bulged portion 13522 ) arranged between the top plate 13530 and the main body member 13510 .

The bulging portion 13522 is formed to bulge in the front-rear direction toward the upper end. As a result, when the bulging portion 13522 is pushed from the outside of the game machine main portion 13003, the bulging portion 13522 is brought into contact with the front end surface of the top plate 13530 or the end portion of the main body member 13510. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the panel member 13520 from being operated from outside the gaming machine main section 13003 .

Also, the end of main body member 13510 and the front end surface of top plate 13530 that come into contact with bulging portion 13522 are formed as inclined surfaces along the outline of bulging portion 13522 . This prevents the player from inserting an illegal object through the gap between the bulging portion 13522 and the main body member 13510 or the top plate 13530 .

The engaging member 13850 includes, when viewed from above, an annular portion 13851 formed in an annular shape, and an engaging portion 13852 projecting from the outer edge of the annular portion 13851 toward the concave portion 13815 (forward) of the rotating member 13810. and

The engaging portion 13852 is arranged such that its protruding tip side (the side opposite to the annular portion 13851 side) is adjacent to the rotating member 13810 in a top view, and the protruding tip 13853 protrudes from the protruding tip toward the rotating member 13810 side. is projected.

The annular portion 13851 includes a release member 13554 protruding radially outward from the outer peripheral surface thereof, an accommodating portion 13856 recessed downward from the upper surface of the annular portion 13851, and a rotatable state inside the accommodating portion 13856. and a second release member 13855 disposed at .

A cylindrical shaft member 13857 is fitted in the inner edge of the circular ring portion 13851 , and the shaft member 13857 is a cylindrical shape recessed in the recessed bottom surface of the second housing groove 11514 of the main body member 13510 . The engagement member 13850 is held in a rotatable state with respect to the body member 13510 by being inserted into a recess (not shown) in the body member 13510 . In addition, the engagement member 13850 and the main body member 13510 are interposed with biasing means (such as a spring), and the engagement portion 13852 of the engagement member 13850 is always biased toward the rotating member 13810 side. Accordingly, when the protrusion 13853 of the engaging portion 13852 and the recess 13815 of the rotating member 13810 face each other, the protrusion 13853 can be inserted inside the recess 13815 . As a result, the engagement member 13850 can restrict the rotation of the rotating member 13810 .

The releasing member 13554 is arranged in a displacement region of the projection 13533 when the top plate 13530 described later is slid and displaced in the front-rear direction. As a result, when the top plate 13530 is slid, the protrusion 13533 of the top plate 13530 is brought into contact with the engagement member 13850 to rotate.

Although detailed description will be given later, the projection 13533 is formed at a position where it abuts against the releasing member 13554 of the engaging member 13850 when the top plate 13530 is slid rearward. As a result, the releasing member 13554 and the engaging member 13850 can be brought into contact in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the top plate 13530 .

The accommodating portion 13856 is a space for accommodating a second releasing member 13855 described later when the second releasing member 13855 is rotationally displaced, and is recessed in the displacement direction of the second releasing member 13855 .

The second release member 13855 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape protruding upward in the axial direction of the annular portion 13851, and has a circular through hole 13855a formed at the lower end thereof. In addition, the second release member 13855 is arranged inside an engagement recess 13563a of the lock member 13560, which will be described later.

A screw is inserted through the through-hole 13855a while a collar (not shown) is arranged inside the through-hole 13855a. Therefore, the second releasing member 13855 is made rotatable with respect to the engaging member 13850 by screwing a screw inserted through the through hole 13855a into the receiving portion 13856 .

In addition, the second release member 13855 has a curved non-contact portion 13855b at the lower end on the front side. The non-contact portion 13855b is a portion that prevents contact between the inner surface of the accommodating portion 13856 and the second release member 13855 when the second release member 13855 is rotated. It is formed in a curved shape.

As a result, when the end of the second release member 13855 on the far side from the through hole 13855a (upper end in FIG. 82(c)) is displaced to the rear side (right side in FIG. 82(c)), the second release member 13855 and The second release member 13855 can be rotationally displaced while preventing contact with the inner surface of the housing portion 13856 . Therefore, the locking member 13560, which will be described later, is displaced to the rear side, and the inner surface of the engaging recess 13563a and the second releasing member 13855 are brought into contact with each other, so that the second releasing member 13855 can be rotated.

The non-contact portion 13855b is formed only on the front side of the second release member 13855. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when the lock member 13560 (to be described later) is displaced to the front side and the inner surface of the engagement recess 13563a and the second release member 13855 come into contact with each other, the outer surface of the second release member 13855 contacts the inner surface of the housing portion 13856. can be abutted. That is, when the lock member 13560 is displaced to the front side, the rotation of the second release member 13855 is restricted, and the displacement of the lock member 13560 is displaced through the second release member 13855 to the annular portion of the engagement member 13850. 13851.

A biasing means (such as a torsion spring) is provided between the second release member 13855 and the housing portion 13856, and thereby the end portion of the second release member 13855 on the far side from the through hole 13855a is displaced. is displaced upward so that the outer surface of the second release member 13855 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the housing portion 13856 . In addition, when the second release member 13855 is rotationally displaced by operating the lock member 13560, which will be described later, it can be returned to the position before displacement by the biasing force of the biasing means.

The locking member 13560 includes a tip member 561, a base member 562 connected to the base end side of the tip member 561, and a protruding portion 13563 protruding from the tip side of the base member 562 to the tip side (front side). Mainly provide

The protruding portion 13563 is arranged above the engaging member 13850 described above, and is located at substantially the same position as the second releasing member 13855 of the engaging member 13850 in the horizontal direction (a position vertically overlapping in FIG. 82(b)). ). Also, the projecting distance of the projecting portion 13563 to the distal end side is set to a length exceeding the second releasing member 13855 .

An engagement recess 13563 a is formed in the projecting portion 13563 at a position corresponding to the second release member 13855 . The width of the engaging recess 13563a in the direction in which the protruding portion 13563 protrudes (horizontal direction in FIG. 82(a)) is set longer than the width of the second releasing member 13855, and the second releasing member 13855 is accommodated.

A biasing member 13840 is arranged below the lock member 13560 . The biasing member 13840 is formed in a rectangular shape larger than the outer shape of the tip member 561 of the lock member 13560 arranged at the second position in a rear view, and is arranged in front of the tip member 561 . Further, a biasing spring SP6 in a compressed state is arranged in contact with the front surface of the biasing member 13840, and the biasing member 13840 is biased rearward (back side).

Further, the biasing member 13840 has a one-side abutted surface 13842 on its back surface, and a restricting portion 13841 recessed toward the body member 13510 side (forward) below the one-side abutted surface 13842 . . The restricting portion 13841 is a member that restricts the rearward movement of the biasing member 13840 by coming into contact with the contacting portion 11558a. It is formed at a position separated from the rear surface of 13840 by the plate thickness of the contact portion 11558a. As a result, the biasing member 13840 is flush with the rear surface of the back surface member 11550 when biased by the biasing spring SP6.

Next, procedures for exchanging the panel member 13520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. 83(a), 83(b), 84(a) and 84(b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the main part 11003 of the gaming machine. 83(a) and 84(a) correspond to FIG. 82(a), and FIGS. 83(b) and 84(b) correspond to FIG. 82(b). FIGS. 82 to 84 show, in the order of replacement of the panel member 13520, FIG. 82(a), FIG. 83(a), FIG. FIG. 84(b) is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b), when the lock member 13560 is pushed into the first position, it is locked by the insertion tube portion 541 of the interposed plate 540, as in the first embodiment. The base end (base member 562) of the locking member 13560, through which the member 560 is inserted, protruding from one end side of the tubular insertion portion 541 is held inside the holding portion 511e of the main body member 13510, and the other end of the tubular insertion portion 541 is held. The tip (tip member 561 ) of the lock member 13560 protruding from the side is held in the insertion hole 551 of the back member 11550 . Therefore, the intervening plate 540 cannot be removed from the housing portion 511 of the main body member 11510 .

In this case, the projection 13853 of the engaging member 13850 is inserted inside the recess 13815 of the rotating member 13810 . As a result, rotation of the rotating member 13810 by the biasing force of the biasing means (torsion spring) interposed between the rotating member 13810 and the main body member 13510 can be restricted.

Furthermore, in a state where the rotation of the rotating member 13810 is restricted by the engaging member 13850, the panel member 13520 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 13810 has an upper end surface flush with the upper end surface of the top plate 530. placed in position. That is, the panel member 13520 is arranged in the internal space of the recess 511c of the main body member 11510 .

Further, in a state in which the tip of the locking member 13560 (base member 562) is inserted and held inside the insertion hole 551 of the rear member 11550, the second base member 13850 of the engaging member 13850 is positioned inside the engaging recess 13563a of the locking member 13560. The release member 13855 is arranged.

As shown in FIGS. 83(a) and 83(b), the locking member 13560 is pulled out from the state shown in FIGS. When 562a reaches the second position where it engages the front of back member 11550, further withdrawal of locking member 560 is disabled.

By this pull-out operation, the lock member 13560 (base member 562) is pulled out from the insertion tube portion 541 of the interposition plate 540, and the end face of the base end of the lock member 13560 (base member 562) retreats to a position exceeding the lever member 570. be done. That is, a space is formed above the lever member 570 . As a result, the lever member 570 is rotated by the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP1, and its distal end side is pushed upward. Accordingly, the operator who replaces the panel member 13520 can remove the interposed plate 540 by grasping one longitudinal end of the interposed plate 540 .

In the thirteenth embodiment, the projecting portion 13563 of the locking member 13560 is inserted through the inserting tubular portion 541 formed in the interposition plate 540. A cutout portion 13541a is provided in a part of the portion to be cut out in the pull-out direction of the lock member 13560, and the protruding portion 13563 can be pulled out from the insertion tube portion 541 through the cutout portion 13541a. This allows the operator to remove the interposition plate 540 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 82(b), when the tip of the lock member 13560 (tip member 561) is inserted and held inside the insertion hole 551 of the back member 11550, the engagement recess 13563a of the lock member 13560 is The second release member 13855 of the engagement member 13850 is arranged inside. Therefore, by pulling out the lock member 13560, the inside of the engagement recess 13563a and the second release member 13855 are brought into contact with each other.

In this case, the second release member 13855 is rotated in a direction in which it is prevented from contacting the inner surface of the housing portion 13856 by the non-contact portion 13855b. Therefore, when the lock member 13560 is pulled out, the second release member 13855 can be rotated to arrange the second release member 13855 outside the engaging recess 13563a. That is, the pullout operation of the lock member 13560 is in a state in which the transmission of force to the annular portion 13851 is cut off.

As shown in FIGS. 84(a) and 84(b), the intervening plate 540 is removed from the main body member 13510 from the state shown in FIGS. Since a space is formed on the rear side (back side, back member 11550) of the top plate 530, the top plate 530 can be slid backward (retracted) using the space.

In this case, the protrusion 13533 formed on the top plate 13530 abuts the releasing member 13554 of the engaging member 13850 . As a result, the engagement member 13850 is pushed rearward, and the engagement member 13850 can be rotated about the axis of the annular portion 13851 .

When the engaging member 13850 is rotated, the state in which the protrusion 13853 of the engaging member 13850 is inserted inside the recess 13815 of the rotating member 13810 is released (the protrusion 13853 is pulled out from the inside of the recess 13815). Since the rotating member 13810 is biased by biasing means (torsion spring) interposed between the main body member 13510 and the rotating member 13810, the rotating member 13810 can be rotated by the biasing means. As a result, the front side (to-be-fastened portion 11812 side) of the rotating member 13810 is flipped upward, and the panel member 11520 is ejected from the inside of the recess 511c to the outside.

Therefore, the panel member 11520 can be displaced by sliding the top plate 13530, so that the operator who replaces the panel member 11520 can easily recognize the next replacement work procedure. That is, it is possible to make it easy for the user to recognize that the panel member 11520 is to be replaced after the operation of the top plate 13530 .

In addition, since the fastening portion between the panel member 13520 and the rotating member 13810 (the fastened portion 11812 of the rotating member 13810) is displaced toward the opening formed by the sliding displacement of the top plate 13530, the operator does not need to press the panel member 13520. The replacement work can be facilitated. That is, when replacing the panel member 11520, a screwdriver or the like is inserted through the opening formed between the top plate 13530 and the main body member 13510 to remove the screw fastened to the fastened portion 11812 of the rotary member 13810. Therefore, if the fastening portion (fastened portion 11812) is located away from the opening, it becomes difficult to remove the screw. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, since the fastening portion is closer to the opening side, the screw to be screwed can be easily removed.

After replacing the panel member 13520, the removal procedure is reversed to return the top plate 13530, the intervening plate 540 and the lock member 13560 to the positions shown in FIG. By pushing into the recess 511c of the body member 13510, the rotation member 13810 is rotated, and the recess 13815 of the rotation member 13810 is moved to a position facing the projection 13853 of the engaging member 13850, so that the projection is formed in the recess 13815. 13853 is inserted. Thereby, the panel member 13520 and the rotating member 13810 can be returned to the positions shown in FIG. 82(a).

Next, referring to FIG. 85, after the operator replaces the panel member 13520, the front door 13005 is closed to the inner frame 4 while forgetting to return the lock member 13560 from the second position to the first position. A case will be described.

85(a) and 85(b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the main part 13003 of the gaming machine. 85(a) corresponds to FIG. 82(a), and FIG. 85(b) corresponds to FIG. 82(b). 85(a) shows a state in which the lock member 13560 has been forgotten to be returned from the second position to the first position (state shown in FIG. 83(a)), and the front door 13005 is closed to the inner frame 4. The states are illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 85, when the worker pushes the interposition plate 540 downward to close the front door 13005 with respect to the inner frame 4 with the lock member 13560 positioned at the second position, the lock member The tip member 561 of 13560 is pushed forward by the front surface (front surface) of the inner frame 4 . That is, the tip member 561 of the locking member 13560 is inserted inside the insertion hole 551 and the second insertion hole 11558 of the back member 11550 .

When the lock member 560 is arranged at the second position, the tip member 13561 of the lock member 560 is brought into contact with the one-side contacted surface 13842 of the biasing member 13840 . Therefore, when the locking member 13560 is pushed forward by the inner frame 4, the biasing member 13840 is slid forward (to the left in FIG. 85(a)) by the displacement of the locking member 13560, and the distal end member 561 is inserted into the second position. It can be inserted inside hole 11558 .

In addition, the lock member 13560 moves from the distal end of the protruding portion 13563 in the second position (the state shown in FIGS. 83(a) and 83(b)) to the second release member 13855 of the engagement member 13850. is set smaller than the thickness dimension S2 (see FIG. 83(a)) of the tip member 561 of the locking member 13560 arranged at the second position. .

Therefore, when the worker pushes the interposition plate 540 downward to close the front door 13005 with respect to the inner frame 4 with the lock member 13560 positioned at the second position, the lock member 13560 is pushed into the tip member 561 . is slid forward by the thickness dimension S2 (see FIG. 83(a)). As a result, the tip of the projecting portion 13563 and the second release member 13855 can be brought into contact with each other.

As described above, when the lock member 13560 is displaced to the front side, the rotation of the second release member 13855 is restricted, and the displacement of the lock member 13560 causes the engagement member 13850 to move through the second release member 13855. It is transmitted to the annular portion 13851 . As a result, the engagement member 13850 is rotated about the axis of the annular portion 13851, and the state in which the projection 13853 of the engagement member 13850 is inserted into the recess 13815 of the rotating member 13810 is released (the recess 13815 is closed). The protrusion 13853 is withdrawn from the inside). As a result, the front side (to-be-fastened portion 11812 side) of the rotating member 13810 is flipped upward, and the panel member 11520 is ejected from the inside of the recess 511c to the outside.

Thereby, when the operator forgets to return the lock member 13560, the panel member 13520 to be replaced is displaced. Therefore, when the operator usually checks whether the replacement object (panel member 13520) is arranged in an appropriate state and position after the replacement work, the pachinko machine 1 may malfunction due to the displacement of the replacement object. This makes it easier for the operator to recognize that there is a problem (forgetting to return the lock member 13560).

Furthermore, since the replacement target (panel member 13520) is in a state of protruding from the inside of the main body member 11510 to the outside (protruded from the installation space), there is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (the lock member 560 has been forgotten to return). This makes it easier for workers to recognize that That is, since the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed, the operator can easily recognize that there is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (the lock member 560 has been forgotten to be returned).

When the worker closes the front door 13005 to the inner frame 4 without attaching the interposition plate 540 (forgetting to return it) and without pushing the interposition plate 540 downward, the lock member 13560 The sliding displacement of the lock member 13560 is restricted by the contact of the tip of the base member 562 with the side surface of the lever member 570 . As a result, the front end member 561 of the lock member 13560 is interposed between the front surface of the inner frame 4 and the rear surface of the front door 13005 , thereby restricting the closing of the front door 13005 with respect to the inner frame 4 . As a result, it is possible to make the operator aware that the interposing plate 540 has been forgotten to be returned.

Further, from the state in which the tip member 561 of the lock member 13560 is inserted into the insertion hole 551 and the second insertion hole 11558 of the rear member 11550 (the state shown in FIG. 85(a)), the lock member 13560 is moved to the first position. Since it is the same as that of 11th Embodiment when returning to 1, the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88. FIG. In the first embodiment, the top plate 530 can be slidably displaced by pulling out the lock member 560 after the front door 5 is opened with respect to the inner frame 4. However, in the fourteenth embodiment, , the top plate 14530 can be slidably displaced by opening the front door 14005 with respect to the inner frame 4 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the upper portion of the front door 14005 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. FIG. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the upper portion of the front door 14005 in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 87(a) is a top view of the gaming machine main section 14003, and FIG. 87(b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the gaming machine main section 14003 along line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87(a).

As shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the upper portion of the front door 14005 in the fourteenth embodiment includes a main body member 14510 arranged on the front side, a panel member 520 housed in the main body member 14510, and a main body member 14510. Engagement member 14860 that is accommodated in 14510 and is disposed in a vertically slidable state, top plate 14530 that is disposed on the upper surface of body member 14510, and is fixed to the rear side of body member 14510 and a back member 14550 .

The main body member 14510 is a member made of a light-transmitting material for constituting the electric decoration part in the upper front part of the pachinko machine 1, and the light emitting means such as an LED provided inside is used when hitting a big hit or when reaching a small bank. Lighting up or blinking according to the change of the game state plays a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. In addition, on the front side of the main body member 14510, a region corresponding to the panel member 520 is formed from a transparent material, and model information and the like displayed on the panel member 520 can be visually recognized through the portion of the transparent material. .

A housing portion 511 for disposing the top plate 530 and the interposition plate 540 is recessed in the upper surface of the main body member 14510 . The accommodation portion 511 includes slide grooves 511a formed on the left and right inner wall surfaces facing each other of the inner peripheral edge (inner wall surface) of the accommodation portion 511, recessed portions 511c recessed downward from the bottom surface, and relief portions. 511d, a holding portion 511e formed on the front side of the relief portion 5111d, and an accommodating portion 14515 recessed from the upper surface side and open on the back side.

The accommodating portion 14515 is a space for accommodating an engaging member 14860 to be described later, and is formed to have an inner edge shape that is larger than the outer shape of the engaging member 14860 when viewed from above. In addition, the dimension of the downward recess of the accommodation portion 14515 is set larger than the thickness dimension of the engaging member 14860 (the vertical dimension in FIG. 87(b)). This allows the engagement member 14860 to slide in the thickness direction.

The engaging member 14860 is formed in a rectangular plate-like body when viewed from above. The engaging member 14860 has a columnar protrusion 14861 protruding from its upper surface, and a coil spring SP7 is connected to its lower surface.

The protrusion 14861 has an outer diameter that allows it to be inserted into an engaged portion 14534 that is recessed in the top plate 14530 described later, and is attached to the top plate 14530 when the front door 14005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 . It is formed at a position corresponding to the engaging portion 14534 . Thereby, when the front door 14005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 , the projection 14861 can be inserted into the engaged portion 14534 to engage the top plate 14530 and the engaging member 14860 .

The coil spring SP7 is a spring member that is spirally turned a plurality of times. Connected to the bottom surface. Also, the free length of the coil spring SP7 (length in the vertical direction when no load is applied) is determined by the thickness of the engaging member 14860 from the distance dimension from the bottom surface of the recess of the housing portion 14515 to the bottom surface of the recess of the housing portion 511. It is set smaller than the distance dimension S3 (see FIG. 87(b)) obtained by subtracting the dimension. Therefore, the engaging member 14860 connected to the coil spring SP7 is arranged below the recessed bottom surface of the housing portion 511 (inside the housing portion 14515) when the coil spring SP7 is not loaded.

The top plate 14530 is formed to have a size corresponding to the accommodating portion 511 of the main body member 14510 and the upper surface concave portion 14550b of the rear member 14550 described later when viewed from above. The thickness of the top plate 14530 is set to be substantially the same as the downward recess dimension of the upper recesses of the housing portion 511 and the back member 14550 . Accordingly, when the top plate 14530 is arranged on the main body member 14510 and the back member 14550 , it can be arranged flush with the upper surfaces of the top plate 14530 , the main body member 14510 and the back member 14550 .

In addition, the top plate 14530 has projecting portions 531 projecting from left and right edges, and engaged portions 14534 are recessed upward on the bottom surface. As a result, the top plate 14530 can be slidably displaced with respect to the main body member 14510 by inserting the projecting piece portion 531 into the slide groove 511a, and the projection 14861 can be inserted into the engaged portion 14534 and engaged. .

The back surface member 14550 has an upper end surface set at the same height as the top surface of the main body member 14510 and is arranged on the rear surface side of the main body member 14510 . Further, the back surface member 14550 has an upper surface recess 14550b recessed downward from the upper end surface, and an insertion hole 14550c is formed through the upper surface recess 14550b and the bottom surface of the recess at a position separated by a plate thickness separation of the engaging member 14860. be.

The upper recessed portion 14550b is recessed on the back side of the housing portion 511 of the main body member 14510 arranged on the front side, and the recessed dimension is set substantially equal to the recessed dimension of the recessed portion 511 . Thereby, the top plate 14530 can be arranged inside the upper surface concave portion 14550b.

The insertion hole 14550c is a hole through which a lock member 14560 disposed on the inner frame 4, which will be described later, is inserted.

The lock member 14560 is formed so as to protrude from the front side of the inner frame 4 toward the main body member 14510 , and the projection dimension is set larger than the thickness dimension of the back member 14550 . The vertical dimension of the lock member 14560 is set substantially equal to the distance dimension S3 (see FIG. 87(b)). As a result, the tip side of the locking member 14560 projecting from the front surface of the back member 14550 is arranged on the lower surface side of the engaging member 14860 , so that the upper surface of the engaging member 14860 is aligned with the recessed bottom surface of the housing portion 511 of the main body member 14510 . can be placed at approximately the same height as

The locking member 14560 is formed with an inclined surface 14564 that is inclined upward toward the base end on the upper portion of the projecting tip. The inclined surface 13564 is a surface that comes into contact with the engaging member 14860 when the front door 14005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4, thereby displacing the engaging member 14860 upward. A detailed description of the state of contact between the inclined surface 14564 and the engaging member 14860 will be given later.

Next, a procedure for exchanging the panel member 11520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. 88(a) and 88(b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the main part 14003 of the gaming machine. 88(a) and 88(b) correspond to FIG. 87(b). Also, FIGS. 87(b), 88(a) and 88(b) show FIG. 87(b), FIG. 88(a) and FIG. 88(b) in order when the panel member 520 is replaced. be done.

As shown in FIG. 87(b), when the front door 14005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4, the engaging member 14860 is placed on the upper surface of the locking member 14560 arranged inside the accommodating portion 14515. state. As a result, the coil spring SP7 is stretched, and the projection 14861 of the engaging member 14860 is inserted inside the engaged portion 14534 . As a result, the sliding displacement of the top plate 14530 is restricted.

As shown in FIG. 88(a), when the front door 14005 is opened with respect to the inner frame 4 from the state shown in FIG. It is assumed to have been removed. As a result, a space is formed below the engaging member 14860 from the state in which the locking member 14560 is arranged.

As described above, since the engaging member 14860 is connected to the coil spring SP7, the engaging member 14860 is drawn downward by the coil spring SP7 due to the space formed on the lower side. As a result, the protrusion 14861 of the engaging member 14860 is pulled out from the engaged portion 14534 of the top plate 14530, and the engagement between the engaging member 14860 and the top plate 14530 is released. As a result, the restriction on the sliding displacement of the top plate 14530 is released.

As shown in FIG. 88(b), from the state shown in FIG. 88(a), the top plate 14530 is slid to the rear side (inner frame 4 side) to form an opening in front of the main body member 14510. can be done. Thereby, the panel member 520 arranged on the body member 14510 can be replaced through the opening of the body member 14510 .

When returning the gaming machine main section 14003 to its original position (the position shown in FIG. C2(b)) after replacing the panel member 520, the top plate 14530 is slid forward to open the front opening of the main body member 14510. After closing, the front door 14005 is closed to the inner frame 4 . As a result, the tip of the lock member 14560 protrudes inside the accommodation portion 14515 of the main body member 14510 through the insertion hole 14550c of the back member 14550 . In this case, the engaging member 14860 abuts on the inclined surface 14564 formed at the tip of the locking member 14560 . As a result, the engaging member 14860 is guided (displaced) upward along the slope of the inclined surface 14564 , and the projection 14861 of the engaging member 14860 is inserted into the engaged portion 14534 of the top plate 14530 . As a result, the sliding displacement of the top plate 14530 is restricted.

Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment, only by closing the front door 14005 with respect to the inner frame 4, the sliding displacement of the top plate 14530 can be restricted, and the panel member 520 can be removed from the main part 14003 of the gaming machine. Since it can be disabled, the worker's work can be simplified.

That is, in the first embodiment, the sliding displacement of the top plate 530 can be restricted by returning the locking member 560 from the second position to the first position after returning the intervening plate 540 to its original position. Since it is necessary for the operator to return the interposition plate 540 to the original position and to return the locking member 560 to the first position, the operator's work becomes complicated. In contrast, in the fourteenth embodiment, the slide displacement of the top plate 14530 can be restricted only by closing the front door 14005 with respect to the inner frame 4 . Therefore, the worker's work can be simplified.

Next, the case where the front door 14005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 in a state in which the top plate 14530 is slid to the rear side (inner frame 4 side) will be described with reference to FIG. 88(b).

As shown in FIG. 88(b), the projecting distance S4 (see FIG. 88(b)) to the end of the inclined surface 14564 of the lock member 14560 on the proximal side is such that the top plate 14530 is slid to the rear side. is set larger than the distance dimension S5 (see FIG. 88(b)) from the end of the engaging member 14860 on the back side to the end of the top plate 14530 on the side (back side) projecting from the back member 14550. (S4>S5). As a result, when the front door 14005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 in a state where the top plate 14530 is slid to the rear side (the front side of the top plate 14530 is opened), the rear side of the top plate 14530 can be prevented from coming into contact with the front surface of the inner frame 4 and damaging the top plate 14530 .

More specifically, when the front door 14005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 in a state where the top plate 14530 is slid to the back side (the front of the top plate 14530 is opened), the top plate 14530 moves to the back side. The locking member 14560 can abut the engagement member 14860 before abutting the front surface of the member 14550 . Accordingly, the engaging member 14860 is displaced upward.

When the top plate 14530 is slid to the rear side, the protrusion 14861 of the engaging member 14860 is not inserted into the engaged portion 14534 and is in contact with the lower surface of the top plate 14530 . Therefore, a gap into which the locking member 14560 can be inserted is not formed between the lower surface of the engaging member 14860 and the recessed bottom surface of the accommodating portion 14515, and the insertion of the locking member 14560 is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the front door 14005 from being closed with respect to the inner frame 4 , and prevent the top plate 14530 from being damaged by the back end of the top plate 14530 coming into contact with the front surface of the inner frame 4 .

In addition, the amount of rearward sliding displacement of the top plate 14530 is smaller than the distance dimension S6 (see FIG. 88(b)) from the outer edge of the projection 14861 of the engaging member 14860 to the rear end of the rear member 14550. set. As a result, when the top plate 14530 is slid to the back side, it is possible to prevent the engaged portion 14534 of the top plate 14530 from being arranged on the back side of the back member 14550 . As a result, modification of the engaged portion 14534 can be suppressed.

Note that modification of the engaged portion 14534 means, for example, modification to increase the outer diameter of the engaged portion 14534 so that the protrusion 14561 of the engaging member 14860 can be easily inserted into the engaged portion 14534. exemplified.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

In the above-described fourth embodiment, the case where the panel member 4520 is fastened and fixed to the bottom surface of the top plate 4530 has been described. For example, other fixing methods include engagement/fitting/press-fitting using elastic deformation, engagement/fitting without elastic deformation, and adhesion using an adhesive or adhesive tape.

In the fourth embodiment, the recess dimension (depth dimension) of the recess 511c is set to a dimension sufficiently larger than the height dimension of the panel member 4520, and the panel member 4520 is not fastened and fixed to the top plate 4530. When the contact member 4532 is housed in the recess 511c, the other longitudinal end of the contact member 4532 is not pushed into the recess 4534 by the panel member 4520, and the one longitudinal end of the contact member 4532 pushes down the lever member 570. Although a case has been described where is impossible, it is not necessarily limited to this. You can

In this case, even if the panel member 4520 is not fastened and fixed to the top plate 4530 and is accommodated in the recessed portion 511c, when the top plate 4530 is attached to the accommodation portion 511, the other longitudinal end of the contact member 4532 is attached to the panel member. 4520 is pushed into the recessed groove 4534 so that one longitudinal end side of the contact member 4532 can push down the lever member 570 .

Therefore, the work of fastening and fixing the panel member 4520 to the top plate 4530 becomes unnecessary, and the work can be simplified accordingly. Also, if the panel member 4520 is not stored in the recess 511c, the lever member 570 cannot be pushed downward (that is, the front door 5 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 4), so the installation of the panel member 4520 cannot be forgotten. can be recognized by workers.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the intervening plates 540 and 3540, the top plate 4530, the slide plate 6540 and the panel member 4520 (third member, target member) are not attached at predetermined positions, the inner frame 4 (first frame Although the case where the closing of the front door 5 (the second frame member or the first frame member) is restricted with respect to the member or the second frame member), the member to be suppressed from forgetting to attach to the predetermined position The (third member) and the members (the first frame member and the second frame member) whose closing is restricted when the installation is forgotten are not limited to the members exemplified in the above embodiment.

For example, as a combination of members (first frame member and second frame member) whose closing is regulated when the third member or the target member is forgotten to be attached, for example, the outer frame 2 and the inner frame 4, the front door 5 and the lower Plate unit 15, front door 5 and outer frame 2, inner frame 4 and back pack unit 6, front door 5 and passage forming unit 160, resin base 140 and game ball shooting mechanism 142, or inner frame 4 and foul ball passage 165 etc. are exemplified. That is, it may be applied to any member as long as it is a combination of members in which one member is openable (rotatable) with respect to the other member.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the front door 5 is restricted from being closed with respect to the inner frame 4 when the intervening plates 540, 3540, the top plate 4530, or the slide plate 6540 are not attached at predetermined positions will be described. However, this is not necessarily the case. For example, the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 in a state in which the intervening plates 540, 3540, the top plate 4530, or the slide plate 6540 are not attached to predetermined positions. The panel members 520 and 4520 are formed to be in a predetermined state (regardless of whether the state in which the front door 5 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4 can be formed) when at least the operation is performed. Also good. As the predetermined state, for example, the panel members 520 and 4520 are bent, protrude (fall off) from the recess 511c, and tilt within the recess 511c. After performing work such as replacement of the panel members 520 and 4520, the worker normally checks the state of the panel members 520 and 4520, so that the worker is aware that he or she has forgotten to attach the interposition plate 540 or the like. You can make it easier.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the front door 5 is restricted from being closed with respect to the inner frame 4 when the intervening plates 540, 3540, the top plate 4530, or the slide plate 6540 are not attached at predetermined positions will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. Alternatively, or in addition to this, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the intervening plates 540, 3540, the top plate 4530, or the slide plate 6540 The power supply of the pachinko machine 1 may be turned off when at least the action of closing the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 is performed without being attached to the predetermined position. In this case, turning off the power of the pachinko machine 1 may turn off the power of the whole (all structural units), and only the part corresponding to the forgetting to install (for example, a light emitting means such as an LED that illuminates the panel member 520) You can turn it off. This makes it easier for operators and players to recognize that the installation plate 540 or the like has not been installed.

On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, the operation of closing the front door 5 with respect to the inner frame 4 without the installation plates 540, 3540, the top plate 4530, or the slide plate 6540 being attached to the predetermined positions is at least It may be formed so that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on when it is performed. In this case, turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 may turn on the power of the whole (all structural units), and only the part corresponding to the forgetting to install (for example, a light emitting means such as an LED that illuminates the panel member 520) You can turn it on. This makes it easier for operators and players to recognize that the installation plate 540 or the like has not been installed.

In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 1 was explained as an example, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to different types of gaming machines. Slot machines, for example, are examples of different types of gaming machines. In this case, for example, in the eighth embodiment, a case was described in which the projecting member 8713 projects into the game area PE to disable the game. By using the displacement, the selector may be operated to disable insertion of coins (cannot be inserted or ejected even if inserted). Further, for example, in the ninth embodiment, the case where the rotating member of the operating handle 51 is disabled by displacing the protruding member 9724 has been described. The operation of the operating lever may be disabled by utilizing the displacement of the member corresponding to . Also in these cases, the same effects as in the eighth and ninth embodiments can be obtained.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, the case where part of the abnormality display device 11518 is formed of a transparent material has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a sticker or the like having an opening only in a light-transmitting region may be attached to the abnormality display device 11518 which is entirely (integrally) formed of a transparent material. In addition to the seal, the area other than the area through which light is transmitted to the abnormality display device 11518 may be painted.

In this case, since the abnormality display device 11518 can be formed as an integral part, the formation of the abnormality display device 11518 can be simplified. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the abnormality display device 11518 can be reduced.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, the panel member 11520 is arranged on the back side of the opaque region R2 to make the operator aware of an abnormality. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the operator forgets to return the lock member 560 and closes the front door 11005 with respect to the inner frame 4, the rotary member 11810 may be rotated in the direction opposite to that of the eleventh embodiment.

In this case, by forming the panel member 11520 from a flexible resin material, the panel member 11520 can be sandwiched between the top plate 530 and the rotating member 11810 and deformed. As a result, the operator can visually confirm the state of the panel member 11520 that there is an abnormality in the panel member 11520 . As a result, it can be made easy to judge that the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal during work.

In the twelfth embodiment described above, when the panel member 12520 displays one decoration (the first division plate 12520a to the fourth division plate 12520d are displaced in the vertical direction), the fourth division plate 12520d is , the back side of the opaque region R2 of the main body member 11510, and the third dividing plate 12520c is disposed on the back side of the transparent region R1, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the entire front surface of the main body member 11510 may be formed with the transparent region R1, or the transparent region R1 may be formed up to the front side of the fourth dividing plate 12520d.

In this case, if the operator forgets to return the lock member 560 from the second position to the first position after replacing the panel member 12520, the operator can visually confirm that the split plates are stacked in the front-rear direction. You can make it easier. Therefore, the operator can easily recognize the abnormality of the panel member 12520 . As a result, the operator can easily recognize that there is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (the locking member 560 has been forgotten to be returned).

In the twelfth embodiment, when the rotating member 12810 is displaced (rotated), the plurality of split plates of the panel member 12520 overlap in the front-rear direction, and by returning the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 12810, the panel member 12520 is displaced (rotated). Although the case where the plurality of split plates are arranged at positions shifted in the vertical direction has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, once the plurality of split plates of the panel member 12520 are overlapped in the front-rear direction, they are fixed in that state. You may try not to go back to

In this case, when the player closes the front door 12004 with respect to the inner frame 4 after committing fraud, the panel member 12520 is deformed by operating the lock member 560 incorrectly. This makes it easier for the machine 1 to recognize that an unauthorized operation has been performed.

In the thirteenth embodiment, after the rotating member 13810 rotates, the front end side (fastened portion 11812 side) approaches the opening between the main body member 13510 and the top plate 13530, but this is not necessarily the case. not a thing For example, after rotating member 13810 rotates, the tip side (fastened portion 11812 side) may protrude from the opening between main body member 13510 and top plate 13530 .

In this case, the fastening (screwed) portion between the panel member 13520 and the rotating member 13810 can be projected outside the main part 13003 of the game machine, so that the panel member 13520 can be easily removed from the rotating member 13810 .

In the thirteenth embodiment, the panel member 13520 is fastened to the rotating member 13810, and when the rotating member 13810 is rotated, the panel member 13520 protrudes outward from the gaming machine main section 13003. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the panel member 13520 is engaged with the tip of the rotating member 13810, and when the rotating member 13810 is rotated, the panel member 13520 protrudes outward from the main part of the gaming machine and engages with the rotating member 13810. The combination may be canceled.

In this case, if there is a problem in the replacement work of the panel member 13520 (forgetting to return the lock member 13560 from the second position to the first position), the panel member 13520 can be dropped from the main part 13003 of the game machine. The operator who replaces the 13520 can easily recognize that there is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (the locking member 13560 has been forgotten to return).

In the thirteenth embodiment, the panel member 13520 protrudes (protrudes) toward the upper rear side of the main body member 13510 when the operator forgets to return the lock member 13560, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, the rotating member 13810 may be configured to protrude toward the upper front side of the main body member 13510 .

In this case, since the panel member 13520 protrudes on the front side of the main body member 13510, when the front door 13005 is closed with respect to the inner frame 4, if the operator does not notice the protrusion of the panel member 13520, the worker can By visually recognizing the pachinko machine 1 from the left and right sides, it is possible to easily recognize that a part (the panel member 13520) protrudes to the front side. As a result, the operator who replaces the panel member 13520 or another operator can easily recognize that there is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (the lock member 13560 has been forgotten to return).

Furthermore, in this case, the panel member 13520 projecting from the body member 13510 is arranged at a position where at least a part of the projecting tip of the panel member 13520 overlaps with the body member 13510 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. is preferred. According to this, the main body member 13510 is hidden (overlapped) by the panel member 13520, so that part of the main body member 13510 is difficult to see. As a result, the operator who replaces the panel member 13520 or another operator can easily recognize that there is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (the lock member 13560 has been forgotten to return).

In the eleventh to thirteenth embodiments, by rotating the rotating members 11810, 12810, 13810, the positions of the panel members 11520, 12520, 13520 fastened to the rotating members 11810, 12810, 13810 are displaced. However, it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the members to which the panel members 11520, 12520, 13520 are fastened may be slid to displace the positions of the panel members 11520, 12520, 13520.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the game machine of the present invention are shown.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the One-Way Clutch 3580 as an Example>
a first frame member, a second frame member attached to the first frame member so as to be openable and closable, a third member disposed at a predetermined position of one of the first frame member and the second frame member; and wherein the third member is formed to be displaceable at least from the predetermined position, wherein the third member is moved to the predetermined position by opening the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is allowed to displace at least from, and in a state in which the third member is not arranged at the predetermined position, closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is restricted. Gaming machine A1 to play.

Here, it comprises a first frame, a second frame attached to the first frame so as to be openable and closable, and a third member (decoration panel 25) arranged on either the first frame or the second frame. , and a game machine in which the third member is at least displaceable from a predetermined position is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2001-104546).

According to this gaming machine, the third member is at least displaced (or removed) from a predetermined position, thereby enabling a predetermined operation (for example, inspection, adjustment, replacement of parts, etc.) by the operator. . On the other hand, by returning the third member to the predetermined position, it is possible to restrict the operator or the player from performing a predetermined operation.

However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that the third member may be forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position. If the third member is forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position, the portion where the third member is to be arranged is opened, and there is a risk that the opened portion will be used to commit fraud.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, by opening the second frame member with respect to the first frame member, the third member is allowed to be at least displaced from the predetermined position, and the third member is When the second frame member is not arranged at the predetermined position, the closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is restricted, so that forgetting to return the third member to the predetermined position can be suppressed.

That is, according to the gaming machine A1, in order to at least displace the third member from the predetermined position, it is necessary to open the second frame member with respect to the first frame member. When the second frame member is at least displaced from the position, the operator can always perform the operation of closing the second frame member with respect to the first frame member as an essential work. In this case, unless the third member is returned to the predetermined position, the second frame member cannot be closed with respect to the first frame member, and a playable state cannot be formed, so the third member is forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position. can be reliably suppressed.

It should be noted that displacing at least the third member means not only displacing the third member while it is disposed on either the first frame member or the second frame member, but also displacing the first frame member or the second frame member. A mode in which the third member is removed from one of the frame members is also included. Examples of the predetermined operation performed by at least displacing the third member include the case of removing and replacing a target part or device, the case of adjusting the arrangement direction, the case of operating a switch, and the like. be.

In the game machine A1, when the second frame member is opened with respect to the first frame member and the third member is at least displaced from the predetermined position, the second frame member is moved with respect to the first frame member, A gaming machine A2 comprising prohibiting means for prohibiting displacement from the open position at least in the closing direction.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, when the second frame member is opened with respect to the first frame member and the third member is at least displaced from the predetermined position, the Since the second frame member is provided with the prohibiting means for prohibiting the second frame member from being displaced from the open position at least in the closing direction, it is possible to prevent forgetting to return the third member to the predetermined position.

That is, by making it impossible to close the second frame member with respect to the first frame member unless the third member is returned to the predetermined position, it is possible to prevent forgetting to return the third member. However, in this case, for example, in a state in which the second frame member overlaps the first frame member, a predetermined member is interposed between the two to prevent the closed state from being formed (that is, the first frame member structure that allows the displacement of the second frame member in the closing direction with respect to the member), the second frame member is displaced in the closing direction with respect to the first frame member even if the closed state is not actually formed. , there is a risk that the operator will mistakenly recognize that a closed state has been formed due to the overlapping of the two. In addition, if the closing operation is performed with a large force, the second frame member may collide with the first frame member while sandwiching a predetermined member, resulting in damage.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A2, when the third member is at least displaced from the predetermined position, the prohibiting means prohibits the second frame member from at least being displaced in the closing direction with respect to the first frame member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from erroneously recognizing that the closed state has been formed. In addition, by prohibiting the displacement in the closing direction, it is possible to avoid damage due to a collision that accompanies the closing operation.

The game machine A3 in the game machine A2 is characterized in that the prohibiting means permits the second frame member to be displaced in the opening direction with respect to the first frame member.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, the prohibition means allows the second frame member to be displaced in the opening direction with respect to the first frame member. It is possible to make the operator easily recognize that the third member has forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position by forming an operation different from failure of the connecting portion with the frame member and foreign matter getting caught.

In the game machine A3, the prohibiting means comprises a one-way clutch, and by the operation of the one-way clutch, the second frame member is prohibited from being displaced in the closing direction with respect to the first frame member, and the first frame member is A gaming machine A4 characterized in that it is formed so as to allow the second frame member to be displaced in the opening direction with respect to the member.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the prohibition of displacement of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member in the closing direction and the displacement of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member in the opening direction are prohibited. Since the tolerance is formed by the operation of the one-way clutch, once displaced in the opening direction, displacement in the closing direction from that position can be prohibited. The opening angle of the second frame member relative to the member can be increased. Therefore, the operator can easily recognize that the third member has not been returned to the predetermined position, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the second frame member from being forcibly pushed in the closing direction and damaged.

The gaming machine A1 is provided with a locking device for locking the second frame member with respect to the first frame member, and the locking device is in an unlocked state when the third member is not arranged at the predetermined position. A gaming machine A5 characterized by:

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, it is equipped with a locking device for locking the second frame member with respect to the first frame member. Since the device is in the unlocked state, even if the second frame member is displaced in the closing direction with respect to the first frame member, it is possible to create a state in which locking is not performed. Therefore, the operator can be made to recognize that the third member is not arranged at the predetermined position, and it is possible to suppress forgetting to return the third member to the predetermined position.

In the gaming machine A5, when the second frame member is displaced in the closing direction with respect to the first frame member in a state in which the third member is not arranged at the predetermined position, the second frame member is opened. A gaming machine A6 characterized by comprising an urging member that urges the game machine A6.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of the game machine A5, when the second frame member is displaced in the closing direction with respect to the first frame member while the third member is not arranged at the predetermined position, Since the urging member that urges the second frame member in the opening direction is provided, the operator can easily recognize that the third member is not arranged at the predetermined position.

That is, for example, when the second frame member is displaced in the closing direction with respect to the first frame member, if the locking is not performed, the second frame member overlaps the first frame member, and the closing mechanism is closed. The operator may mistakenly recognize that the On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A6, when the second frame member is displaced with respect to the first frame member in the closing direction, the second frame member is pushed back in the opening direction by the biasing force of the biasing member. , can form an open state. Therefore, the operator can easily recognize that the third member is not arranged at the predetermined position.

Also, if the closing operation is performed with a large force, the second frame member may collide with the first frame member and be damaged, but such collision can be buffered by the biasing force of the biasing member. Therefore, damage can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine A6, the biasing member is formed to be capable of biasing the second frame member in the opening direction when the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member. Gaming machine A7.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of the game machine A6, the biasing member can bias the second frame member in the opening direction when the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member. Since it is formed, when the second frame member is opened from the closed state with respect to the first frame member, the force required for opening can be assisted by the biasing force of the biasing member. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the operator when opening the second frame member with respect to the first frame member.

In game machines A1 to A7, when the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member in a state in which the third member is at least displaced from the predetermined position, the first frame member and the second frame member A gaming machine A8 characterized by comprising an urging member interposed between and elastically deformed.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 to A7, when the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member in a state in which the third member is at least displaced from the predetermined position, the first Since the urging member is interposed between the frame member and the second frame member and is elastically deformed, the force of collision between the first frame member and the second frame member is weakened by the cushioning effect accompanying the elastic deformation of the urging member. be able to. As a result, breakage and damage due to collision can be suppressed.

In the game machine A8, an operation member is provided which is operable at least at a first position or a second position in a state where the second frame member is opened with respect to the first frame member, and the operation member is operated at the second position. The operation member is interposed between the first frame member and the second frame member to restrict the closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member, and the urging member acts as the operation member. A gaming machine A9 characterized by being housed in a member.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of the game machine A8, the operating member is formed to be operable at least at the first position or the second position in a state in which the second frame member is opened with respect to the first frame member. and the operating member operated to the second position is interposed between the first frame member and the second frame member, thereby restricting the closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member and biasing the second frame member. Since the member is accommodated in the operation member, the biasing member can be easily elastically deformed between the first frame member and the second frame member, and space efficiency can be improved.

In the gaming machine A9, the biasing member is elastically deformed between the first frame member and the second frame member when the second frame member is closed to the first frame member. Gaming machine A10.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A9, the urging member, in a state where the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member, is arranged between the first frame member and the second frame member. Since the second frame member is elastically deformed, when the second frame member is to be opened from the first frame member, the elastic recovery force of the biasing member is used as a force to assist the opening operation, and the operator can perform the opening operation. can assist.

The game machine A10 includes a deformation imparting section that elastically deforms the biasing member in a state in which the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member, and the second frame member is provided with respect to the first frame member. The game machine A11 is characterized in that elastic deformation of the biasing member by the deformation imparting section is released in an open state.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effects of the game machine A10, the first frame member is provided with a deformation imparting section that elastically deforms the biasing member in a state in which the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member. Since the elastic deformation of the biasing member by the deformation imparting section is released in a state in which the second frame member is released with respect to the first frame member, when the second frame member is released with respect to the first frame member, biasing By increasing the elastic recovery force of the member, the opening operation can be facilitated. The momentum of collision between the first frame member and the second frame member can be easily weakened.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Lock Member 560 as an Example>
a first frame member, a second frame member attached to the first frame member so as to be openable and closable, a third member disposed at a predetermined position of one of the first frame member and the second frame member; wherein the third member is at least displaceable from the predetermined position, wherein the third member is at least at the first position or the second position in a state where the second frame member is opened with respect to the first frame member An operating member formed to be operable is provided, and when the operating member is operated from the first position to the second position, the third member is allowed to be at least displaced from the predetermined position. By disposing the member at the predetermined position, the operating member can be operated from the second position to the first position, and at least in a state where the operating member is not operated to the first position, the The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is restricted.

Here, it comprises a first frame, a second frame attached to the first frame so as to be openable and closable, and a third member (decoration panel 25) arranged on either the first frame or the second frame. , and a game machine in which the third member is at least displaceable from a predetermined position is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2001-104546).

According to this gaming machine, the third member is at least displaced (or removed) from a predetermined position, thereby enabling a predetermined operation (for example, inspection, adjustment, replacement of parts, etc.) by the operator. . On the other hand, by returning the third member to the predetermined position, it is possible to restrict the operator or the player from performing a predetermined operation.

However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that the third member may be forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position. If the third member is forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position, the portion where the third member should be placed is opened, and there is a risk that the opened portion will be used to commit fraud.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, by operating the operating member from the first position to the second position, the third member is allowed to displace at least from the predetermined position. When the second frame member is not positioned at the first position, the closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is restricted, and in order to operate the operating member from the second position to the first position, the third member Since it is necessary to arrange the third member at a predetermined position, it is possible to prevent forgetting to return the third member to the predetermined position.

That is, according to the game machine B1, in order to at least displace the third member from the predetermined position, it is necessary to operate the operating member from the first position to the second position, and the operating member must be moved to the first position. Since the closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is restricted in the state where the second frame member is not operated, the operator is required to operate the operation member from the second position to the first position as an essential task. You can definitely do it. In this case, since the operation member cannot be operated from the second position to the first position unless the third member is returned to the predetermined position, it is possible to reliably prevent forgetting to return the third member to the predetermined position.

In the game machine B1, when the operation member is operated to the second position, the operation member is interposed between the first frame member and the second frame member, thereby A gaming machine B2 characterized in that closing of the second frame member is regulated by pressing.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, the operation member is interposed between the first frame member and the second frame member when the operation member is operated to at least the second position. Therefore, the closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is regulated, so that the product cost can be reduced. In other words, the operation member can perform both the role of switching between regulation and allowance of the displacement of the third member and the role of regulating the closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member. It is possible to eliminate the need to separately provide a member for this purpose. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

The gaming machine B2 includes a displacement member displaceably disposed on one of the first frame member and the second frame member, and an urging member that applies an urging force to the displacement member, and the operation member is When operated from the first position to the second position, the displacement member is displaced by the biasing force of the biasing member to a position that restricts movement of the operating member from the second position to the first position. A game machine B3 characterized by.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, a displacement member displaceably disposed on one of the first frame member and the second frame member and an urging force for applying an urging force to the displacement member a member, wherein when the operation member is operated from the first position to the second position, the displacement member moves to a position that restricts the movement of the operation member from the second position to the first position with the biasing force of the biasing member. Therefore, when the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member while the operation member remains at the second position, the operation member moves from the second position to the first position. can be reliably suppressed. That is, it is possible to prevent the second frame member from being closed with respect to the first frame member when the third member is not returned to the predetermined position.

In the game machine B3, the displacement member can be displaced to a position that allows the operation member to move from the second position to the first position when the third member is arranged at the predetermined position. A gaming machine B4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, it is possible to prevent forgetting to return the third member to the predetermined position. That is, in order to close the second frame member with respect to the first frame member, it is necessary to operate the operating member from the second position to the first position. to a position that allows it to move from the second position to the first position, and this displacement of the displacement member requires the placement of the third member in place. Therefore, unless the third member is returned to the predetermined position, the operation member cannot be operated from the second position to the first position, and the second frame member must be closed with respect to the first frame member (that is, the game can be played). Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent forgetting to return the third member to the predetermined position.

In the gaming machine B4, the displacement member is directly or indirectly acted upon by the third member when the third member is arranged at the predetermined position, thereby moving the operating member from the second position. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being displaced to a position that allows movement to the first position.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4, when the third member is arranged at the predetermined position, the third member is directly or indirectly acted on, so that the displacement member can be operated. Since the member is displaced from the second position to the position that allows movement to the first position (referred to as a displacement-allowing position), workability can be improved. That is, when the third member is placed at a predetermined position, the displacement member can be displaced to the displacement-permitting position in accordance with the movement of the third member. can. Thereby, workability can be improved.

In addition, in a structure that requires a separate operation of displacing the displacement member to the displacement-permitting position, if the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member in a state in which the displacement member is not displaced to the displacement-permitting position, However, according to the game machine B5, if the third member is placed at a predetermined position, the displacement member can be displaced. Since the member is displaced to the displacement allowable position, it is possible to suppress damage to the operating member, the displacement member, etc. when the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member.

In any one of game machines B3 to B5, the operating member is operated from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member is moved to a position that restricts movement of the operating member from the second position to the first position. When displaced by the biasing force of the biasing member, the displacement member acts directly or indirectly on the third member to displace the third member by a predetermined amount. .

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B3 to B5, the operation member is operated from the first position to the second position, and the movement of the operation member from the second position to the first position is performed. When the displacement member is displaced to the regulating position by the biasing force of the biasing member, the displacement member acts directly or indirectly on the third member to displace the third member by a predetermined amount (for example, while floating). Therefore, the third member can be easily displaced or removed, and workability can be improved.

In any one of the game machines B3 to B5, the operation member is formed so that a tip side thereof can be bent, and the bent tip side is sandwiched between the first frame member and the second frame member so that the operation member can be bent. The gaming machine B7 is characterized in that closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is restricted.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B3 to B5, the operation member is formed such that the tip side thereof can be bent, and the bent tip side is positioned between the first frame member and the second frame member. Since the closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is regulated, the second frame member is held with respect to the first frame member in a state in which the operation member is operated to the second position. Even when the members are closed, it is possible to prevent the operating member from being pushed toward the displacement member, thereby suppressing damage to the operating member and the displacement member.

In game machine B7, game machine B8 is characterized in that the operation member is disposed in a posture in which the rotation axis when the tip end side is bent is aligned in a horizontal direction.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of the game machine b7, the operation member is disposed in a posture in which the rotation axis when the tip side is bent is arranged in the horizontal direction, so that the tip side is supported by its own weight. can be tilted downward. Therefore, for example, even if the operator does not bend the operation member, the operation member can be bent by the action of gravity, and the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member. In this case, the distal end side of the operating member can be securely held between them. As a result, it is possible to suppress the operation member from being pushed in, thereby suppressing damage to the operation member and the displacement member.

In game machines B1 to B8, a target member is provided that can be removed from one of the first frame member and the second frame member by displacing the third member from the predetermined position, and the target member is the first frame member. A gaming machine B9 characterized in that, in a state in which the second frame member is not disposed on either the frame member or the second frame member, the closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is restricted.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B8, the object that can be removed from either the first frame member or the second frame member by at least displacing the third member from the predetermined position When the member is provided and the target member is not arranged on either the first frame member or the second frame member, the closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is restricted. It is possible to suppress forgetting to return.

In the game machine B9, the target member is formed to be attachable to the third member, and the third member is not disposed at the predetermined position while the target member is attached to the third member. The gaming machine B10 is characterized in that, in the state, closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is restricted.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects of the game machine B9, the target member is formed to be attachable to the third member, and the third member is arranged at the predetermined position while the target member is attached to the third member. When the second frame member is not provided, closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is restricted. A state can be created in which the second frame member cannot be closed with respect to the frame member. Thereby, forgetting to return the third member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the third member is disposed on one of the first frame member and the second frame member so as to be displaceable between the predetermined position and the open position, and is arranged relative to the first frame member. When the second frame member is opened and the third member is displaced to the predetermined position, the operating member can be operated to the first position or the second position, and the third member is arranged at the open position. The game machine B11 is characterized in that, in the closed state, the operation of the operating member from the second position to the first position is restricted by the third member.

According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1 or B2, the third member is disposed on either the first frame member or the second frame member so as to be displaceable between the predetermined position and the open position, When the second frame member is opened with respect to the first frame member and the third member is displaced to a predetermined position, the operation member can be operated to the first position or the second position, and the third member is in the open position. , the operation member is restricted from being operated from the second position to the first position by the third member, so that the operation member is restricted from moving from the second position to the first position. It is not necessary to separately provide the third member, and the role of such a member can be shared by the third member. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

In the game machine B11, the third member projects outward from either the first frame member or the second frame member when displaced to the open position.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B11, when the third member is displaced to the open position, it protrudes outward from either the first frame member or the second frame member. This makes it easier for the operator to recognize the three members. That is, since the third member protrudes outward from one of the first frame member and the second frame member, it is possible to prevent the third member from being returned to the predetermined position in a state where the third member does not return to the first frame member. It is possible to suppress the two frame members from being closed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Launch Control Member 8710 as an Example>
A gaming machine comprising a predetermined position arrangement member formed so as to be at least displaceable from a predetermined position, wherein when the predetermined position arrangement member is at least displaced, a predetermined work can be performed at the predetermined position. The game machine C1 is characterized in that a state in which a game cannot be played is created when the installation member is not arranged at the predetermined position.

Here, there is known a game machine provided with a predetermined position arrangement member (decoration panel 25) that is at least displaceable (or detachable) from a predetermined position (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-104546).

According to this game machine, the predetermined position arrangement member is at least displaced (or removed) from the predetermined position, so that the operator can perform a predetermined operation (for example, inspection, adjustment, replacement of parts, etc.). be done. On the other hand, by returning the predetermined position arrangement member to the predetermined position, it is possible to restrict the operator or the player from performing a predetermined operation.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is a possibility that the predetermined position arrangement member may be forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position. If the predetermined-position member is forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position, the portion where the predetermined-position member should originally be disposed is released, which may cause a game involving cheating. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, when the predetermined position arrangement member is not arranged at the predetermined position, a state in which the game cannot be played is created, thereby suppressing the playing of the game involving cheating. can.

In the case of the pachinko machine 1, for example, the state in which the game machine cannot operate means a state in which at least game balls are not allowed to flow into the game area. Therefore, even if the game ball can be shot, if the shot game ball does not flow into the game area, it corresponds to the state where the game is not performed. For example, in the case of a slot machine, it means a state in which a coin cannot be inserted, or a state in which the operating lever cannot be operated regardless of whether or not a coin can be inserted.

In the gaming machine C1, the gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the game disabling means disables the game by regulating the flow of game balls into the game area.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the game disabling means disables the game by regulating the flow of game balls into the game area. By avoiding the ball from entering the ball entrance of the game area, it is possible to suppress the playing of a game involving cheating. In addition, when a player who is not involved in a fraudulent act plays a game unintentionally, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the game cannot be played.

The gaming machine C2 comprises a shooting means for shooting game balls according to the player's operation, and a guide path for guiding the game balls shot by the shooting means to the game area, wherein the game disabling means A game machine characterized in that when the predetermined position arrangement member is not arranged at the predetermined position, the game is disabled by restricting passage of the game ball through the guide path. C3.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, the game disabling means restricts the game ball from passing through the guideway when the predetermined position arrangement member is not arranged at the predetermined position. This makes it impossible to play the game, so that the shot game ball can be returned to the shooting device or the lower tray. In other words, when a player who is not involved in the fraudulent act plays the game unintentionally, it is possible to make the player easily aware that the game cannot be played, and to avoid giving such a player a disadvantage. .

In the gaming machine C3, the game disabling means includes a protruding member that protrudes into the guideway so as to be visible when the predetermined position arrangement member is not arranged at the predetermined position, and protrudes into the guideway. The game machine C4 is characterized in that the projecting member restricts the passage of the game ball through the guide path, thereby disabling the game.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3, the game disabling means is provided with a protruding member that protrudes visibly into the guideway when the predetermined position arrangement member is not arranged at the predetermined position. Since the passage of the game ball in the guideway is restricted by the protruding member that protrudes into the guideway, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the game cannot be played.

In addition, the protruding member is located in the vicinity of the return ball prevention member (a member disposed at the end of the guide path to prevent the game ball released to the game area from returning to the guide path) (10 times the diameter of the game ball). It is preferable to dispose at a distance of twice or less). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for a player watching the destination of the game ball shot from the shooting means to recognize the presence of the protruding member.

In the game machine C4, the guide path is curved in an arc shape, and the protruding member is disposed inside the curved guide path curved in the arc shape and outside the guide path. A game machine C5 characterized in that a non-formation area of the protruding member is formed.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4, the guideway is formed to be curved in an arc shape, and the protruding member is disposed inside the curve of the guideway curved in an arc shape and guides the guideway. Since the non-formed area of the projecting member is formed on the curved outside of the path, the game ball guided to the guide path can be passed through the outside of the curve, that is, the non-formed area of the projecting member by centrifugal force. Therefore, it is possible to suppress jumping of the game ball.

That is, even when the protruding member is retracted (not protruded), a step is formed between the guide path and the protruding member due to assembly tolerances and dimensional tolerances of the parts. Therefore, when the game ball guided to the guideway passes through the steps, there is a risk of jumping. In this case, not only is the stable inflow of the game ball into the game area hindered, but there is a risk that the bouncing game ball will collide with the glass of the glass frame and damage it. On the other hand, if it is possible to pass through the non-formation area of the protruding member, the influence of the step can be suppressed, and the jumping of the game ball can be suppressed.

The gaming machine C1 is provided with an operation handle operated by a player to shoot a game ball, and the game disabling means is configured to perform the operation when the predetermined position arrangement member is not arranged at the predetermined position. The game machine C6 is characterized in that it is impossible to play a game by restricting the operation of the handle.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the game disabling means regulates the operation of the operation handle when the predetermined position arrangement member is not arranged at the predetermined position, thereby preventing the game from being played. Since it is impossible to play, it is possible to avoid the game ball from entering the ball entrance of the game area and suppress the game involving cheating. In addition, when a player who is not involved in a fraudulent act plays a game unintentionally, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the game cannot be played.

In the game machine C4, a first frame member and a second frame member attached to the first frame member so as to be openable and closable are provided, and the predetermined position arrangement member is the first frame member or the second frame member. By disposing the second frame member relative to the first frame member, the predetermined position member is allowed to be displaced at least from the predetermined position, and the game The disabling means causes the protruding member to protrude by the action when the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member when the predetermined position arrangement member is not arranged at the predetermined position. A gaming machine C7 characterized by:

The game machine C6 comprises a first frame member and a second frame member attached to the first frame member so as to be openable and closable, and the predetermined position arrangement member is the first frame member or the second frame member. By disposing the second frame member relative to the first frame member, the predetermined position member is allowed to be displaced at least from the predetermined position, and the game The disabling means restricts the operation of the operating handle by the action when the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member when the predetermined position arrangement member is not arranged at the predetermined position. A gaming machine C8 characterized by:

According to the game machine C7 or C8, in addition to the effects of the game machine C5 or C6, the projection of the projecting member or the regulation of the operation of the operating handle is effective when the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a drive source for restricting the projection of the projecting member or the operation of the operating handle, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, in order to at least displace the predetermined position member from the predetermined position, it is necessary to open the second frame member with respect to the first frame member. When displaced, the operation of closing the second frame member with respect to the first frame member can always be performed. Therefore, when the predetermined position arrangement member is forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position and the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member, it is possible to reliably create a state in which the game cannot be played.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Handle Protruding Member 9720 as an Example>
a first frame member, a second frame member attached to the first frame member so as to be openable and closable, a third member disposed at a predetermined position of one of the first frame member and the second frame member; and wherein the third member is formed to be displaceable at least from the predetermined position, wherein the third member is moved to the predetermined position by opening the second frame member with respect to the first frame member and when the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member in a state where the third member is not arranged at the predetermined position, a predetermined notification is made. A gaming machine D1 characterized by:

Here, it comprises a first frame, a second frame attached to the first frame so as to be openable and closable, and a third member (decoration panel 25) arranged on either the first frame or the second frame. , and a game machine in which the third member is at least displaceable from a predetermined position is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2001-104546).

According to this gaming machine, the third member is at least displaced (or removed) from a predetermined position, thereby enabling a predetermined operation (for example, inspection, adjustment, replacement of parts, etc.) by the operator. . On the other hand, by returning the third member to the predetermined position, it is possible to restrict the operator or the player from performing a predetermined operation.

However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that the third member may be forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position. If the third member is forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position, the portion where the third member is to be arranged is opened, and there is a risk that the opened portion will be used to commit fraud.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, by opening the second frame member with respect to the first frame member, the third member is allowed to be at least displaced from the predetermined position, and the third member is When the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member in a state in which it is not arranged at the predetermined position, a predetermined notification is given. It can be made to recognize forgetting to return to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the third member from forgetting to return to the predetermined position.

That is, according to the gaming machine D1, in order to at least displace the third member from the predetermined position, it is necessary to open the second frame member with respect to the first frame member. When the second frame member is at least displaced from the position, the operator can always perform the operation of closing the second frame member with respect to the first frame member as an essential work. Therefore, in one of the procedures that the worker must always perform to close the second frame member, the predetermined notification is performed, so that the worker can easily recognize that the third member has been forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position. .

In the game machine D1, the predetermined notification is performed by projecting a predetermined member outward from the first frame member or the second frame member.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the predetermined notification is performed by projecting a predetermined member outward from either the first frame member or the second frame member. In relation to the protrusion of the predetermined member, the operator can be made to recognize that the third member has forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position.

In the game machine D2, the game machine D3 is characterized in that the projection of the predetermined member from the second frame member is started at least during an operation of closing the second frame member with respect to the first frame member.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects of the game machine D2, the predetermined member starts to protrude from the second frame member at least during the operation of closing the second frame member with respect to the first frame member. , the projection of the predetermined member can be easily recognized by the operator. For example, when a predetermined member protrudes from the second frame member after the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member, the worker's consciousness is already directed to the next work at that time. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize that the predetermined member protrudes from the second frame member. On the other hand, during the closing operation, since there is a high possibility that the worker's awareness is directed toward the second frame member, at least the worker can easily recognize that the predetermined member has started to protrude.

In the game machine D2 or D3, the predetermined member is arranged on the front surface of the second frame member, and protrudes from the second frame member by tilting the upper side forward with the lower side as a fulcrum. A gaming machine D4 characterized by:

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of the game machine D2 or D3, the predetermined member is arranged on the front surface of the second frame member, and tilts the upper side forward with the lower side as the fulcrum, thereby Since it projects from the second frame member, the projection of the predetermined member from the front surface of the second frame member can be easily recognized by the operator who closes the second frame member.

In the gaming machine D4, the second frame member is pivotally supported so that one side in the width direction can be opened and closed with respect to the first frame member, and the predetermined member is disposed on the other side in the width direction of the second frame member. A gaming machine D5 characterized by:

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of the game machine D3, the second frame member is pivotally supported so that one side in the width direction can be opened and closed with respect to the first frame member, and the predetermined member is the second frame member. Since it is disposed on the other side in the width direction, it is possible to make it easier for the worker to come into contact with the predetermined member when performing the operation of closing the second frame member with respect to the first frame member. That is, when closing the second frame member, the operator operates (by hand) the other side in the width direction of the second frame member opposite to the side supported by the first frame member. By arranging the predetermined member on the other side, the predetermined member that tilts forward and protrudes to the front surface of the second frame member can be easily brought into contact with the operator. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the operator to recognize that the third member has forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position.

In the gaming machine D3, the second frame member is pivotally supported so that one side in the width direction can be opened and closed with respect to the first frame member, and the predetermined member is disposed on the other side in the width direction of the second frame member. A gaming machine D6 characterized in that

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, the second frame member is pivotally supported so that one side in the width direction can be opened and closed with respect to the first frame member, and the predetermined member is the second frame member. Since it is disposed on the other side in the width direction, when a worker performs an operation of closing the second frame member with respect to the first frame member, the worker can easily recognize that the predetermined member is protruding. can do. That is, when closing the second frame member, the operator operates (by hand) the other side in the width direction of the second frame member opposite to the side supported by the first frame member. By arranging the predetermined member on the other side, it is possible to make it easier to press the projecting tip of the predetermined member against the operator's hand. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the operator to recognize that the third member has forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position.

It should be noted that the predetermined member may protrude from the operation handle for adjusting the intensity of shooting the game ball. When the second frame member is to be closed with respect to the first frame member, the operator often operates the operation handle (push it in manually). can be made easier to apply.

A gaming machine D7, which is a gaming machine D2 or D3, further comprising an operation handle operated by a player to shoot a game ball, wherein the predetermined member protrudes from the operation handle.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects of the game machine D2 or D3, the predetermined member protrudes from the operating handle, so that the player can easily recognize the protrusion of the predetermined member from the operating handle. can be done.

A game machine D8 in the game machine D7, wherein the predetermined member protrudes from the front of the operation handle.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects of the game machine D7, the predetermined member protrudes from the front of the operation handle, so that the operation of the operation handle by the player can be prevented by the predetermined member. can. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the protrusion from the operating handle.

In the game machines D2 to D8, the predetermined member protruding from the second frame member can return to the state before the projection by arranging the third member at the predetermined position. A game machine D9.

According to the game machine D9, in any one of the game machines D2 to D8, the third member is arranged at a predetermined position, so that the predetermined member protruding from the second frame member can return to the state before the projection. That is, unless the third member is returned to the predetermined position, the predetermined member is maintained in a state of protruding from the second frame member, so that forgetting to return the third member to the predetermined position can be suppressed.

In any one of game machines D2 to D9, the predetermined member protrudes from the second frame member by directly or indirectly acting on the first frame member to close the second frame member. A gaming machine D10 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D2 to D9, the operation of closing the second frame member is directly or indirectly acted on the first frame member, thereby achieving a predetermined Since the member protrudes from the second frame member, it is not necessary to separately provide a drive source for protruding such a predetermined member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, in order to at least displace the third member from the predetermined position, it is necessary to open the second frame member with respect to the first frame member. Alternatively, the operation of closing the second frame member with respect to the first frame member can always be performed. Therefore, when the third member is forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position and the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member, a state in which the predetermined member protrudes from the second frame member can be reliably formed.

The game machine D11 is characterized in that the game machine D1 is provided with a panel member arranged on the second frame member and for displaying information, and the predetermined notification is performed by displacing the panel member.

According to the game machine D11, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, since the predetermined notification is performed by displacing the panel member, the operator is asked to return the third member in association with the displacement of the panel member. Forgetting can be recognized.

In particular, if the panel member is displaced, it is possible to prevent the player's game from being hindered (playing difficult). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being spoiled.

The information displayed on the panel member includes, for example, the model of the gaming machine, specs, images of characters, and the like. In other words, the form of display is not limited to characters, and may be arbitrary such as photographs, pictures, and graphs.

In the game machine D11, the game D12 is characterized in that the predetermined notification displaces the panel member so that at least a part of the panel member is invisible.

According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D11, the predetermined notification displaces the panel member so that at least a portion of the panel member is invisible, so that the panel member is displaced. It is possible to make the operator easily recognize that the panel member has been displaced by increasing the difference from the state before the displacement. As a result, the operator can more reliably recognize that the third member has been forgotten to be returned.

In the game machine D12, a fourth member is provided, and the predetermined notification is a state in which at least a portion of the panel member is made invisible by displacing at least a portion of the panel member toward the back side of the fourth member. A gaming machine D13 characterized by forming

According to the gaming machine D13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D12, the predetermined notification displaces at least a part of the panel member to the back side of the fourth member, and utilizes the shielding by the fourth member. At least a portion of the panel member can reliably form an invisible state. Therefore, the operator can easily recognize that the panel member has been displaced, and the operator can more reliably recognize that the third member has not been returned.

In the game machine D12, the panel member is formed to be deformable, and the predetermined notification is made by deforming the panel member as the panel member is displaced, so that at least a part of the panel member is invisible. A gaming machine D14 characterized by forming.

According to the game machine D14, in addition to the effects of the game machine D12, the predetermined notification deforms the panel member as the panel member is displaced, so that at least a part of the panel member is invisible. In addition to making it easier for the operator to recognize that the panel member has been displaced, the space required for displacing the panel member (the space required for receiving the displaced panel member) can be reduced. Therefore, the installation space for other members can be secured accordingly.

In addition, as a mode of deformation of the panel member, for example, the panel member is formed from a flexible material, and the panel member is bent (for example, curved or bent) when pressed against another member. A mode in which a panel member formed in a bellows shape (a shape in which mountain folds and valley folds are repeated) and pressed against another member is folded, the panel member is divided into a plurality of divided bodies, and the divided bodies are separated from each other. are displaceably connected, and the divided bodies of the panel member pressed against another member are displaced relative to each other.

In the game machine D12, the game machine D15 is characterized in that the predetermined notification is performed by projecting the panel member outward from the second frame member.

According to the game machine D15, in addition to the effects of the game machine D12, the predetermined notification is performed by projecting the panel member outward from the second frame member, so that the panel member is displaced. can be easily recognized by the operator, and the operator can more reliably recognize that the third member has been forgotten to be returned.

In any one of the game machines D11 to D15, after the second frame member is released with respect to the first frame member from the state in which the predetermined notification is performed, the second frame member is opened with respect to the first frame member. The game machine D16 is characterized in that when the frame member is closed, the third member is arranged at the predetermined position.

According to the gaming machine D16, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D11 to D15, after the second frame member is released with respect to the first frame member from the state where the predetermined notification is performed, When the second frame member is closed with respect to the member, the third member is arranged at the predetermined position, so that the work burden on the operator can be reduced.

That is, the fact that the predetermined notification has been made means that the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member while the third member is not arranged at the predetermined position. The present invention requires three steps of opening the second frame member with respect to the frame member, arranging the third member in a predetermined position, and then closing the second frame member with respect to the first frame member. Therefore, the operator can omit the step of arranging the third member in a predetermined position, and the operator only has to perform two steps of opening and closing the second frame member with respect to the first frame member. good. Therefore, the work burden on the worker can be reduced accordingly.

Also, an operator who recognized a predetermined notification (displacement of the panel member) opened the second frame member with respect to the first frame member. is not grasped, the third member can be placed at the predetermined position by closing the second frame member with respect to the first frame member. That is, the third member can be returned to the predetermined position without the operator intentionally working.

In the game machine D16, after the second frame member is opened with respect to the first frame member from the state in which the predetermined notification is performed, the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member. and the third member is arranged at the predetermined position, and the panel member is displaced to the arrangement before the predetermined notification is performed.

According to the gaming machine D17, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D16, after the second frame member is released with respect to the first frame member from the state where the predetermined notification is performed, the second frame member is opened with respect to the first frame member. When the second frame member is closed, not only is the third member placed (returned) to a predetermined position, but also the panel member is displaced to the position before the predetermined notification is performed, so that the worker's work is reduced accordingly. You can reduce the burden. In addition, the panel member can be returned to the initial position (placement before the predetermined notification is given) even if the operator does not work intentionally.

In any one of the game machines D11 to D17, the panel member is displaced by directly or indirectly acting on the first frame member to close the second frame member. Game machine D18.

According to the game machine D18, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D11 to D17, the action of closing the second frame member is directly or indirectly acted on the first frame member, and the panel member is displaced, there is no need to separately provide a drive source for displacing the panel member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, in order to at least displace the third member from the predetermined position, it is necessary to open the second frame member with respect to the first frame member. Alternatively, the operation of closing the second frame member with respect to the first frame member can always be performed. Therefore, when the third member is forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position and the second frame member is closed with respect to the first frame member, the state in which the panel member is displaced can be reliably formed.

A game machine K1, wherein the game machine is a slot machine in any one of the game machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C8 and D1 to D18. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A game machine K2, wherein the game machine is a pachinko game machine in any one of the game machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C8 and D1 to D18. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

A game machine K3 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C8 and D1 to D18, the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
A game machine such as a pachinko machine comprising a first frame, a second frame attached to the first frame so as to be openable and closable, and a third member disposed on either the first frame or the second frame. , there is a gaming machine in which the third member is at least displaceable from a predetermined position (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-100994).
However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that the third member is forgotten to be returned to the predetermined position.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing forgetting to return the third member to a predetermined position.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the game machine of Technical Thought 1 comprises: a first frame member; a second frame member attached to the first frame member so as to be openable and closable; a third member disposed at a predetermined position on one of the members, the third member being formed to be at least displaceable from the predetermined position, and the second frame relative to the first frame member; An operation member is provided that is operable in at least a first position or a second position when the member is opened, and the third member is operated by operating the operation member from the first position to the second position. is allowed to displace at least from the predetermined position, and the third member is arranged at the predetermined position, so that the operation member can be operated from the second position to the first position, and the operation Closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is restricted at least in a state where the member is not operated to the first position.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein when the operating member is operated to the second position, the operating member is positioned between the first frame member and the second frame member. The second frame member is restricted from being closed with respect to the first frame member.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, wherein a displacement member is displaceably disposed on one of the first frame member and the second frame member, and an urging force is applied to the displacement member. and an urging member that applies said displacement to a position that restricts movement of said operating member from said second position to said first position when said operating member is operated from said first position to said second position. A member is displaced by the biasing force of the biasing member.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, it is possible to prevent forgetting to return the third member to the predetermined position.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, it is possible to reduce the product cost.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, it is possible to reliably prevent the operation member from moving from the second position to the first position.
<Sign>
1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
8002 outer frame (first frame)
8003, 11003 , 12003, 13003, 14003 gaming machine main part (second frame)
4,9004 inner frame (first frame)
5 outer frame (second frame)
9005, 10005, 11005, 12005, 13005, 14005 front door (second frame)
166a-166c hook member (locking device)
27 hook receiving member (locking device)
32 game ball launching mechanism (shooting means)
42 guidance rail (taxiway)
51 operation handle
7511f insertion piece (deformation imparting part)
520 panel member (target member, predetermined position arrangement member)
4520 panel member (third member, target member, predetermined position arrangement member)
4530 top plate (third member, predetermined position arrangement member)
540, 3540 installation plate (third member, predetermined position arrangement member)
6540 slide plate (third member, predetermined position arrangement member)
560, 2560 , 3560, 7560, 8560, 9560, 13560 lock member (operating member)
562b shaft (rotating shaft)
570, 3570 lever member (displacement member)
3580 one-way clutch (prohibited means)
8710 launch regulation member (game disabling means)
8713 projecting member
9720 handle projecting member (game disabling means)
9724 projecting member (predetermined member)
10740 decorative member (predetermined member)
SP1 torsion spring (biasing member)
SP2 compression spring (biasing member)
SP3 compression spring (biasing member)
PE gaming area

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
8002 outer frame (first frame)
8003, 11003, 12003, 13003, 14003 Game machine main part (second frame)
4,9004 inner frame (first frame)
5 Outer frame (second frame)
9005, 10005, 11005, 12005, 13005, 14005 Front door (second frame)
166a-166c hook member (locking device)
27 hook receiving member (locking device)
32 game ball launching mechanism (shooting means)
42 guide rail (taxiway)
51 operation handle 7511f insertion piece (deformation imparting portion)
520 panel member (target member, predetermined position arrangement member)
4520 Panel member (third member, target member, predetermined position member)
4530 Top plate (third member, predetermined position member)
540, 3540 Interposed plate (third member, predetermined position member)
6540 slide plate (third member, predetermined position member)
560, 2560, 3560, 7560, 8560, 9560, 13560 lock member (operation member)
562b shaft (rotating shaft)
570, 3570 Lever member (displacement member)
3580 One-way clutch (prohibited means)
8710 Launch regulation member (game disabling means)
8713 Protruding member 9720 Handle protruding member (game disabling means)
9724 projecting member (predetermined member)
10740 Decorative member (predetermined member)
SP1 torsion spring (biasing member)
SP2 compression spring (biasing member)
SP3 compression spring (biasing member)
PE gaming area

Claims (3)

a first frame member, a second frame member attached to the first frame member so as to be openable and closable, a third member disposed at a predetermined position of one of the first frame member and the second frame member; A gaming machine in which the third member is formed to be at least displaceable from the predetermined position,
an operation member that is operable at least at a first position or a second position in a state where the second frame member is opened with respect to the first frame member;
By operating the operating member from the first position to the second position, the third member is allowed to be at least displaced from the predetermined position,
By arranging the third member at the predetermined position, the operating member can be operated from the second position to the first position,
The game machine is characterized in that closing of the second frame member with respect to the first frame member is regulated at least in a state in which the operation member is not operated to the first position. When the operating member is operated to the second position, the operating member is interposed between the first frame member and the second frame member so that the second frame member is positioned relative to the first frame member. 2. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the closing of the is restricted. a displacement member arranged displaceably on one of the first frame member and the second frame member; and a biasing member applying a biasing force to the displacement member, wherein The displacement member is displaced by the biasing force of the biasing member to a position that restricts movement of the operating member from the second position to the first position when the operating member is operated to the second position. Item 2. The gaming machine according to item 2.

Images